Mitsubishi Electronics General Purpose Ac Servo Mr E A Ag Users Manual
MR-E- AAG to the manual 8c5026c0-f7d0-4e9a-ac13-4ba76e2c1ab0
2015-02-09
: Mitsubishi-Electronics Mitsubishi-Electronics-General-Purpose-Ac-Servo-Mr-E-A-Ag-Users-Manual-556547 mitsubishi-electronics-general-purpose-ac-servo-mr-e-a-ag-users-manual-556547 mitsubishi-electronics pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 310
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
General-Purpose AC Servo MODEL MR-E- A/AG INSTRUCTION MANUAL B Safety Instructions (Always read these instructions before using the equipment.) Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have read through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, Servo motor Instruction Manual and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION". WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury to personnel or may cause physical damage. Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety. What must not be done and what must be done are indicated by the following diagrammatic symbols: : Indicates what must not be done. For example, "No Fire" is indicated by : Indicates what must be done. For example, grounding is indicated by . . In this Instruction Manual, instructions at a lower level than the above, instructions for other functions, and so on are classified into "POINT". After reading this installation guide, always keep it accessible to the operator. A- 1 1. To prevent electric shock, note the following: WARNING Before wiring or inspection, switch power off and wait for more than 10 minutes. Then, confirm the voltage is safe with voltage tester. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Connect the servo amplifier and servo motor to ground. Any person who is involved in wiring and inspection should be fully competent to do the work. Do not attempt to wire the servo amplifier and servo motor until they have been installed. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Operate the switches with dry hand to prevent an electric shock. The cables should not be damaged, stressed, loaded, or pinched. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. 2. To prevent fire, note the following: CAUTION Do not install the servo amplifier, servo motor and regenerative brake resistor on or near combustibles. Otherwise a fire may cause. When the servo amplifier has become faulty, switch off the main servo amplifier power side. Continuous flow of a large current may cause a fire. When a regenerative brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch main power off. Otherwise, a regenerative brake transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake resistor, causing a fire. 3. To prevent injury, note the follow CAUTION Only the voltage specified in the Instruction Manual should be applied to each terminal, Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur. Connect the terminals correctly to prevent a burst, damage, etc. Ensure that polarity ( , ) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur. During power-on or for some time after power-off, do not touch or close a parts (cable etc.) to the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, servo motor, etc. Their temperatures may be high and you may get burnt or a parts may damaged. During operation, never touch the rotating parts of the servo motor. Doing so can cause injury. A- 2 4. Additional instructions The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a fault, injury, electric shock, etc. (1) Transportation and installation CAUTION Transport the products correctly according to their weights. Stacking in excess of the specified number of products is not allowed. Do not carry the servo motor by the cables, shaft or encoder. Do not hold the front cover to transport the servo amplifier. The servo amplifier may drop. Install the servo amplifier in a load-bearing place in accordance with the Instruction Manual. Do not climb or stand on servo equipment. Do not put heavy objects on equipment. The servo amplifier and servo motor must be installed in the specified direction. Leave specified clearances between the servo amplifier and control enclosure walls or other equipment. Do not install or operate the servo amplifier and servo motor which has been damaged or has any parts missing. Provide adequate protection to prevent screws and other conductive matter, oil and other combustible matter from entering the servo amplifier. Do not drop or strike servo amplifier or servo motor. Isolate from all impact loads. Use the servo amplifier and servo motor under the following environmental conditions: Conditions Servo amplifier Servo motor [ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing) 0 to 40 (non-freezing) Ambient temperature [ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing) 32 to 104 (non-freezing) Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) 80%RH or less (non-condensing) [ ] 20 to 65 (non-freezing) 15 to 70 (non-freezing) Storage temperature 4 to 149 (non-freezing) 5 to 158 (non-freezing) [ ] Storage humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Ambience Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt Altitude Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level HC-KFE Series X Y : 49 HC-SFE52 to 152 X Y : 24.5 2 [m/s ] 5.9 or less X : 24.5 HC-SFE202 Y : 49 (Note) Vibration HC-KFE Series X Y : 161 HC-SFE52 to 152 X Y : 80 [ft/s2] 19.4 or less X : 80 HC-SFE202 Y : 161 Note: Except the servo motor with reduction gear. Environment Securely attach the servo motor to the machine. If attach insecurely, the servo motor may come off during operation. The servo motor with reduction gear must be installed in the specified direction to prevent oil leakage. Take safety measures, e.g. provide covers, to prevent accidental access to the rotating parts of the servo motor during operation. Never hit the servo motor or shaft, especially when coupling the servo motor to the machine. The encoder may become faulty. Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break. When the equipment has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. A- 3 (2) Wiring CAUTION Wire the equipment correctly and securely. Otherwise, the servo motor may misoperate. Do not install a power capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) between the servo motor and servo amplifier. Connect the output terminals (U, V, W) correctly. Otherwise, the servo motor will operate improperly. Do not connect AC power directly to the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault may occur. The surge absorbing diode installed on the DC output signal relay must be wired in the specified direction. Otherwise, the emergency stop and other protective circuits may not operate. Servo Amplifier Control output signal External 24VDC Servo Amplifier Control output signal RA External 24VDC RA (3) Test run adjustment CAUTION Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unexpected operation. The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable. (4) Usage CAUTION Provide an external emergency stop circuit to ensure that operation can be stopped and power switched off immediately. Any person who is involved in disassembly and repair should be fully competent to do the work. Before resetting an alarm, make sure that the run signal is off to prevent an accident. A sudden restart is made if an alarm is reset with the run signal on. Do not modify the equipment. Use a noise filter, etc. to minimize the influence of electromagnetic interference, which may be caused by electronic equipment used near the servo amplifier. Use the servo amplifier with the specified servo motor. The electromagnetic brake on the servo motor is designed to hold the motor shaft and should not be used for ordinary braking. For such reasons as service life and mechanical structure (e.g. where a ballscrew and the servo motor are coupled via a timing belt), the electromagnetic brake may not hold the motor shaft. To ensure safety, install a stopper on the machine side. A- 4 (5) Corrective actions CAUTION When it is assumed that a hazardous condition may take place at the occur due to a power failure or a product fault, use a servo motor with electromagnetic brake or an external brake mechanism for the purpose of prevention. Configure the electromagnetic brake circuit so that it is activated not only by the servo amplifier signals but also by an external emergency stop signal (EMG). Contacts must be open when servo-on signal is off, when an alarm (trouble) is present and when an electromagnetic brake signal. Circuit must be opened during emergency stop signal. Servo motor RA EMG 24VDC Electromagnetic brake When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, and deactivate the alarm before restarting operation. When power is restored after an instantaneous power failure, keep away from the machine because the machine may be restarted suddenly (design the machine so that it is secured against hazard if restarted). (6) Storage for servo motor CAUTION Note the following points when storing the servo motor for an extended period of time (guideline: three or more months). Always store the servo motor indoors in a clean and dry place. If it is stored in a dusty or damp place, make adequate provision, e.g. cover the whole product. If the insulation resistance of the winding decreases, reexamine the storage method. Though the servo motor is rust-proofed before shipment using paint or rust prevention oil, rust may be produced depending on the storage conditions or storage period. If the servo motor is to be stored for longer than six months, apply rust prevention oil again especially to the machined surfaces of the shaft, etc. Before using the product after storage for an extended period of time, hand-turn the motor output shaft to confirm that nothing is wrong with the servo motor. (When the servo motor is equipped with a brake, make the above check after releasing the brake with the brake power supply.) (7) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement CAUTION With age, the electrolytic capacitor will deteriorate. To prevent a secondary accident due to a fault, it is recommended to replace the electrolytic capacitor every 10 years when used in general environment. Please consult our sales representative. (8) General instruction To illustrate details, the equipment in the diagrams of this Instruction Manual may have been drawn without covers and safety guards. When the equipment is operated, the covers and safety guards must be installed as specified. Operation must be performed in accordance with this Instruction Manual. A- 5 About processing of waste When you discard servo amplifier, a battery (primary battery), and other option articles, please follow the law of each country (area). FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger human life. When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative. Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to forestall serious accidents when it is used in facilities where a breakdown in the product is likely to cause a serious accident. EEP-ROM life The number of write times to the EEP-ROM, which stores parameter settings, etc., is limited to 100,000. If the total number of the following operations exceeds 100,000, the servo amplifier and/or converter unit may fail when the EEP-ROM reaches the end of its useful life. Write to the EEP-ROM due to parameter setting changes A- 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES 1. WHAT ARE EC DIRECTIVES? The EC directives were issued to standardize the regulations of the EU countries and ensure smooth distribution of safety-guaranteed products. In the EU countries, the machinery directive (effective in January, 1995), EMC directive (effective in January, 1996) and low voltage directive (effective in January, 1997) of the EC directives require that products to be sold should meet their fundamental safety requirements and carry the CE marks (CE marking). CE marking applies to machines and equipment into which servo amplifiers have been installed. (1) EMC directive The EMC directive applies not to the servo units alone but to servo-incorporated machines and equipment. This requires the EMC filters to be used with the servo-incorporated machines and equipment to comply with the EMC directive. For specific EMC directive conforming methods, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310). (2) Low voltage directive The low voltage directive applies also to servo units alone. Hence, they are designed to comply with the low voltage directive. (3) Machine directive Not being machines, the servo amplifiers need not comply with this directive. 2. PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE (1) Servo amplifiers and servo motors used (Acquisition schedule) Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model. Servo amplifier Servo motor :MR-E-10A to MR-E-200A :HC-KFE HC-SFE (2) Configuration Control box Reinforced insulating type Reinforced insulating transformer No-fuse breaker Magnetic contactor NFB MC 24VDC power supply Servo amplifier Servo motor SM Use the no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard. Design notice: Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is used for protection case of direvt or indirect contact, only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic Equipment(EE). (3) Environment Operate the servo amplifier at or above the contamination level 2 set forth in IEC664. For this purpose, install the servo amplifier in a control box which is protected against water, oil, carbon, dust, dirt, etc. (IP54). (4) Power supply (a) Operate the servo amplifier to meet the requirements of the overvoltage category II set forth in IEC664. For this purpose, a reinforced insulating transformer conforming to the IEC or EN Standard should be used in the power input section. (b) As the external power supply for interface, use a 24VDC power supply that has been insulationreinforced in I/O. A- 7 (5) Grounding (a) To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminals (marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. Connect PE terminal of the control box to the NEUTRAL of a power supply. Be sure to ground the NEUTRAL of a power supply. (b) Do not connect two ground cables to the same protective earth (PE) terminal. Always connect the cables to the terminals one-to-one. PE terminals PE terminals (c) If a leakage current breaker is used to prevent an electric shock, the protective earth (PE) terminals of the servo amplifier must be connected to the corresponding earth terminals. (6) Wiring (a) The cables to be connected to the terminal block of the servo amplifier must have crimping terminals provided with insulating tubes to prevent contact with adjacent terminals. Crimping terminal Insulating tube Cable (b) Use the servo motor side power connector which complies with the EN Standard. The EN Standard-compliant power connector sets are available from us as options. (Refer to Section 13.1.2) (7) Auxiliary equipment and options (a) The no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor used should be the EN or IEC standard-compliant products of the models described in Section 13.2.2. (b) The sizes of the cables described in Section 13.2.1 meet the following requirements. To meet the other requirements, follow Table 5 and Appendix C in EN60204-1. Ambient temperature: 40 (104) [ ( )] Sheath: PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Installed on wall surface or open table tray (c) Use the EMC filter for noise reduction. (8) Performing EMC tests When EMC tests are run on a machine/device into which the servo amplifier has been installed, it must conform to the electromagnetic compatibility (immunity/emission) standards after it has satisfied the operating environment/electrical equipment specifications. For the other EMC directive guidelines on the servo amplifier, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines(IB(NA)67310). A- 8 CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD (1) Servo amplifiers and servo motors used (Acquisition schedule) Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model. Servo amplifier Servo motor :MR-E-10A to MR-E-200A :HC-KFE HC-SFE (2) Installation Install a fan of 100CFM (2.8 m3/min) air flow 4 in (10.16 cm) above the servo amplifier or provide cooling of at least equivalent capability. (3) Short circuit rating This servo amplifier conforms to the circuit whose peak current is limited to 5000A or less. Having been subjected to the short-circuit tests of the UL in the alternating-current circuit, the servo amplifier conforms to the above circuit. (4) Capacitor discharge time The capacitor discharge time is as listed below. To ensure safety, do not touch the charging section for 10 minutes after power-off. Servo amplifier Discharge time [min] MR-E-10A 20A MR-E-40A MR-E-70A to 200A 1 2 3 (5) Options and auxiliary equipment Use UL/C-UL standard-compliant products. (6) About wiring protection For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. <> Relevant manuals Manual name Manual No. MR-E Series To Use the AC Servo Safely IB(NA)0300057 EMC Installation Guidelines IB(NA)67310 A- 9 MEMO A - 10 CONTENTS 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1- 1 to 1-10 1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 1- 1 1.2 Function block diagram .......................................................................................................................... 1- 2 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications ................................................................................................ 1- 3 1.4 Function list ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 4 1.5 Model code definition .............................................................................................................................. 1- 6 1.6 Combination with servo motor............................................................................................................... 1- 6 1.7 Parts identification.................................................................................................................................. 1- 7 1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment................................................................................................ 1- 9 2. INSTALLATION 2- 1 to 2- 4 2.1 Environmental conditions....................................................................................................................... 2- 1 2.2 Installation direction and clearances .................................................................................................... 2- 2 2.3 Keep out foreign materials ..................................................................................................................... 2- 3 2.4 Cable stress .............................................................................................................................................. 2- 3 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3- 1 to 3- 48 3.1 Standard connection example ................................................................................................................ 3- 2 3.1.1 Position control mode ....................................................................................................................... 3- 2 3.1.2 Internal speed control mode ............................................................................................................ 3- 8 3.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier ................................................................................... 3- 9 3.3 I/O signals................................................................................................................................................ 3-10 3.3.1 Connectors and signal arrangements............................................................................................ 3-10 3.3.2 Signal explanations ......................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.4 Detailed description of the signals........................................................................................................ 3-19 3.4.1 Position control mode ...................................................................................................................... 3-19 3.4.2 Internal speed control mode ........................................................................................................... 3-24 3.4.3 Position/internal speed control change mode................................................................................ 3-26 3.5 Alarm occurrence timing chart ............................................................................................................. 3-28 3.6 Interfaces................................................................................................................................................. 3-29 3.6.1 Common line .................................................................................................................................... 3-29 3.6.2 Detailed description of the interfaces ............................................................................................ 3-30 3.7 Input power supply circuit..................................................................................................................... 3-34 3.7.1 Connection example......................................................................................................................... 3-34 3.7.2 Terminals.......................................................................................................................................... 3-35 3.7.3 Power-on sequence........................................................................................................................... 3-36 3.8 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor ................................................................................... 3-37 3.8.1 Connection instructions .................................................................................................................. 3-37 3.8.2 Connection diagram......................................................................................................................... 3-37 3.8.3 I/O terminals .................................................................................................................................... 3-39 3.9 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake ............................................................................................. 3-41 3.10 Grounding ............................................................................................................................................. 3-44 3.11 Servo amplifier connectors (CNP1, CNP2) wiring method (When MR-ECPN1-B and MR-ECPN2-B of an option are used.) ................................................... 3-45 3.12 Instructions for the 3M connector....................................................................................................... 3-48 1 4. OPERATION 4- 1 to 4- 6 4.1 When switching power on for the first time.......................................................................................... 4- 1 4.2 Startup...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2 4.2.1 Selection of control mode.................................................................................................................. 4- 2 4.2.2 Position control mode ....................................................................................................................... 4- 2 4.2.3 Internal speed control mode ............................................................................................................ 4- 4 5. PARAMETERS 5- 1 to 5- 30 5.1 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................................... 5- 1 5.1.1 Parameter write inhibit ................................................................................................................... 5- 1 5.1.2 Lists.................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2 5.2 Detailed description ............................................................................................................................... 5-25 5.2.1 Electronic gear ................................................................................................................................. 5-25 5.2.2 Analog monitor................................................................................................................................. 5-26 5.2.3 Using forward/reverse rotation stroke end to change the stopping pattern.............................. 5-29 5.2.4 Alarm history clear.......................................................................................................................... 5-29 5.2.5 Position smoothing .......................................................................................................................... 5-30 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6- 1 to 6-14 6.1 Display flowchart..................................................................................................................................... 6- 1 6.2 Status display .......................................................................................................................................... 6- 2 6.2.1 Display examples .............................................................................................................................. 6- 2 6.2.2 Status display list ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3 6.2.3 Changing the status display screen................................................................................................ 6- 4 6.3 Diagnostic mode....................................................................................................................................... 6- 5 6.4 Alarm mode .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 6 6.5 Parameter mode ...................................................................................................................................... 6- 7 6.6 External I/O signal display..................................................................................................................... 6- 8 6.7 Output signal (DO) forced output ......................................................................................................... 6-10 6.8 Test operation mode ............................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.8.1 Mode change..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.8.2 Jog operation .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.8.3 Positioning operation....................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.8.4 Motor-less operation ........................................................................................................................ 6-14 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7- 1 to 7-10 7.1 Different adjustment methods ............................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier.......................................................................................... 7- 1 7.1.2 Adjustment using servo configuration software............................................................................ 7- 2 7.2 Auto tuning .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 3 7.2.1 Auto tuning mode ............................................................................................................................. 7- 3 7.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation ............................................................................................................ 7- 4 7.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning............................................................................................ 7- 5 7.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode................................................................................... 7- 6 2 7.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment)....................................................................................... 7- 7 7.3.1 Operation of manual mode 1 ........................................................................................................... 7- 7 7.3.2 Adjustment by manual mode 1 ....................................................................................................... 7- 7 7.4 Interpolation mode ................................................................................................................................. 7-10 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 8- 1 to 8-10 8.1 Function block diagram .......................................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.2 Machine resonance suppression filter ................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.3 Adaptive vibration suppression control................................................................................................. 8- 3 8.4 Low-pass filter ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 4 8.5 Gain changing function........................................................................................................................... 8- 5 8.5.1 Applications....................................................................................................................................... 8- 5 8.5.2 Function block diagram.................................................................................................................... 8- 5 8.5.3 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 6 8.5.4 Gain changing operation.................................................................................................................. 8- 8 9. INSPECTION 9- 1 to 9- 2 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10- 1 to 10-12 10.1 Trouble at start-up .............................................................................................................................. 10- 1 10.1.1 Position control mode ................................................................................................................... 10- 1 10.1.2 Internal speed control mode ........................................................................................................ 10- 4 10.2 When alarm or warning has occurred ............................................................................................... 10- 5 10.2.1 Alarms and warning list .............................................................................................................. 10- 5 10.2.2 Remedies for alarms..................................................................................................................... 10- 6 10.2.3 Remedies for warnings................................................................................................................ 10-11 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS 11- 1 to 11- 8 11.1 Servo amplifiers................................................................................................................................... 11- 1 11.2 Connectors............................................................................................................................................ 11- 5 12. CHARACTERISTICS 12- 1 to 12- 4 12.1 Overload protection characteristics ................................................................................................... 12- 1 12.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss .................................................................... 12- 1 12.3 Dynamic brake characteristics........................................................................................................... 12- 3 12.4 Encoder cable flexing life .................................................................................................................... 12- 4 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13- 1 to 13-32 13.1 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1 13.1.1 Regenerative brake options ......................................................................................................... 13- 1 13.1.2 Cables and connectors.................................................................................................................. 13- 6 13.1.3 Analog monitor, RS-232C branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P) ..................................................... 13-19 13.1.4 Servo configurations software .................................................................................................... 13-20 3 13.2 Auxiliary equipment .......................................................................................................................... 13-21 13.2.1 Recommended wires .................................................................................................................... 13-21 13.2.2 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors........................................................................... 13-23 13.2.3 Power factor improving reactors ................................................................................................ 13-23 13.2.4 Relays............................................................................................................................................ 13-24 13.2.5 Surge absorbers ........................................................................................................................... 13-24 13.2.6 Noise reduction techniques......................................................................................................... 13-24 13.2.7 Leakage current breaker............................................................................................................. 13-30 13.2.8 EMC filter..................................................................................................................................... 13-32 14. SERVO MOTOR 14- 1 to 14- 38 14.1 Compliance with the overseas standards.......................................................................................... 14- 1 14.1.1 Compliance with EC directives ................................................................................................... 14- 1 14.1.2 Conformance with UL/C-UL standard ....................................................................................... 14- 1 14.2 Model name make-up.......................................................................................................................... 14- 2 14.3 Parts identification.............................................................................................................................. 14- 4 14.4 Installation........................................................................................................................................... 14- 5 14.4.1 Environmental conditions............................................................................................................ 14- 6 14.4.2 Installation orientation ................................................................................................................ 14- 6 14.4.3 Load mounting precautions ......................................................................................................... 14- 7 14.4.4 Permissible load for the shaft...................................................................................................... 14- 8 14.4.5 Protection from oil and water..................................................................................................... 14-11 14.4.6 Cable ............................................................................................................................................. 14-12 14.5 Connectors used for servo motor wiring........................................................................................... 14-13 14.5.1 HC-KFE series ............................................................................................................................. 14-13 14.5.2 HC-SFE series.............................................................................................................................. 14-13 14.6 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 14-19 14.6.1 Standard specifications ............................................................................................................... 14-19 14.6.2 Torque characteristics................................................................................................................. 14-21 14.6.3 Servo motors with reduction gears ............................................................................................ 14-22 14.6.4 Servo motors with special shafts................................................................................................ 14-25 14.6.5 D cut.............................................................................................................................................. 14-25 14.7 Characteristics.................................................................................................................................... 14-26 14.7.1 Electromagnetic brake characteristics ...................................................................................... 14-26 14.7.2 Vibration rank.............................................................................................................................. 14-28 14.7.3 Machine Accuracies ..................................................................................................................... 14-28 14.8 Outline dimension drawing ............................................................................................................... 14-29 14.8.1 HC-KFE series ............................................................................................................................. 14-29 14.8.2 HC-SFE series.............................................................................................................................. 14-32 14.9 Outline dimension drawing (in inches) ............................................................................................ 14-34 14.9.1 HC-KFE series ............................................................................................................................. 14-34 14.9.2 HC-SFE series.............................................................................................................................. 14-37 4 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15- 1 to 15- 62 15.1. Functions and configuration.............................................................................................................. 15- 1 15.1.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.1.2 Function block diagram ............................................................................................................... 15- 2 15.1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications ..................................................................................... 15- 3 15.1.4 Model code definition.................................................................................................................... 15- 4 15.1.5 Parts identification ....................................................................................................................... 15- 4 15.1.6 Servo system with auxiliary equipment..................................................................................... 15- 6 15.2. Signals and wiring.............................................................................................................................. 15- 8 15.2.1 Standard connection example ..................................................................................................... 15- 8 15.2.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier ....................................................................... 15-11 15.2.3 Connectors and signal arrangements........................................................................................ 15-12 15.2.4 Signal explanations ..................................................................................................................... 15-14 15.2.5 Detailed description of the signals............................................................................................. 15-18 15.3 Startup................................................................................................................................................. 15-25 15.3.1 Speed control mode...................................................................................................................... 15-25 15.3.2 Torque control mode .................................................................................................................... 15-27 15.4 Parameters.......................................................................................................................................... 15-29 15.4.1 Item list......................................................................................................................................... 15-29 15.4.2 Details list .................................................................................................................................... 15-32 15.5 Display and operation ........................................................................................................................ 15-51 15.5.1 Display flowchart......................................................................................................................... 15-51 15.5.2 Status display............................................................................................................................... 15-53 15.5.3 Diagnostic mode........................................................................................................................... 15-55 15.5.4 External I/O signal display......................................................................................................... 15-57 15.6. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................. 15-59 15.6.1 Trouble at start-up ...................................................................................................................... 15-59 15.6.2 Alarms and warning list ............................................................................................................. 15-61 5 MEMO 6 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.1 Introduction The Mitsubishi MR-E series general-purpose AC servo is based on the MR-J2-Super series, and has the same high performance and limited functions. It has position control and internal speed control modes. Further, it can perform operation with the control modes changed, e.g. position/internal speed control. Hence, it is applicable to a wide range of fields, precision positioning and smooth speed control of machine tools and general industrial machines. As this new series has the RS-232C or RS-422 serial communication function, a servo configuration software-installed personal computer or the like can be used to perform parameter setting, test operation, status display monitoring, gain adjustment, etc. With real-time auto tuning, you can automatically adjust the servo gains according to the machine. The MR-E series servo motor is equipped with an incremental position encoder that has the resolution of 10000 pulses/rev to ensure high precision positioning. (1) Position control mode An up to 500kpps high-speed pulse train is used to control the speed and direction of a motor and execute precision positioning of 10000 pulses/rev resolution. The position smoothing function provides a choice of two different modes appropriate for a machine, so a smoother start/stop can be made in response to a sudden position command. A torque limit is imposed on the servo amplifier by the clamp circuit to protect the power transistor in the main circuit from overcurrent due to sudden acceleration/deceleration or overload. This torque limit value can be changed to any value with the parameter. (2) Internal speed control mode The parameter-driven internal speed command (max. 7 speeds) is used to control the speed and direction of a servo motor smoothly. There are also the acceleration/deceleration time constant setting in response to speed command, the servo lock function at a stop time. 1- 1 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.2 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. Regenerative brake option (Note 3) Servo amplifier (Note 3) (Note 2) Power NFB MC supply L1 3-phase L2 200 to 230VAC, L3 1-phase 230VAC P C Servo motor D (Note 3) (Note 1) DS RA Current detector Regenerative TR CHARGE lamp U U V V W W SM Dynamic brake Fan (MR-E-200A only) E1 E2 Control power supply Electromagnetic brake Base amplifier Voltage Overcurrent Current detection protection detection CN2 (Note 3) Regenerative brake Encoder Pulse input Virtual encoder Model speed control Model position control Virtual motor Model position Actual position control Model speed Model torque Actual speed control Current control RS-232C D/A I/F CN1 (Note 3) CN3 (Note 3) D I/O control Servo on Start Failure, etc. Analog monitor (2 channels) Controller RS-232C Note:1. The built-in regenerative brake resistor is not provided for the MR-E-10A/20A. 2. The single-phase 230VAC can be used for MR-E-70A or smaller servo amplifier. Connect the power supply cables to L1 and L2 while leaving L3 open. 3. The control circuit connectors (CN1, CN2 and CN3) are safely isolated from main circuit terminals (L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, P, C and D). 1- 2 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications Servo Amplifier MR-E- 10A 20A 40A 70A 100A 200A Power supply Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz or 1-phase 230VAC, 50/60Hz 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage fluctuation 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 230VAC: 207 to 253VAC 3-phase 170 to 253VAC Permissible frequency fluctuation Within 5% Power supply capacity Refer to Section12.2 System Sine-wave PWM control, current control system Dynamic brake Built-in Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay), encoder error protection, regenerative brake error protection, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure protection, overspeed protection, excessive error protection Internal speed control mode Position control mode Protective functions Max. input pulse frequency 500kpps (for differential receiver), 200kpps (for open collector) Command pulse multiplying factor Electronic gear A:1 to 65535 B:1 to 65535, 1/50 In-position range setting 10 revolutions Torque limit Set by parameter setting Speed control range Internal speed command 1: 5000 0.01% or less (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% or less (power fluctuation 10%) Speed fluctuation ratio Torque limit Set by parameter setting Structure Environment Ambient humidity Force-cooling, open (IP00) Self-cooled, open (IP00) Operation Storage [ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing) [ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing) [ ] 20 to 65 (non-freezing) [ ] 4 to 149 (non-freezing) Operation 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage Ambient Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt Altitude Max. 1000m (3280ft) above sea level 5.9 [m/s2] or less Vibration Weight 50 0 to 10000 pulse (command pulse unit) Error excessive Ambient temperature A/B 19.4 [ft/s2] or less [kg] 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.8 1.8 2.0 [lb] 1.8 1.8 2.6 4.0 4.0 4.4 1- 3 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.4 Function list The following table lists the functions of this servo. For details of the functions, refer to the corresponding chapters and sections. Function (Note) Control mode Description Refer to Position control mode This servo is used as position control servo. P Section 3.1.1 Section 3.4.1 Section 4.2.2 Internal speed control mode This servo is used as internal speed control servo. S Section 3.1.2 Section 3.4.2 Section 4.2.3 Position/internal speed control change mode Using external input signal, control can be switched between position control and internal speed control. P/S Section 3.4.4 High-resolution encoder High-resolution encoder of 131072 pulses/rev is used as a servo motor encoder. P, S, T Gain changing function You can switch between gains during rotation and gains during stop or use an external input signal to change gains during operation. P, S Section 8.5 Adaptive vibration suppression control Servo amplifier detects mechanical resonance and sets filter characteristics automatically to suppress mechanical vibration. P, S Section 8.3 Low-pass filter Suppresses high-frequency resonance which occurs as servo system response is increased. P, S Section 8.4 Machine analyzer function Analyzes the frequency characteristic of the mechanical system by simply connecting a servo configuration softwareinstalled personal computer and servo amplifier. P Machine simulation Can simulate machine motions on a personal computer screen on the basis of the machine analyzer results. P Gain search function Personal computer changes gains automatically searches for overshoot-free gains in a short time. P Slight vibration suppression control Suppresses vibration of 1 pulse produced at a servo motor stop. P Parameter No. 20 Electronic gear Input pulses can be multiplied by 1/50 to 50. P Parameters No. 3, 4, 69 to 71 Auto tuning Automatically adjusts the gain to optimum value if load applied to the servo motor shaft varies. P, S Position smoothing Speed can be increased smoothly in response to input pulse. P Parameter No. 7 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration time constant Speed can be increased and decreased smoothly. S Parameter No. 13 Regenerative brake option Used when the built-in regenerative brake resistor of the servo amplifier does not have sufficient regenerative capability for the regenerative power generated. 1- 4 and P, S Chapter 7 Section 13.1.1 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION Function Alarm history clear Description Alarm history is cleared. (Note) Control mode Refer to P, S Parameter No. 16 If the input power supply voltage had reduced to cause an Restart after instantaneous alarm but has returned to normal, the servo motor can be power failure restarted by merely switching on the start signal. S Parameter No. 20 Command pulse selection Command pulse train form can be selected from among four different types. P Parameter No. 21 Input signal selection Forward rotation start, reverse rotation start, servo-on and other input signals can be assigned to any pins. P, S Parameters No. 43 to 48 Torque limit Servo motor torque can be limited to any value. P, S Section 3.4.1 (5) Parameter No. 28 Status display Servo status is shown on the 5-digit, 7-segment LED display P, S Section 6.2 External I/O signal display ON/OFF statuses of external I/O signals are shown on the display. P, S Section 6.6 Output signal (DO) forced output Output signal can be forced on/off independently of the servo status. Use this function for output signal wiring check, etc. P, S Section 6.7 Test operation mode Servo motor can be run from the operation section of the servo amplifier without the start signal entered. P, S Section 6.8 Analog monitor output Servo status is output in terms of voltage in real time. P, S Parameter No. 17 Servo configuration software Using a personal computer, parameter setting, test operation, status display, etc. can be performed. P, S Section 13.1.8 Alarm code output If an alarm has occurred, the corresponding alarm number is output in 3-bit code. P, S Section 10.2.1 Note:P: Position control mode, S: Internal speed control mode P/S: Position/internal speed control change mode 1- 5 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.5 Model code definition (1) Rating plate MITSUBISHI AC AC SERVO SERVO MODEL MR-E-40A POWER :400W INPUT :2.6A 3PH200-230V 50Hz : :2.6A3PH200-230V 60Hz Model OUTPUT:170V 0-360Hz SERIAL :XXXXYYYYY Rated output current Capacity Applicable power supply 2.8A :TCXXXAYYYGZZ Serial number PASSED MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN (2) Model MR - E - MR-E-40A or less A Series MR-E-70A, 100A MR-E-200A General-purpose interface Rated output Symbol Rated output [W] Symbol Rated output [W] 100 10 750 70 20 200 100 1000 40 400 200 2000 Rating plate Rating plate Rating plate 1.6 Combination with servo motor The following table lists combinations of servo amplifiers and servo motors. The same combinations apply to the models with electromagnetic brakes and the models with reduction gears. Servo motors Servo amplifier HC-KFE MR-E-10A 13 MR-E-20A 23 MR-E-40A 43 MR-E-70A 73 MR-E-100A MR-E-200A HC-SFE 2000r/min 52 102 152 202 1- 6 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.7 Parts identification (1) MR-E-100A or less Name/Application Display The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number. Refer to Chapter6 Operation section Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and parameter setting operations. MODE UP DOWN SET Used to set data. MODE SET Used to change the display or data in each mode. CN3 MITSUBISHI MR- Used to change the mode. CN1 Communication connector (CN3) Used to connect a command device (RS-232C) and output analog monitor data. CHARGE WV U CNP1 L3L2L1 D C P CN2 CNP2 Chapter6 I/O signal connector (CN1) Used to connect digital I/O signals. Encoder connector (CN2) Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder. Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Chapter14 Section3.3 Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Charge lamp Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables. Motor power supply connector (CNP2) Used to connect the servo motor. Section3.7 Section11.1 Power supply/regenerative connector (CNP1) Used to connect the input power supply and regenerative brake option. Section3.7 Section11.1 Section13.1.1 Protective earth (PE) terminal ( Ground terminal. Section3.10 Section11.1 1- 7 ) 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-E-200A Name/Application Display The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number. Refer to Chapter6 Operation section Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and parameter setting operations. MODE UP DOWN SET Used to set data. Chapter6 Used to change the display or data in each mode. Used to change the mode. Communication connector (CN3) Used to connect a command device (RS232C) and output analog monitor data. Cooling fan Installation notch (4 places) Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Chapter14 I/O signal connector (CN1) Used to connect digital I/O signals. Section3.3 Name plate Section1.5 Encoder connector (CN2) Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder. Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Power supply/regenerative connector (CNP1) Used to connect the input power supply and regenerative brake option. Section3.7 Section11.1 Section13.1.1 Charge lamp Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables. Protective earth (PE) terminal ( Ground terminal. ) Motor power supply connector (CNP2) Used to connect the servo motor. 1- 8 Section3.10 Section11.1 Section3.7 Section11.1 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION 1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment WARNING To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. (1) MR-E-100A or less (Note 2) 3-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply or 1-phase 230VAC power supply Refer to Options and auxiliary equipment Options and auxiliary equipment Refer to No-fuse breaker Section 13.2.2 Regenerative option Section 13.1.1 Magnetic contactor Section 13.2.2 Cables Section 13.2.1 Servo configuration software Section 13.1.4 Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3 No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier MODE Personal computer Servo configuration software MRZJW3-SETUP1 SET To CN3 CN3 Magnetic contactor (MC) MITSUBISHI MR-E- To CN1 Command device CN1 Power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL) To CN2 L3L2L1 D C P CNP2 CNP1 Protective earth (PE) terminal (Note 1) Encoder cable CHARGE WV U CN2 (Note 1) Power supply lead L3 L2 L1 Regenerative option P C Servo motor Note: 1. The HC-SFE series have cannon connectors. 2. A 1-phase 230VAC power supply may be used with the servo amplifier of MR-E-70A or less. Connect the power supply to L1 and L2 terminals and leave L3 open. 1- 9 1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION (2) MR-E-200A 3-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply Options and auxiliary equipment Refer to Refer to Section 13.2.2 Regenerative option Magnetic contactor Section 13.2.2 Cables Section 13.2.1 Servo configuration software Section 13.1.4 Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3 No-fuse breaker Section 13.1.1 Servo configuration software MRZJW3-SETUP1 No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Magnetic contactor (MC) MODE SET EZMoto in MITSUBISHI D C P L3 L2 L1 Power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL) Personal computer To CN3 CN3 To CN1 CN1 Command device CNP1 To CN2 CN2 L2 L3 W V U CHARGE L1 Options and auxiliary equipment To CNP2 CNP2 P C Regenerative option 1 - 10 2. INSTALLATION 2. INSTALLATION CAUTION Stacking in excess of the limited number of products is not allowed. Install the equipment to incombustibles. Installing them directly or close to combustibles will led to a fire. Install the equipment in a load-bearing place in accordance with this Instruction Manual. Do not get on or put heavy load on the equipment to prevent injury. Use the equipment within the specified environmental condition range. Provide an adequate protection to prevent screws, metallic detritus and other conductive matter or oil and other combustible matter from entering the servo amplifier. Do not block the intake/exhaust ports of the servo amplifier. Otherwise, a fault may occur. Do not subject the servo amplifier to drop impact or shock loads as they are precision equipment. Do not install or operate a faulty servo amplifier. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. 2.1 Environmental conditions Environment Ambient temperature Operation Storage Ambient Operation humidity Storage Ambience Altitude Vibration Conditions [ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing) [ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing) [ ] 20 to 65 (non-freezing) [ ] 4 to 149 (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level [m/s2] 5.9 [m/s2] or less [ft/s2] 19.4 [ft/s2] or less 2- 1 2. INSTALLATION 2.2 Installation direction and clearances The equipment must be installed in the specified direction. Otherwise, a fault may occur. Leave specified clearances between the servo amplifier and control box inside walls or other equipment. CAUTION (1) Installation of one servo amplifier Control box Control box 40mm (1.6 in.) or more Servo amplifier 10mm (0.4 in.) or more MODE SET Wiring clearance 70mm (2.8 in.) 10mm (0.4 in.) or more CN3 MITSUBISHI MR- CN1 Top CHARGE WV U CNP1 L3L2L1 D C P CN2 CNP2 Bottom 40mm (1.6 in.) or more (2) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control box, and install a fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the environmental conditions. Control box 100mm (4.0 in.) or more MODE SET 30mm (1.2 in.) or more SET MODE CN3 CN3 MITSUBISHI MR- MITSUBISHI MR- CN1 CN1 40mm (1.6 in.) or more 2- 2 CNP1 CHARGE WV U CNP1 CNP2 L3L2L1 D C P WV U CN2 CHARGE CN2 CNP2 L3L2L1 D C P 30mm (1.2 in.) or more 10mm (0.4 in.) or more 2. INSTALLATION (3) Others When using heat generating equipment such as the regenerative brake option, install them with full consideration of heat generation so that the servo amplifier is not affected. Install the servo amplifier on a perpendicular wall in the correct vertical direction. 2.3 Keep out foreign materials (1) When installing the unit in a control box, prevent drill chips and wire fragments from entering the servo amplifier. (2) Prevent oil, water, metallic dust, etc. from entering the servo amplifier through openings in the control box or a fan installed on the ceiling. (3) When installing the control box in a place where there are much toxic gas, dirt and dust, conduct an air purge (force clean air into the control box from outside to make the internal pressure higher than the external pressure) to prevent such materials from entering the control box. 2.4 Cable stress (1) The way of clamping the cable must be fully examined so that flexing stress and cable's own weight stress are not applied to the cable connection. (2) For use in any application where the servo motor moves, fix the cables (encoder, power supply, brake) supplied with the servo motor, and flex the optional encoder cable or the power supply and brake wiring cables. Use the optional encoder cable within the flexing life range. Use the power supply and brake wiring cables within the flexing life of the cables. (3) Avoid any probability that the cable sheath might be cut by sharp chips, rubbed by a machine corner or stamped by workers or vehicles. (4) For installation on a machine where the servo motor will move, the flexing radius should be made as large as possible. Refer to section 12.4 for the flexing life. 2- 3 2. INSTALLATION MEMO 2- 4 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING WARNING Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work. Before starting wiring, switch power off, then wait for more than 10 minutes, and after the charge lamp has gone off, make sure that the voltage is safe in the tester or like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Ground the servo amplifier and the servo motor securely. Do not attempt to wire the servo amplifier and servo motor until they have been installed. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. The cables should not be damaged, stressed excessively, loaded heavily, or pinched. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Wire the equipment correctly and securely. Otherwise, the servo motor may misoperate, resulting in injury. Connect cables to correct terminals to prevent a burst, fault, etc. Ensure that polarity ( , ) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur. The surge absorbing diode installed to the DC relay designed for control output should be fitted in the specified direction. Otherwise, the signal is not output due to a fault, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. Servo Amplifier External 24VDC Servo Amplifier External 24VDC CAUTION Control output signal RA Control output signal RA Use a noise filter, etc. to minimize the influence of electromagnetic interference, which may be given to electronic equipment used near the servo amplifier. Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) with the power line of the servo motor. When using the regenerative brake resistor, switch power off with the alarm signal. Otherwise, a transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake resistor, causing a fire. Do not modify the equipment. 3- 1 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.1 Standard connection example POINT Refer to Section 3.7.1 for the connection of the power supply system and to Section 3.8 for connection with the servo motor. 3.1.1 Position control mode (1) FX-10GM Positioning module FX-10GM Servo amplifier (Note 8) CN1 SVRDY COM2 COM2 SVEND COM4 PGO 1 2 12 11 14 13 7,17 24 8,18 VC 5 FPO 6 FP COM5 9,19 16 RP 15 RPO 3 CLR 4 COM3 RD VIN INP 11 1 10 VIN OP LG OPC VIN 1 21 14 2 1 PP SG NP 23 13 25 CR SG SD 5 13 Plate (Note 9) 2m(6.5ft) max. START 1 STOP 2 ZRN 3 FWD 4 RVS 5 DOG 6 LSF 7 LSR 8 COM1 9,19 10m(32ft) max. (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop (Note 8) CN1 EMG 8 (Note 11) (Note 8) CN1 1 VIN 9 ALM RA1 12 ZSP RA2 13 SG (Note 8) CN1 15 LA 16 LAR 17 LB 18 LBR 19 LZ 20 LZR Plate SD 4 3 LG Reset RES 3 6 MO2 LSP 6 (Note 10) Servo configuration software 7 SG 13 Personal computer (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 3- 2 Encoder A-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder Z-phase pulse (differential line driver) (Note 8) CN3 4 MO1 SON LSN Trouble (Note 6) Zero speed Servo-on (Note 5) Forward rotation stroke end Reverse rotation stroke end (Note2, 4) External power supply 24VDC A 10k A 10k Plate SD 2m (6.5ft) max. (Note 1) (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external. (Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/ reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. When this signal is switched off (at occurrence of an alarm), the output of the controller should be stopped by the sequence program. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. This length applies to the command pulse train input in the opencollector system. It is 10m (32ft) or less in the differential line driver system. 10. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 11. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 3- 3 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) AD75P (A1SD75P ) Positioning module AD75P (A1SD75P ) Servo amplifier (Note 9) 10m(32ft) max. (Note 8) CN1 READY COM INPS 7 26 8 PGO(24V) PGO(5V) PGO COM CLEAR 6 24 25 5 23 21 3 22 4 CLEAR COM PULSE FPULSE F+ PULSE RPULSE R+ PULSE F PULSE COM PULSE R PULSE COM DOG FLS RLS STOP CHG START COM COM 1 19 2 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 35 36 RD VIN INP 11 1 10 (Note 12) (Note 8) CN1 1 VIN 9 ALM RA1 12 ZSP RA2 13 SG (Note 2, 4) Trouble (Note 6) External power supply 24VDC Zero speed LZ 19 LZR 20 CR 5 SG 13 PG 22 PP 23 NG 24 NP 25 LG 14 SD Plate (Note 11) (Note 8) CN1 24VDC 15 LA 16 LAR 17 LB 18 LBR Encoder A-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (differential line driver) 14 LG Control common 21 OP Plate SD Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector) (Note 8) (Note 8) CN3 CN1 EMG 8 4 MO1 Servo-on SON 4 3 LG Reset RES 3 6 MO2 LSP 6 (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop (Note 5) Forward rotation stroke end Reverse rotation stroke end (Note 10) Servo configuration software LSN 7 SG 13 Personal computer (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 3- 4 A 10k A 10k Plate SD 2m(6.5ft) max. (Note 1) (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/ reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. When this signal is switched off (at occurrence of an alarm), the output of the controller should be stopped by the sequence program. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. This length applies to the command pulse train input in the differential line driver system. It is 2m (6.5ft) or less in the opencollector system. 10. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 11. Connect LG and pulse output COM to increase noise immunity. 12. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 3- 5 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) QD75D (differential driver) Positioning module QD75D READY RDY COM PGO5 PGO COM CLEAR CLEAR COM PULSE FPULSE F+ PULSE RPULSE R+ COM COM DOG FLS RLS STOP CHG PULSER A+ PULSER APULSER B+ PULSER B- Servo amplifier (Note 9) 10m(32ft) max. 11 12 External power supply 24VDC 6 7 3 1 2 4 5 (Note 8) CN1 11 1 1 VIN 9 ALM RA1 12 ZSP RA2 13 SG RD VIN 9 10 13 14 16 15 18 17 LZ LZR CR SG PG PP NG NP LG SD (Note 11) (Note 8) CN1 19 20 5 13 22 23 24 25 14 (Note 2, 4) Trouble (Note 6) Zero speed External power supply 24VDC Plate 5V A19 B19 A20 B20 5V A B (Note 8) CN1 0V Manual pulse 5G generator MR-HDP01 15 LA 16 LAR 17 LB 18 LBR Encoder A-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (differential line driver) 14 LG Control common 21 OP Plate SG Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector) (Note 8) (Note 8) CN1 CN3 (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop EMG 8 4 MO1 Servo-on SON 4 3 LG Reset RES 3 6 MO2 LSP 6 (Note 5) Forward rotation stroke end Reverse rotation stroke end (Note 10) Servo configuration software LSN 7 SG 13 Personal computer (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 3- 6 A 10k A 10k Plate SD 2m(6.5ft) max. (Note 1) (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/ reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. When this signal is switched off (at occurrence of an alarm), the output of the controller should be stopped by the sequence program. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. This length applies to the command pulse train input in the differential line driver system. It is 2m (6.5ft) or less in the opencollector system. 10. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 11. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 3- 7 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.1.2 Internal speed control mode Servo amplifier (Note 8) CN1 10m(32ft) max. (Note 8) CN1 EMG 8 Servo-on SON 4 Forward rotation start ST1 3 ST2 5 LSP 6 (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop Reverse rotation start (Note 5) Forward rotation stroke end Reverse rotation stroke end LSN 7 SG 13 1 VIN 9 ALM RA1 12 ZSP RA2 10 SA RA5 11 RD RA4 13 SG (Note 2, 4) Trouble (Note 6) Zero speed (Note 10) External power supply Speed reached 24VDC Ready 19 LZ 20 LZR 15 LA 16 LAR 17 LB 18 LBR 14 LG 21 OP Plate SD Encoder Z-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder A-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (differential line driver) Control common Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector) (Note 8) CN3 (Note 9) Servo configuration software Personal computer 4 MO1 3 LG 6 MO2 A 10k A 10k (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 Plate (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions SD 2m(6.5ft) max. (Note 1) Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/ reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 10. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 3- 8 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier The following is the internal connection diagram where the signal assignment has been made in the initial status in each control mode. Servo amplifier (Note) (Note) External power supply 24VDC P S CN1 CN1 P S VIN VIN 1 10 INP SA CR ST2 5 Approx. 4.7k 11 RD RD 9 ALM ALM 12 ZSP ZSP Approx. 4.7k SON SON 4 RES ST1 3 EMG EMG 8 LSP LSP 6 LSN LSN 7 SG SG 13 CN1 OPC 2 15 LA PG 22 16 LAR PP 23 17 LB NG 24 18 LBR NP 25 19 LZ Case 20 LZR Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 100k Approx. 100k SD SD Approx. 1.2k Approx. 1.2k 21 OP 14 LG CN3 4 MO1 6 MO2 2 TXD 1 RXD 3 LG Case SD PE Note. P: Position control mode, S: Internal speed control mode 3- 9 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3 I/O signals 3.3.1 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. Refer to the next page for CN1 signal assignment. (1) Signal arrangement 5 3 LG 1 RXD CN1 1 MODE 2 SET OPC CN3 4 MO1 6 MO2 2 TXD 4 MITSUBISHI MR-E SON 6 CN1 LSP 8 CN2 4 6 MRR 1 3 P5 MR 8 MDR 5 7 MD 10 LG 9 CNP1 CHARGE 2 LG L3 L2L1 D C P CNP2 WV U EMG 10 INP 12 ZSP VIN 3 RES 5 CR 7 LSN 9 ALM 11 RD 13 SG The connector frames are connected with the PE (earth) terminal inside the servo amplifier. 3 - 10 14 15 LA 17 LB 19 LZ 21 OP 23 PP 25 NP LG 16 LAR 18 LBR 20 LZR 22 PG 24 NG 26 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) CN1 signal assignment The signal assignment of connector changes with the control mode as indicated below; For the pins which are given parameter No.s in the related parameter column, their signals can be changed using those parameters. Connector Pin No. (Note1) I/O 1 2 CN1 (Note2) I/O Signals in control modes P P/S S VIN VIN VIN Related parameter OPC OPC 3 I RES RES/ST1 ST1 No.43 to 48 4 I SON SON SON No.43 to 48 5 I CR LOP ST2 No.43 to 48 6 I LSP LSP LSP No.43 48 7 I LSN LSN LSN No.43 48 8 I EMG EMG EMG 9 O ALM ALM ALM 10 O INP INP/SA SA No.49 11 O RD RD RD No.49 12 O ZSP ZSP ZSP No.1, 49 SG SG SG LG 13 14 LG LG 15 O LA LA LA 16 O LAR LAR LAR 17 O LB LB LB 18 O LBR LBR LBR 19 O LZ LZ LZ 20 O LZR LZR LZR 21 O OP OP OP 22 I PG 23 I PP PP/ 24 I NG NG/ 25 I NP NP/ PG/ 26 Note: 1. I : Input signal, O: Output signal 2. P : Position control mode, S: Internal speed control mode, P/S: Position/internal speed control change mode. 3 - 11 No.49 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Symbols and signal names Symbol Signal name Symbol Signal name SON Servo-on ZSP Zero speed LSP Forward rotation stroke end INP In position LSN Reverse rotation stroke end SA Speed reached CR Clear ALM Trouble SP1 Speed selection 1 WNG Warning SP2 Speed selection 2 OP Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector) PC Proportion control MBR Electromagnetic brake interlock ST1 Forward rotation start LZ Encoder Z-phase pulse ST2 Reverse rotation start LZR (differential line driver) TL Torque limit selection LA Encoder A-phase pulse RES Reset LAR (differential line driver) EMG Emergency stop LB Encoder B-phase pulse LOP Control change LBR (differential line driver) VIN Digital I/F power supply input OPC Open collector power input PP NP PG Forward/reverse rotation pulse train NG RD Ready SG Digital I/F common LG Control common SD Shield 3 - 12 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.3.2 Signal explanations For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O column in the table), refer to Section 3.6.2. In the control mode field of the table P : Position control mode, S: Internal speed control mode : Denotes that the signal may be used in the initial setting status. : Denotes that the signal may be used by setting the corresponding parameter among parameters 43 to 49. The pin No.s in the connector pin No. column are those in the initial status. (1) Input signals POINT The acceptance delay time of each input signal is less than 10ms. Signal ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Functions/Applications I/O division Servo-on SON CN1-4 Connect SON-SG to switch on the base circuit and make the servo amplifier ready to operate (servo-on). Disconnect SON-SG to shut off the base circuit and coast the servo motor (servo off) . Set " 1" in parameter No. 41 to switch this signal on (keep terminals connected) automatically in the servo amplifier. DI-1 Reset RES CN1-3 Disconnect RES-SG for more than 50ms to reset the alarm. Some alarms cannot be deactivated by the reset signal. (Refer to Section 10.2.1.) Shorting RES-SG in an alarm-free status shuts off the base circuit. The base circuit is not shut off when " 1 " is set in parameter No. 51. DI-1 Forward rotation stroke end LSP CN1-6 To start operation, short LSP-SG and/or LSN-SG. Open them to bring the motor to a sudden stop and make it servo-locked. Set " 1" in parameter No. 22 to make a slow stop. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.) DI-1 (Note) Input signals LSP Reverse rotation stroke end LSN CN1-7 LSN 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 Operation CCW CW direction direction Note. 0: LSP/LSN-SG off (open) 1: SP/LSN-SG on (short) Set parameter No. 41 as indicated below to switch on the signals (keep terminals connected) automatically in the servo amplifier: Parameter No.41 Automatic ON 1 LSP 1 LSN 3 - 13 Control mode P S 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Internal torque limit selection TL1 Forward rotation start ST1 Reverse rotation start ST2 SP1 Speed selection 2 SP2 Proportion control When using this signal, make it usable by making the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. (Refer to (5), Section 3.4.1.) DI-1 Used to start the servo motor in any of the following directions: DI-1 (Note) Input signals Speed selection 1 Speed selection 3 CN1-3 Functions/Applications SP3 PC CN1-5 I/O division Servo motor starting direction ST2 ST1 0 0 Stop (servo lock) 0 1 CCW 1 0 CW 1 1 Stop (servo lock) Note. 0: ST1/ST2-SG off (open) 1: ST1/ST2-SG on (short) If both ST1 and ST2 are switched on or off during operation, the servo motor will be decelerated to a stop according to the parameter No. 12 setting and servo-locked. Used to select the command speed for operation. When using SP1 to SP3, make it usable by making the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. DI-1 (Note) Input signals SP3 SP2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 SP1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DI-1 Speed command Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) DI-1 Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9) Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10) Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72) Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73) Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74) Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75) Note 0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open) 1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short) Connect PC-SG to switch the speed amplifier from the proportional integral type to the proportional type. If the servo motor at a stop is rotated even one pulse due to any external factor, it generates torque to compensate for a position shift. When the servo motor shaft is to be locked mechanically after positioning completion (stop), switching on the proportion control signal (PC) upon positioning completion will suppress the unnecessary torque generated to compensate for a position shift. When the shaft is to be locked for a long time, switch on the proportion control signal and torque control signal (TL) at the same time to make the torque less than the rated by the analog torque limit. 3 - 14 DI-1 Control mode P S 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal Emergency stop Clear ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Functions/Applications I/O division EMG CN1-8 Disconnect EMG-SG to bring the servo motor to emergency stop state, in which the servo is switched off and the dynamic brake is operated. Connect EMG-SG in the emergency stop state to reset that state. DI-1 CR CN1-5 Connect CR-SG to clear the position control counter droop pulses on its leading edge. The pulse width should be 10ms or more. When the parameter No.42 setting is " 1 ", the pulses are always cleared while CR-SG are connected. DI-1 When using CM1 and CM2, make them usable by the setting of parameters No. 43 to 48. The combination of CM1-SG and CM2-SG gives you a choice of four different electronic gear numerators set in the parameters. CM1 and CM2 cannot be used in the absolute position detection system. DI-1 Electronic gear selection 1 CM1 Electronic gear selection 2 CM2 (Note) Input signals Electronic gear namerator CM2 CM1 0 0 Parameter No. 3 0 1 Parameter No. 69 1 0 Parameter No. 70 1 1 Parameter No. 71 Control mode P S DI-1 Note.0: CM1/CM2-SG off (open) 1: CM1/CM2-SG on (short) Gain changing CDP Control change LOP When using this signal, make it usable by the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. Connect CDP-SG to change the load inertia moment ratio into the parameter No. 61 setting and the gain values into the values multiplied by the parameter No. 62 to 64 settings. Used to select the control mode in the position/internal speed control change mode. DI-1 DI-1 Refer to Functions/ Applications. Forward rotation pulse train Reverse rotation pulse train PP CN1-23 NP CN1-25 PG CN1-22 NG CN1-24 (Note) LOP Control mode 0 1 Position Internal speed Note.0: LOP-SG off (open) 1: LOP-SG on (short) Used to enter a command pulse train. In the open collector system (max. input frequency 200kpps): Forward rotation pulse train across PP-SG Reverse rotation pulse train across NP-SG In the differential receiver system (max. input frequency 500kpps): Forward rotation pulse train across PG-PP Reverse rotation pulse train across NG-NP The command pulse train form can be changed using parameter No. 21. 3 - 15 DI-2 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) Output signals Signal Trouble ConnecSymbol tor pin No. ALM CN1-9 Functions/Applications I/O division ALM-SG are disconnected when power is switched off or the protective circuit is activated to shut off the base circuit. Without alarm, ALM-SG are connected within 1 after power on. DO-1 Ready RD CN1-11 RD-SG are connected when the servo is switched on and the servo amplifier is ready to operate. DO-1 In position INP CN1-10 INP-SG are connected when the number of droop pulses is in the preset in-position range. The in-position range can be changed using parameter No. 5. When the in-position range is increased, INP-SG may be kept connected during low-speed rotation. DO-1 Speed reached SA SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed has nearly reached the preset speed. When the preset speed is 50r/min or less, SA-SG are kept connected. DO-1 Zero speed ZSP CN1-12 ZSP-SG are connected when the servo motor speed is zero speed (50r/min) or less. Zero speed can be changed using parameter No. 24. DO-1 Electromagnetic brake interlock MBR 1 " in parameter No. 1 to use this parameter. Note that (CN1-12) Set " ZSP will be unusable. In the servo-off or alarm status, MBR-SG are disconnected. When an alarm occurs, they are disconnected independently of the base circuit status. DO-1 Warning WNG To use this signal, assign the connector pin for output using parameter No.49. The old signal before assignment will be unusable. When warning has occurred, WNG-SG are connected. When there is no warning, WNG-SG are disconnected within 1 second after power-on. DO-1 3 - 16 Control mode P S 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Signal Alarm code ConnecSymbol tor pin No. ACD 0 ACD 1 ACD 2 I/O division Functions/Applications To use this signal, set " 1 " in parameter No.49. This signal is output when an alarm occurs. When there is no alarm, respective ordinary signals (RD, INP, SA, ZSP) are output. Alarm codes and alarm names are listed below: (Note) Alarm code CN1 CN1 CN1 12 Pin 11 Pin 10 Pin 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Alarm display Name 88888 Watchdog AL.12 Memory error 1 AL.13 Clock error AL.15 Memory error 2 AL.17 Board error AL.19 Memory error 3 AL.37 Parameter error AL.8A Serial communication timeout AL.8E Serial communication error AL.30 Regenerative error AL.33 Overvoltage AL.10 Undervoltage AL.45 Main circuit device AL.46 Servo motor overheat AL.50 Overload 1 AL.51 Overload 2 AL.24 Main circuit error AL.32 Overcurrent AL.31 Overspeed AL.35 Command pulse frequency alarm AL.52 Error excessive AL.16 Encoder error 1 AL.1A Monitor combination error AL.20 Encoder error 2 Note.0: Pin-SG off (open) 1: Pin-SG on (short) 3 - 17 DO-1 Control mode P S 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Connector pin No. Symbol Encoder Z-phase pulse (Open collector) OP CN1-21 Outputs the zero-point signal of the encoder. One pulse is output per servo motor revolution. OP and LG are connected when the zero-point position is reached. (Negative logic) The minimum pulse width is about 400 s. For home position return using this pulse, set the creep speed to 100r/min. or less. DO-2 Encoder A-phase pulse (Differential line driver) LA CN1-15 Outputs pulses per servo motor revolution set in parameter No. 27 in the differential line driver system. In CCW rotation of the CN1-16 servo motor, the encoder B-phase pulse lags the encoder A-phase pulse by a phase angle of /2. CN1-17 The relationships between rotation direction and phase difference of the A- and B-phase pulses can be changed using parameter No. CN1-18 54. DO-2 DO-2 LZR CN1-19 The same signal as OP is output in the differential line driver system. CN1-20 Analog monitor 1 MO1 CN3-4 Used to output the data set in parameter No.17 to across MO1-LG in terms of voltage. Resolution 10 bits Analog output Analog monitor 2 MO2 CN3-6 Used to output the data set in parameter No.17 to across MO2-LG in terms of voltage. Resolution 10 bits Analog output Functions/Applications I/O division Encoder B-phase pulse (Differential line driver) LAR LB LBR LZ Encoder Z-phase pulse (Differential line driver) Functions/Applications I/O division Signal Control mode P S (3) Communication Signal RS-232C I/F Symbol Connector pin No. RXD CN3-1 TXD CN3-2 Control mode P S RS-232C communication interface. (4) Power supply Signal ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Functions/Applications Digital I/F power supply input VIN CN1-1 Used to input 24VDC for input interface. Connect the positive terminal of the 24VDC external power supply. 24VDC 10% Open collector power input OPC CN1-2 When inputting a pulse train in the open collector system, supply this terminal with the positive ( ) power of 24VDC. Digital I/F common SG CN1-13 Common terminal for input signals such as SON and EMG. Pins are connected internally. Separated from LG. Control common LG CN1-14 Common terminal for OP, MO1, and MO2. Pins are connected internally. Shield SD Plate Connect the external conductor of the shield cable. 3 - 18 I/O division Control mode P S 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.4 Detailed description of the signals 3.4.1 Position control mode (1) Pulse train input (a) Input pulse waveform selection Encoder pulses may be input in any of three different forms, for which positive or negative logic can be chosen. Set the command pulse train form in parameter No. 21. Arrow or in the table indicates the timing of importing a pulse train. A- and B-phase pulse trains are imported after they have been multiplied by 4. Pulse train form Negative logic Forward rotation pulse train Reverse rotation pulse train Forward rotation command Reverse rotation command Parameter No. 21 (Command pulse train) PP 0010 NP PP Pulse train 0011 sign NP L H PP A-phase pulse train B-phase pulse train 0012 Positive logic NP Forward rotation pulse train Reverse rotation pulse train PP 0000 NP PP Pulse train sign 0001 NP L H PP A-phase pulse train B-phase pulse train 0002 NP 3 - 19 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Connections and waveforms 1) Open collector system Connect as shown below: Servo amplifier External power supply 24VDC OPC PP Approx. 1.2k NP Approx. 1.2k SG SD The explanation assumes that the input waveform has been set to the negative logic and forward and reverse rotation pulse trains (parameter No.21 has been set to 0010). The waveforms in the table in (a), (1) of this section are voltage waveforms of PP and NP based on SG. Their relationships with transistor ON/OFF are as follows: Forward rotation pulse train (transistor) Reverse rotation pulse train (transistor) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) Forward rotation command 3 - 20 Reverse rotation command 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 2) Differential line driver system Connect as shown below: Servo amplifier PP PG NP NG SD The explanation assumes that the input waveform has been set to the negative logic and forward and reverse rotation pulse trains (parameter No.21 has been set to 0010). For the differential line driver, the waveforms in the table in (a), (1) of this section are as follows. The waveforms of PP, PG, NP and NG are based on that of the ground of the differential line driver. Forward rotation pulse train PP PG Reverse rotation pulse train NP NG Forward rotation command 3 - 21 Reverse rotation command 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) In-position (INP) PF-SG are connected when the number of droop pulses in the deviation counter falls within the preset in-position range (parameter No. 5). INP-SG may remain connected when low-speed operation is performed with a large value set as the in-position range. Servo-on (SON) Alarm ON OFF Yes No In-position range Droop pulses In position (INP) ON OFF (3) Ready (RD) Servo-on (SON) Alarm Ready (RD) ON OFF Yes No ON 80ms or less 10ms or less 10ms or less OFF (4) Electronic gear switching The combination of CM1-SG and CM2-SG gives you a choice of four different electronic gear numerators set in the parameters. As soon as CM1/CM2 is turned ON or OFF, the namerator of the electronic gear changes. Therefore, if any shock occurs at this change, use position smoothing (parameter No. 7) to relieve shock. (Note) External input signal Electronic gear namerator CM2 CM1 0 0 Parameter No. 3 0 1 Parameter No. 69 1 0 Parameter No. 70 1 1 Parameter No. 71 Note.0: CM1/CM2-SG off(open) 1: CM1/CM2-SG on(short) 3 - 22 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (5) Torque limit (a) Torque limit and torque By setting parameter No. 28 (internal torque limit 1), torque is always limited to the maximum value during operation. A relationship between the limit value and servo motor torque is shown below. Torque Max. torque 0 0 100 Torque limit value [%] (b) Torque limit value selection When internal torque limit selection (TL1) is made usable by parameter No. 43 to 48, internal torque limit 2 (parameter No. 76) can be selected. However, if the parameter No. 28 value is less than the limit value selected by parameter No.76, the parameter No. 28 value is made valid. (Note) External input signals TL1 0 1 Torque limit value made valid Internal torque limit value 1 (parameter No. 28) Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28 Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 76 Note.0: TL/TL1-SG off (open) 1: TL/TL1-SG on (short) 3 - 23 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.4.2 Internal speed control mode (1) Speed setting (a) Speed command and speed The servo motor is run at the speeds set in the parameters. Forward rotation (CCW) Reverse rotation (CW) The following table indicates the rotation direction according to forward rotation start (ST1) and reverse rotation start (ST2) combination: (Note) External input signals Rotation direction ST2 ST1 Internal speed commands 0 0 Stop (Servo lock) 0 1 CCW 1 0 CW 1 1 Stop (Servo lock) Note.0: ST1/ST2-SG off (open) 1: ST1/ST2-SG on (short) The forward rotation start signal (ST1) and reverse rotation start signal (ST2) can be assigned to any pins of the connector CN1 using parameters No. 43 to 48. Generally, make connection as shown below: Servo amplifier ST1 ST2 SG SD 3 - 24 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Speed selection 1 (SP1), speed selection 2 (SP2), speed selection 3 (SP3) and speed command value By making speed selection 1 (SP1), speed selection 2 (SP2) and speed selection 3 (SP3) usable by setting of parameter No. 43 to 47, you can choose the speed command values of internal speed commands 1 to 7. (Note) External input signals Speed command value SP3 SP2 SP1 0 0 0 Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) 0 0 1 Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) 0 1 0 Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9) 0 1 1 Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10) 1 0 0 Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72) 1 0 1 Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73) 1 1 0 Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74) 1 1 1 Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75) Note.0 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open) 1 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short) The speed may be changed during rotation. In this case, the values set in parameters No. 11 and 12 are used for acceleration/deceleration. When the speed has been specified under any internal speed command, it does not vary due to the ambient temperature. (2) Speed reached (SA) SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed nearly reaches the speed set to the internal speed command. Internal speed command 1 Set speed selection Start (ST1,ST2) ON OFF Servo motor speed Speed reached (SA) ON OFF (3) Torque limit As in Section 3.4.1 (5). 3 - 25 Internal speed command 2 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.4.3 Position/internal speed control change mode Set "0001" in parameter No. 0 to switch to the position/internal speed control change mode. This function is not available in the absolute position detection system. (1) Control change (LOP) Use control change (LOP) to switch between the position control mode and the internal speed control mode from an external contact. Relationships between LOP-SG status and control modes are indicated below: (Note) LOP Servo control mode 0 Position control mode 1 Speed control mode Note.0: LOP-SG off (open) 1: LOP-SG on (short) The control mode may be changed in the zero-speed status. To ensure safety, change control after the servo motor has stopped. When position control mode is changed to speed control mode, droop pulses are reset. If the signal has been switched on-off at the speed higher than the zero speed and the speed is then reduced to the zero speed or less, the control mode cannot be changed. A change timing chart is shown below: Position control mode Servo motor speed Zero speed (ZSP) Control change (LOP) Internal speed control mode Position control mode Zero speed level ON OFF ON OFF (Note) (Note) Note: When ZSP is not on, control cannot be changed if LOP is switched on-off. If ZSP switches on after that, control cannot not be changed. (2) Torque limit in position control mode As in Section 3.4.1 (5). 3 - 26 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Internal speed setting in speed control mode (a) Speed command and speed The servo motor is run at the speed set in parameter No. 8 (internal speed command 1) the forward rotation start signal (ST1) and reverse rotation start signal (ST2) are as in (a), (1) in section 3.4.2. Generally, make connection as shown below: Servo amplifier SP2 SG SD (b) Speed selection 2 (SP2) and speed command value Use speed selection 2 (SP2) to select between the speed set by the internal speed command 1 and the speed set by the Internal speed command 2 as indicated in the following table: (Note) External input signals SP1 Speed command value 0 Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) 1 Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9) Note.0: SP1-SG off (open) 1: SP1-SG on (short) The speed may also be changed during rotation. In this case, it is increased or decreased according to the value set in parameter No. 11 or 12. When the internal speed command 1 is used to command the speed, the speed does not vary with the ambient temperature. (c) Speed reached (SA) As in Section 3.4.2 (2). 3 - 27 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.5 Alarm occurrence timing chart When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting operation. CAUTION When an alarm occurs in the servo amplifier, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor is coated to a stop. Switch off the power supply in the external sequence. To reset the alarm, switch the power supply from off to on, press the "SET" button on the current alarm screen, or turn the reset signal (RES) from off to on. However, the alarm cannot be reset unless its cause is removed. (Note) Power supply ON OFF Base circuit ON OFF Valid Dynamic brake Invalid Servo-on (SON) Ready (RD) Trouble (ALM) Reset (RES) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Power off Brake operation Power on Brake operation 1s 50ms or more Alarm occurs. 60ms or more Remove cause of trouble. Note: Shut off the power as soon as an alarm occurs. (1) Overcurrent, overload 1 or overload 2 If operation is repeated by switching power off, then on to reset the overcurrent (AL.32), overload 1 (AL.50) or overload 2 (AL.51) alarm after its occurrence, without removing its cause, the servo amplifier and servo motor may become faulty due to temperature rise. Securely remove the cause of the alarm and also allow about 30 minutes for cooling before resuming operation. (2) Regenerative alarm If operation is repeated by switching power off, then on to reset the regenerative (AL.30) alarm after its occurrence, the external regenerative brake resistor will generate heat, resulting in an accident. (3) Instantaneous power failure Undervoltage (AL.10) occurs if power is restored after a 60ms or longer power failure of the power supply or after a drop of the bus voltage to or below 200VDC. If the power failure persists further, the power switches off. When the power failure is reset in this state, the alarm is reset and the servo motor will start suddenly if the servo-on signal (SON) is on. To prevent hazard, make up a sequence which will switch off the servo-on signal (SON) if an alarm occurs. (4) In position control mode (incremental) When an alarm occurs, the home position is lost. When resuming operation after deactivating the alarm, make a home position return. 3 - 28 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.6 Interfaces 3.6.1 Common line The following diagram shows the power supply and its common line. CN1 CN1 RA External power supply 24VDC VIN ALM, etc. DO-1 SON, etc. DI-1 SG OPC (Note) PG NG PP NP SG SG Isolated OP LG LA etc. Differential line driver output 35mA max. LAR etc. LG SD MO1 MO2 CN3 Analog monitor output LG SD SD TXD RXD RS-232C Servo motor encoder MR MRR Servo motor CN2 LG SM SD Ground Note: For the open collection pulse train input. Make the following connection for the different line driver pulse train input. OPC PG NG PP NP SG 3 - 29 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.6.2 Detailed description of the interfaces This section gives the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to I/O Division in the table) indicated in Sections 3.3.2. Refer to this section and connect the interfaces with the external equipment. (1) Digital input interface DI-1 Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor. Servo amplifier External power supply 24VDC 200mA or more R: Approx. 4.7 VIN SON, etc. Switch SG (2) Digital output interface DO-1 A lamp, relay or photocoupler can be driven. Provide a diode (D) for an inductive load, or an inrush current suppressing resister (R) for a lamp load. (Permissible current: 40mA or less, inrush current: 100mA or less) (a) Inductive load Servo amplifier VIN Load ALM, etc. External power supply 24VDC 10% SG If the diode is not connected as shown, the servo amplifier will be damaged. 3 - 30 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Lamp load Servo amplifier VIN External power supply 24VDC 10% R ALM, etc. SG (3) Pulse train input interface DI-2 Provide a pulse train signal in the open collector or differential line driver system. (a) Open collector system 1) Interface Servo amplifier Max. input pulse frequency 200kpps VIN About 1.2k External power supply 24VDC PP, NP SG SD 2) Conditions of the input pulse tc PP tHL tLH tHL 0.2 s tc 2 s tF 3 s 0.9 0.1 tc tLH tF NP 3 - 31 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Differential line driver system 1) Interface Servo amplifier Max. input pulse frequency 500kpps Am26LS31 or equivalent PP(NP) PG(NG) About 100 SD 2) Conditions of the input pulse tHL tc PP PG tLH tHL 0.1 s tc 1 s tF 3 s 0.9 0.1 tc tLH tF NP NG (4) Encoder pulse output (a) Open collector system Interface Max. output current : 35mA Servo amplifier Servo amplifier OP OP LG LG SD SD 3 - 32 5 to 24VDC Photocoupler 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (b) Differential line driver system 1) Interface Max. output current: 35mA Servo amplifier Servo amplifier LA (LB, LZ) Am26LS32 or equivalent LA (LB, LZ) 100 150 LAR (LBR, LZR) LAR (LBR, LZR) LG SD SD 2) Output pulse Servo motor CCW rotation LA LAR T LB LBR /2 LZ signal varies 3/8T on its leading edge. LZ LZR 400 s or more OP (5) Analog output Output voltage 10V Max.1mA Max. output current Resolution : 10bit Servo amplifier MO1 (MO2) LG 10k Reading in one or A both directions 1mA meter SD 3 - 33 High-speed photocoupler 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7 Input power supply circuit CAUTION When the servo amplifier has become faulty, switch power off on the servo amplifier power side. Continuous flow of a large current may cause a fire. Use the trouble signal to switch power off. Otherwise, a regenerative brake transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake resistor, causing a fire. POINT The power supply connector (CNP1) is optional. Purchase it without fail. 3.7.1 Connection example Wire the power supply and main circuit as shown below so that the servo-on signal turns off as soon as alarm occurrence is detected and power is shut off. A no-fuse breaker (NFB) must be used with the input cables of the power supply. (1) For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply Emergency stop OFF ON RA MC MC SK NFB MC 3-phase 200 to 230 VAC CNP1 Servo amplifier L1 L2 L3 (Note) P D C Emergency stop Servo-on EMG SON SG VIN ALM RA External power Trouble supply 24VDC SG Note: To use the built-in regenerative resistor, be sure to connect across P and D of the power supply connector (CNP1). 3 - 34 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) For 1-phase 230VAC power supply Emergency OFF stop ON RA MC MC SK NFB MC CNP1Servo amplifier L1 Power supply 1-phase 230VAC L2 L3 P (Note) D C EMG Emergency stop Servo-on SON SG VIN ALM RA External power Trouble supply 24VDC SG Note: To use the built-in regenerative resistor, be sure to connect across P and D of the power supply connector (CNP1). 3.7.2 Terminals Refer to Section 11.1 (4) for the signal arrangement. Connected terminal (Application) Symbol L1 Description Supply L1, L2 and L3 with the following power: For 1-phase 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1/L2 and leave L3 open. Servo amplifier Power supply L2 L3 Power supply MR-E-10A to 70A 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz 1-phase 230VAC, 50/60Hz L1 L1 MR-E-100A/ 200A L2 L3 L2 U Servo motor output V Connect to the servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W). W P Regenerative brake option C D Protective earth (PE) To use the built-in regenerative brake resistor of the servo amplifier, connect the wiring across P-D of the power supply connector (CNP1). When using the regenerative brake option, always remove the wiring from across P-D and connect the regenerative brake option across P-C. Refer to Section 13.1.1 for details. Connect this terminal to the protective earth (PE) terminals of the servo motor and control box for grounding. 3 - 35 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.7.3 Power-on sequence (1) Power-on procedure 1) Always wire the power supply as shown in above Section 3.7.1 using the magnetic contactor with the power supply (three-phase 200V: L1, L2, L3, single-phase 230V: L1, L2). Configure up an external sequence to switch off the magnetic contactor as soon as an alarm occurs. 2) The servo amplifier can accept the servo-on signal (SON) 2s or more after the power supply is switched on. Therefore, when SON is switched on simultaneously with the power supply, the base circuit will switch on in about 1 to 2s, and the ready signal (RD) will switch on in further about 20ms, making the servo amplifier ready to operate. (Refer to paragraph (2) in this section.) 3) When the reset signal (RES) is switched on, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor shaft coasts. (2) Timing chart SON accepted (1 to 2s) 2s or longer power supply ON OFF Base circuit ON OFF Servo-on (SON) ON OFF Reset (RES) ON OFF Ready (RD) ON OFF 10ms 10ms 60ms 60ms 20ms 20ms 10ms 10ms 20ms 10ms (3) Emergency stop Make up a circuit which shuts off power as soon as EMG-SG are opened at an emergency stop. To ensure safety, always install an external emergency stop switch across EMG-SG. By disconnecting EMG-SG, the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. At this time, the display shows the servo emergency stop warning (AL.E6). During ordinary operation, do not use the external emergency stop signal to alternate stop and run. The servo amplifier life may be shortened. Also, if the start signal is on or a pulse train is input during an emergency stop, the servo motor will rotate as soon as the warning is reset. During an emergency stop, always shut off the run command. External power supply 24VDC VIN Emergency stop EMG SG 3 - 36 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.8 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor 3.8.1 Connection instructions WARNING Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals to prevent an electric shock. CAUTION Connect the wires to the correct phase terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier and servo motor. Otherwise, the servo motor will operate improperly. Do not connect AC power supply directly to the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault may occur. POINT Do not apply the test lead bars or like of a tester directly to the pins of the connectors supplied with the servo motor. Doing so will deform the pins, causing poor contact. The connector (CNP2) for supplying the power to the motor is optional. Be sure to purchase it. The connection method differs according to the series and capacity of the servo motor and whether or not the servo motor has the electromagnetic brake. Perform wiring in accordance with this section. (1) For grounding, connect the earth cable of the servo motor to the protective earth (PE) terminal of the servo amplifier and connect the ground cable of the servo amplifier to the earth via the protective earth of the control box. Do not connect them directly to the protective earth of the control panel. Control box Servo amplifier Servo motor PE terminal (2) Do not share the 24VDC interface power supply between the interface and electromagnetic brake. Always use the power supply designed exclusively for the electromagnetic brake. 3.8.2 Connection diagram The following table lists wiring methods according to the servo motor types. Use the connection diagram which conforms to the servo motor used. For cables required for wiring, refer to Section 13.2.1. For encoder cable connection, refer to Section 13.1.4. For the signal layouts of the connectors, refer to Section 3.8.3. For the servo motor connector, refer to Chapter 3 of the Servo Motor Instruction Manual. 3 - 37 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING Servo motor Connection diagram Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP2 U (Red) U V (White) V W (Black) W Motor (Green) (Note 1) 24VDC HC-KFE13 (B) to 73 (B) B1 (Note2) B2 Electromagnetic brake EMG To be shut off when servo on signal switches off or by alarm signal CN2 Encoder Encoder cable Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake. Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP2 U U V V W W Motor (Note 1) 24VDC (Note2) B1 HC-SFE52 (B) to 152 (B) B2 EMG To be shut off when servo on signal switches off or by alarm signal Electromagnetic brake CN2 Encoder Encoder cable Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake. Servo amplifier Servo motor CNP2 U U V V W W Motor (Note 1) 24VDC (Note2) B1 HC-SFE202 (B) B2 EMG To be shut off when servo on signal switches off or by alarm signal Electromagnetic brake CN2 Encoder cable Encoder Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake. 3 - 38 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.8.3 I/O terminals (1) HC-KFE series Encoder connector signal arrangement Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m (0.98ft.) a Encoder cable 0.3m (0.98ft.) With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Power supply connector 5557-04R-210 1 3 2 4 View b b Power supply connector (molex) Without electromagnetic brake 5557-04R-210 (receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) With electromagnetic brake 5557-06R-210 (receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Power supply connector 5557-06R-210 Pin Signal 1 U 2 V 3 W 4 Earth 1 4 2 5 3 6 View b 1 2 MR MRR 3 4 5 6 MD MDR CONT 7 8 9 P5 LG SHD View a Signal Pin 1 U 2 V 3 W 4 Earth 5 (Note) B1 6 (Note) B2 Note:Supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC). There is no polarity. 3 - 39 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) HC-SFE series Servo motor side connectors Servo motor For power supply For encoder The connector CE05-2A22- HC-SFE52(B) to 152(B) 23PD-B CE05-2A24- HC-SFE202(B) Electromagnetic brake connector MS3102A2029P 17PD-B for power is shared. MS3102A10SL4P a Encoder connector b Brake connector c Power supply connector Power supply connector signal arrangement CE05-2A22-23PD-B CE05-2A24-10PD-B Key Key F G Pin A B C D E F G H A B H C E D View c Signal U V W (Earth) A F E B G D (Note) B1 (Note) B2 C View c Note:Supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC). There is no polarity. Encoder connector signal arrangement Key A B T K J N S H Note:Supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC). There is no polarity. MS3102A10SL-4P Key M Signal U V W (Earth) (Note) B1 (Note) B2 Electromagnetic brake connector signal arrangement MS3102A20-29P L Pin A B C D E F G C P D R E G View a F Pin A B C D E F G H J Signal MD MDR MR MRR Pin K L M N P R S T Signal CONT SHD B A LG P5 View b 3 - 40 Signal Pin A (Note)B1 B (Note)B2 Note:Supply electromagnetic brake power (24VDC). There is no polarity. 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.9 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake Configure the electromagnetic brake operation circuit so that it is activated not only by the servo amplifier signals but also by an external emergency stop signal. Contacts must be open when servo-on signal is off or when an alarm (trouble) is present and when an electromagnetic brake signal. Circuit must be opened during emergency stop signal. Servo motor CAUTION RA EMG 24VDC Electromagnetic brake The electromagnetic brake is provided for holding purpose and must not be used for ordinary braking. POINT Refer to the Servo Motor Instruction Manual for specifications such as the power supply capacity and operation delay time of the electromagnetic brake. Note the following when the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake is used for applications requiring a brake to hold the motor shaft (vertical lift applications): 1) Set " 1 " in parameter No.1 to make the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) valid. Note that this will make the zero speed signal (ZSP) unavailable. 2) Do not share the 24VDC interface power supply between the interface and electromagnetic brake. Always use the power supply designed exclusively for the electromagnetic brake. 3) The brake will operate when the power (24VDC) switches off. 4) While the reset signal is on, the base circuit is shut off. When using the servo motor with a vertical shaft, use the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR). 5) Switch off the servo-on signal after the servo motor has stopped. (1) Connection diagram Servo amplifier RA VIN MBR RA Emergency stop Servo motor B1 External power supply 24VDC SG B2 External power supply 24VDC (2) Setting 1) Set " 1 " in parameter No.1 to make the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) valid. 2) Using parameter No. 33 (electromagnetic brake sequence output), set a time delay (Tb) at servo-off from electromagnetic brake operation to base circuit shut-off as in the timing chart shown in (3) in this section. 3 - 41 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (3) Timing charts (a) Servo-on signal command (from controller) ON/OFF Tb [ms] after the servo-on (SON) signal is switched off, the servo lock is released and the servo motor coasts. If the electromagnetic brake is made valid in the servo lock status, the brake life may be shorter. Therefore, when using the electromagnetic brake in a vertical lift application or the like, set Tb to about the same as the electromagnetic brake operation delay time to prevent a drop. Coasting 0 r/min Servo motor speed Tb (60ms) Base circuit ON OFF Electromagnetic brake (MBR) Servo-on(SON) (80ms) Invalid(ON) Electromagnetic brake operation delay time Valid(OFF) ON OFF (b) Emergency stop signal (EMG) ON/OFF Servo motor speed (10ms) Base circuit Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic brake release (180ms) ON OFF Electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) Invalid (ON) Valid (OFF) (180ms) Electromagnetic brake operation delay time Invalid (ON) Emergency stop (EMG) Valid (OFF) 3 - 42 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) Alarm occurrence Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Servo motor speed Electromagnetic brake (10ms) ON Base circuit OFF Invalid(ON) Electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) Valid(OFF) Electromagnetic brake operation delay time No(ON) Trouble (ALM) Yes(OFF) (d) Power off (10ms) (Note) 15 to 100ms Servo motor speed Dynamic brake Dynamic brake Electromagnetic brake Electromagnetic brake ON Base circuit OFF Invalid(ON) Electromagnetic brake interlock(MBR) Valid(OFF) (10ms or less) Electromagnetic brake operation delay time (Note 2) No(ON) Trouble (ALM) Yes(OFF) ON power OFF Note: Changes with the operating status. 3 - 43 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.10 Grounding WARNING Ground the servo amplifier and servo motor securely. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the servo amplifier with the protective earth (PE) of the control box. The servo amplifier switches the power transistor on-off to supply power to the servo motor. Depending on the wiring and ground cablerouting, the servo amplifier may be affected by the switching noise (due to di/dt and dv/dt) of the transistor. To prevent such a fault, refer to the following diagram and always ground. To conform to the EMC Directive, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310). Control box Servo motor MC NFB CN2 L1 Line filter (Note) Power supply 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 1-phase 230VAC Servo amplifier Encoder L2 L3 U U V V W W SM Programmable controller CN1 Protective earth(PE) Note: For 1-phase 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1 L2 and leave L3 open. 3 - 44 Ensure to connect it to PE terminal of the servo amplifier. Do not connect it directly to the protective earth of the control panel. Outer box 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.11 Servo amplifier connectors (CNP1, CNP2) wiring method (When MR-ECPN1-B and MR-ECPN2-B of an option are used.) (1) Termination of the cables Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. (Cable size: 0.2 to 2.5mm2) 8 to 9 mm Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole. Do not solder the core as it may cause a contact fault. (Cable size: 0.2 to 2.5mm2)Alternatively, a bar terminal may be used to put the wires together.(Phoenix contact make) Cable size 2 [mm ] AWG 1.25 16 1.5 16 2 14 2.5 14 Bar terminal type For 1 cable For 2 cables BT1.25-9-1 Crimping tool Maker NH1 NICHIFU YHT-2210 JST CRIMPFOX-UD6 Phoenix Contact BT2-9-1 NH1 NICHIFU TUB-2 YHT-2210 JST TUB-1.25 AI1.5-8BK AI2.5-8BU AI2.5-8BK-1000 AI-TWIN2 1.5-8BK AI-TWIN2 1.5-12BK AI-TWIN2 AI-TWIN2 3 - 45 2.5-10BU CRIMPFOX-UD6 2.5-13BU Phoenix Contact 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (2) Inserting the cable into the connector (a) Applicable flat-blade screwdriver dimensions Always use the screwdriver shown here to do the work. [Unit: mm] (22) 3 0.6 (R0.3) 3 to 3.5 (R0.3) (b) When using the flat-blade screwdriver - part 1 1) Insert the screwdriver into the square hole. Insert it along the top of the square hole to insert it smoothly. 2) If inserted properly, the screwdriver is held. 3) With the screwdriver held, insert the cable in the direction of arrow. (Insert the cable as far as it will go.) 4) Releasing the screwdriver connects the cable. 3 - 46 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING (c) When using the flat-blade screwdriver - part 2 1) Insert the screwdriver into the square window at top of the connector. 2) Push the screwdriver in the direction of arrow. 4) Releasing the screwdriver connects the cable. 3 - 47 3) With the screwdriver pushed, insert the cable in the direction of arrow. (Insert the cable as far as it will go.) 3. SIGNALS AND WIRING 3.12 Instructions for the 3M connector When fabricating an encoder cable or the like, securely connect the shielded external conductor of the cable to the ground plate as shown in this section and fix it to the connector shell. External conductor Sheath Core Sheath External conductor Pull back the external conductor to cover the sheath Strip the sheath. Screw Cable Screw Ground plate 3 - 48 4. OPERATION 4. OPERATION 4.1 When switching power on for the first time Before starting operation, check the following: (1) Wiring (a) A correct power supply is connected to the power input terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the servo amplifier. (b) The servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier match in phase with the power input terminals (U, V, W) of the servo motor. (c) The servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier are not shorted to the power input terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the servo motor. (d) The earth terminal of the servo motor is connected to the PE terminal of the servo amplifier. (e) When using the regenerative brake option, the lead has been removed from across D-P of the servo amplifier built-in regenerative brake resistor, and twisted cables are used for its wiring. (f) When stroke end limit switches are used, the signals across LSP-SG and LSN-SG are on during operation. (g) 24VDC or higher voltages are not applied to the pins of connectors CN1. (h) SD and SG of connectors CN1 are not shorted. (i) The wiring cables are free from excessive force. (2) Environment Signal cables and power cables are not shorted by wire offcuts, metallic dust or the like. (3) Machine (a) The screws in the servo motor installation part and shaft-to-machine connection are tight. (b) The servo motor and the machine connected with the servo motor can be operated. 4- 1 4. OPERATION 4.2 Startup WARNING Do not operate the switches with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. CAUTION Before starting operation, check the parameters. Some machines may perform unexpected operation. During power-on for some after power-off, do not touch or close a parts (cable etc.) to the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, the servo motor, etc. Their temperatures may be high and you may get burnt or a parts may damaged. Connect the servo motor with a machine after confirming that the servo motor operates properly alone. 4.2.1 Selection of control mode Use parameter No. 0 to choose the control mode used. After setting, this parameter is made valid by switching power off, then on. 4.2.2 Position control mode (1) Power on 1) Switch off the servo-on (SON) signal. 2) When power is switched on, the display shows "C (Cumulative feedback pulses)", and in two second later, shows data. (2) Test operation 1 Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to Section 6.8.2.) (3) Parameter setting Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method. Parameter No. 0 Name Control mode, regenerative brake option selection Setting Description 3 0 Position control mode MR-RB12 regenerative brake option is used. 0 02 Input filter 3.555ms (initial value) Electromagnetic brake interlock signal is not used. Used in incremental positioning system. 1 Function selection 1 2 Auto tuning 3 Electronic gear numerator (CMX) 1 Electronic gear numerator 4 Electronic gear denominator (CDV) 1 Electronic gear denominator 1 5 Middle response (initial value) is selected. Auto tuning mode 1 is selected. Turn the power off after setting parameters No. 0 and 1. Then switch power on again to make the set parameter values valid. 4- 2 4. OPERATION (4) Servo-on Switch the servo-on in the following procedure: 1) Switch on power supply. 2) Switch on the servo-on signal (SON). When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is locked. (5) Command pulse input Entry of a pulse train from the positioning device rotates the servo motor. At first, run it at low speed and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input signal. On the status display, check the speed, command pulse frequency, load factor, etc. of the servo motor. When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the program of the positioning device. This servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function under model adaptive control. Performing operation automatically adjusts gains. The optimum tuning results are provided by setting the response level appropriate for the machine in parameter No. 2. (Refer to chapter 7) (6) Home position return Make home position return as required. (7) Stop In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo motor: Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. Note that the stop pattern of stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF is as described below. (a) Servo-on (SON) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. (b) Alarm occurrence When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. (c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs. (d) Forward rotation stroke end (LSP), reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) OFF The droop pulse value is erased and the servo motor is stopped and servo-locked. It can be run in the opposite direction. 4- 3 4. OPERATION 4.2.3 Internal speed control mode (1) Power on 1) Switch off the servo-on (SON) signal. 2) When circuit power is switched on, the display shows "r (servo motor speed)", and in two second later, shows data. (2) Test operation Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to Section 6.8.2.) (3) Parameter setting Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method. Parameter No. Name 0 Control mode, regenerative brake option selection 1 Function selection 1 2 Auto tuning 8 9 10 11 12 Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant Setting Description 0 2 Internal speed control mode Regenerative brake option is not used. 12 Input filter 3.555ms (initial value) Electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) is used. 1 5 13 1000 1500 2000 1000 500 0 Middle response (initial value) is selected. Auto tuning mode 1 is selected. Set 1000r/min. Set 1500r/min. Set 2000r/min. Set 1000ms. Set 500ms. Not used Turn the power off after setting parameters No. 0 and 1. Then switch power on again to make the set parameter values valid. (4) Servo-on Switch the servo-on in the following procedure: 1) Switch on circuit power supply. 2) Switch on the servo-on signal (SON). When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is locked. (5) Start Using speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2), choose the servo motor speed. Turn on forward rotation start (ST1) to run the motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction or reverse rotation start (ST2) to run it in the reverse rotation (CW) direction. At first, set a low speed and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input signal. On the status display, check the speed, load factor, etc. of the servo motor. When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the host controller or the like. This servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function under model adaptive control. Performing operation automatically adjusts gains. The optimum tuning results are provided by setting the response level appropriate for the machine in parameter No. 2. (Refer to chapter 7) 4- 4 4. OPERATION (6) Stop In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo motor: Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. Note that simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of stroke end (LSP, LSN) OFF and forward rotation start (ST1) or reverse rotation start (ST2) signal has the same stop pattern as described below. (a) Servo-on (SON) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. (b) Alarm occurrence When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. (c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs. (d) Stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF The servo motor is brought to a sudden stop and servo-locked. The motor may be run in the opposite direction. (e) Simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of forward rotation start (ST1) and reverse rotation start (ST2) signals The servo motor is decelerated to a stop. POINT A sudden stop indicates deceleration to a stop at the deceleration time constant of zero. 4- 5 4. OPERATION MEMO 4- 6 5. PARAMETERS 5. PARAMETERS CAUTION Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation instable. 5.1 Parameter list 5.1.1 Parameter write inhibit POINT After setting the parameter No. 19 value, switch power off, then on to make that setting valid. This servo amplifier, its parameters are classified into the basic parameters (No. 0 to 19), expansion parameters 1 (No. 20 to 49) and expansion parameters 2 (No.50 to 84) according to their safety aspects and frequencies of use. In the factory setting condition, the customer can change the basic parameter values but cannot change the expansion parameter values. When fine adjustment, e.g. gain adjustment, is required, change the parameter No. 19 setting to make the expansion parameters write-enabled. The following table indicates the parameters which are enabled for reference and write by the setting of parameter No. 19. Operation can be performed for the parameters marked . Parameter No. 19 setting Operation 0000 (initial value) Reference 000A 000B 000C 000E 100B 100C 100E Basic parameters No. 0 to No. 19 Write Reference No. 19 only Write No. 19 only Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write No. 19 only Reference Write No. 19 only Reference Write No. 19 only 5- 1 Expansion parameters 1 No. 20 to No. 49 Expansion parameters 2 No. 50 to No. 84 5. PARAMETERS 5.1.2 Lists POINT For any parameter whose symbol is preceded by *, set the parameter value and switch power off once, then switch it on again to make that parameter setting valid. The symbols in the control mode column of the table indicate the following modes: P : Position control mode S : Internal speed control mode (1) Item list Basic parameters No. Symbol Name Control mode Initial value Unit 0 *STY Control mode ,regenerative brake option selection P S (Note 1) 1 *OP1 Function selection 1 P S 0002 2 ATU Auto tuning P S 0105 3 CMX Electronic gear numerator P 1 4 CDV Electronic gear denominator P 1 5 INP In-position range P 100 pulse 6 PG1 Position loop gain 1 P 35 rad/s 7 PST Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (Smoothing) P 3 ms 8 SC1 Internal speed command 1 S 100 r/min 9 SC2 Internal speed command 2 S 500 r/min 10 SC3 Internal speed command 3 S 1000 r/min ms 11 STA Acceleration time constant S 0 12 STB Deceleration time constant S 0 ms 13 STC S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant S 0 ms 14 For manufacturer setting 0 15 *SNO Station number setting P S 0 16 *BPS Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear P S 0000 17 MOD Analog monitor output P S 0100 18 *DMD Status display selection P S 0000 19 *BLK P S 0000 Parameter block 5- 2 station Customer setting 5. PARAMETERS No. Symbol 20 *OP2 Function selection 2 21 *OP3 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) 22 *OP4 Function selection 4 23 FFC Feed forward gain 24 ZSP Zero speed Control mode Initial value P S 0000 P 0000 P S 0000 Unit P 0 % P S 50 r/min 25 For manufacturer setting 0 26 For manufacturer setting 100 27 *ENR Encoder output pulses P S 4000 pulse /rev 28 TL1 Internal torque limit 1 P S 100 % 29 For manufacturer setting 30 Expansion parameters 1 Name 0 For manufacturer setting 0 31 MO1 Analog monitor 1 offset P S 0 mV 32 MO2 Analog monitor 2 offset P S 0 mV 33 MBR Electromagnetic brake sequence output P S 100 ms 70 0.1 times 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment P S 35 PG2 Position loop gain 2 P 35 rad/s 36 VG1 Speed loop gain 1 P S 177 rad/s 37 VG2 Speed loop gain 2 P S 817 rad/s ms 38 VIC Speed integral compensation P S 48 39 VDC Speed differential compensation P S 980 41 *DIA Input signal automatic ON selection P S 0000 42 *DI1 Input signal selection 1 P S 0002 43 *DI2 Input signal selection 2 (CN1-4) P S 0111 44 *DI3 Input signal selection 3 (CN1-3) P S 0882 45 *DI4 Input signal selection 4 (CN1-5) P S 0995 46 *DI5 Input signal selection 5 (CN1-6) P S 0000 47 *DI6 Input signal selection 6 (CN1-7) P S 0000 P S 0403 P S 0000 40 48 49 For manufacturer setting 0 *LSPN LSP LSN input terminals selection *DO1 Output signal selection 1 5- 3 Customer setting 5. PARAMETERS No. Symbol 50 51 For manufacturer setting Initial value Function selection 6 53 *OP8 Function selection 8 P S P S 54 *OP9 Function selection 9 P S 0000 55 *OPA Function selection A P 0000 56 SIC For manufacturer setting 57 Unit 0000 *OP6 52 Expansion parameters 2 Control mode Name 0000 0000 Serial communication time-out selection P S For manufacturer setting 0000 0 s 10 58 NH1 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 P S 0000 59 NH2 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 P S 0000 60 LPF Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control P S 0000 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 2 P S 70 0.1 times 62 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio P 100 % 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio P S 100 % 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio P S 100 % 65 *CDP Gain changing selection P S 0000 66 CDS Gain changing condition P S 10 (Note 2) 67 CDT Gain changing time constant P S 1 ms 68 For manufacturer setting 0 69 CMX2 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 P 1 70 CMX3 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 P 1 71 CMX4 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 P 1 72 SC4 Internal speed command 4 S 200 r/min 73 SC5 Internal speed command 5 S 300 r/min 74 SC6 Internal speed command 6 S 500 r/min 75 SC7 Internal speed command 7 S 800 r/min 76 TL2 Internal torque limit 2 P S 100 % 77 100 For manufacturer setting 78 10000 79 10 80 10 81 100 82 100 83 100 84 0000 Note 1. Depends on the capacity of the servo amplifier. 2. Depends on the parameter No. 65 setting. 5- 4 Customer setting 5. PARAMETERS (2) Details list Class No. Symbol 0 *STY Name and function Control mode, regenerative brake option selection Used to select the control mode and regenerative brake option. Initial value 100W : 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and Basic parameters Select the control mode. 0:Position 1:Position and internal speed 2:Internal speed Motor series selection 0:HC-KFE 1:HC-SFE Selection of regenerative brake option 0:Not used (The built-in regenerative brake resistor used.) 2:MR-RB032 3:MR-RB12 4:MR-RB32 5:MR-RB30 6:MR-RB50 Motor capacity selection 0:100W 1:200W 2:400W 3:500W 4:750W 5:1kW 6:1.5kW 7:2kW 200W : 1000 function column. 400W : 2000 750W : 4000 1kW : 5010 2kW : 6010 POINT Wrong setting may cause the regenerative brake option to burn. If the regenerative brake option selected is not for use with the servo amplifier, parameter error (AL.37) occurs. 1 *OP1 Function selection 1 Used to select the input signal filter, the function of pin CN1-12. 0002 Refer to Name and 0 0 function Input signal filter If external input signal causes chattering due to noise, etc., input filter is used to suppress it. 0:None 1:1.777[ms] 2:3.555[ms] 3:5.333[ms] CN1-12 function selection 0:Zero Speed detection signal 1:Electromagnetic brake interlock signal 5- 5 column. P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 2 ATU Name and function Auto tuning Used to selection the response level, etc. for execution of auto tuning. Refer to Chapter 7. 0 Initial value 0105 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and function 0 column. Auto tuning response level setting Set value Response level Low response Machine resonance frequency guideline Basic parameters 1 15Hz 2 20Hz 25Hz 3 4 30Hz 35Hz 5 6 45Hz 7 55Hz Middle 8 70Hz response 85Hz 9 A 105Hz B 130Hz C 160Hz 200Hz D High E 240Hz response F 300Hz If the machine hunts or generates large gear sound, decrease the set value. To improve performance, e.g. shorten the settling time, increase the set value. Gain adjustment mode selection (For more information, refer to Section 7.1.1.) Set Description Gain adjustment mode value Interpolation mode Fixes position control gain 1 0 (parameter No. 6). Auto tuning mode 1 Ordinary auto tuning. 1 Auto tuning mode 2 2 Fixes the load inertia moment ratio set in parameter No. 34. Response level setting can be changed. 3 Manual mode 1 Simple manual adjustment. Manual mode 2 4 Manual adjustment of all gains. 3 CMX Electronic gear numerator Used to set the electronic gear numerator value. For the setting, refer to Section 5.2.1. Setting "0" automatically sets the resolution of the servo motor connected. 1 0 1 to 65535 P 4 CDV Electronic gear denominator Used to set the electronic gear denominator value. For the setting, refer to Section 5.2.1. 1 1 to 65535 P 5- 6 5. PARAMETERS No. Symbol 5 INP 6 PG1 7 PST Name and function In-position range Used to set the in-position signal (INP) output range in the command pulse increments prior to electronic gear calculation. Position loop gain 1 Used to set the gain of position loop. Increase the gain to improve trackability in response to the position command. When auto turning mode 1,2 is selected, the result of auto turning is automatically used. Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position smoothing) Used to set the time constant of a low pass filter in response to the position command. You can use parameter No. 55 to choose the primary delay or linear acceleration/deceleration control system. When you choose linear acceleration/deceleration, the setting range is 0 to 10ms. Setting of longer than 10ms is recognized as 10ms. Initial value Unit 100 pulse 35 red/s 3 100 Setting Control range mode 0 to 10000 4 to 2000 P ms 0 to 20000 P r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed S P POINT When you have chosen linear acceleration/deceleration, do not select control selection (parameter No. 0) and restart after instantaneous power failure (parameter No. 20). Doing so will cause the servo motor to make a sudden stop at the time of position control switching or restart. Basic parameters Class Example: When a command is given from a synchronizing detector, synchronous operation can be started smoothly if started during line operation. Synchronizing detector Start Servo motor Servo amplifier Without time constant setting Servo motor speed Start 8 SC1 With time constant setting ON OFF t Internal speed command 1 Used to set speed 1 of internal speed commands. 5- 7 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 9 SC2 Internal speed command 2 Used to set speed 2 of internal speed commands. 10 SC3 Internal speed command 3 Used to set speed 3 of internal speed commands. 11 STA Acceleration time constant Used to set the acceleration time required to reach the rated speed from 0r/min in response to the internal speed commands 1 to 7. Rated speed Zero speed STB 13 STC 0 instantaneous permissible speed r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed S ms 0 to 20000 S ms 0 to 1000 S Time Parameter No.11 setting Parameter No.12 setting For example for the servo motor of 3000r/min rated speed, set 3000 (3s) to increase speed from 0r/min to 1000r/min in 1 second. Deceleration time constant Used to set the deceleration time required to reach 0r/min from the rated speed in response to the internal speed commands 1 to 7. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant Used to smooth start/stop of the servo motor. Set the time of the arc part for S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Speed command Speed Servo motor 12 1000 Setting Control range mode r/min S 0 to Unit If the preset speed command is lower than the rated speed, acceleration/deceleration time will be shorter. Speed Basic parameters Initial value 500 Name and function 0r/min STC Time STA STC STC STB STC STA: Acceleration time constant (parameter No.11) STB: Deceleration time constant (parameter No.12) STC: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No.13) Long setting of STA (acceleration time constant) or STB (deceleration time constant) may produce an error in the time of the arc part for the setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant. The upper limit value of the actual arc part time is limited by 2000000 2000000 for acceleration or by for deceleration. STA STB (Example) At the setting of STA 20000, STB 5000 and STC 200, the actual arc part times are as follows: Limited to 100[ms] since 2000000 During acceleration: 100[ms] 100[ms] 200[ms]. 20000 200[ms] as set since During deceleration: 200[ms] 2000000 5000 400[ms] 200[ms]. 5- 8 0 0 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 14 Name and function Initial value For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0 15 *SNO Station number setting Used to specify the station number for serial communication. Always set one station to one axis of servo amplifier. If one station number is set to two or more stations, normal communication cannot be made. 0 16 *BPS Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear Used to select the serial communication baudrate, select various communication conditions, and clear the alarm history. 0000 Unit station Setting Control range mode 0 to 31 P S Refer to P S Name and function 0 column. Basic parameters Serial baudrate selection 0: 9600 [bps] 1: 19200[bps] 2: 38400[bps] 3: 57600[bps] Alarm history clear 0: Invalid 1: Valid When alarm history clear is made valid, the alarm history is cleared at next power-on. After the alarm history is cleared, the setting is automatically made invalid (reset to 0). Serial communication response delay time 0: Invalid 1: Valid, reply sent after delay time of 800 s or more 17 MOD Analog monitor output Used to selection the signal provided to the analog monitor (MO1) analog monitor (MO2) output. (Refer to Section 5.2.2) 0 0100 Refer to Name and function 0 column. Setting Analog monitor 2 (MO2) Analog monitor 1 (MO1) 0 Servo motor speed ( 8V/max. speed) 1 Torque ( 8V/max. torque) 2 Servo motor speed ( 8V/max. speed) 3 Torque ( 8V/max. torque) 4 Current command ( 8V/max. current command) 5 Command pulse frequency ( 10V/500kpulse/s) 6 Droop pulses ( 10V/128 pulses) 7 Droop pulses ( 10V/2048 pulses) 8 Droop pulses ( 10V/8192 pulses) 9 Droop pulses ( 10V/32768 pulses) A Droop pulses ( 10V/131072 pulses) B Bus voltage ( 8V/400V) 5- 9 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 18 Initial value Name and function *DMD Status display selection Used to select the status display shown at power-on. Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and 0 0 function column. Selection of status display at power-on 0: Cumulative feedback pulses 1: Servo motor speed 2: Droop pulses 3: Cumulative command pulses 4: Command pulse frequency 7: Regenerative load ratio 8: Effective load ratio 9: Peak load ratio A: Instantaneous torque B: Within one-revolution position low C: Within one-revolution position high D: Load inertia moment ratio E: Bus voltage Basic parameters Status display at power-on in corresponding control mode 0: Depends on the control mode. Control Mode Status display at power-on Position Cumulative feedback pulses Position/internal speed Cumulative feedback pulses/servo motor speed Internal speed Servo motor speed 1: Depends on the first digit setting of this parameter. 19 *BLK Parameter block Used to select the reference and write ranges of the parameters. Operation can be performed for the parameters marked . Set value 0000 (Initial value) 000A 000B 000C 000E 100B 100C 100E Operation Basic parameters No. 0 to No. 19 Expansion Expansion parameters 1 parameters 2 No. 20 No. 50 to No. 49 to No. 84 Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only 5 - 10 0000 Refer to Name and function column. P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 20 *OP2 Name and function Function selection 2 Used to select restart after instantaneous power failure, servo lock at a stop in internal speed control mode, and slight vibration suppression control. Initial value 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. Restart after instantaneous power failure If the input power supply voltage had reduced in the internal speed control mode to stop the servo motor due to the undervoltage alarm (AL.10) but the supply voltage has returned to normal, the servo motor can be restarted by merely switching on the start signal without resetting the alarm. 0: Invalid 1: Valid S Expansion parameters 1 Stop-time servo lock selection The shaft can be servo-locked to remain still at a stop in the internal speed control mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Slight vibration suppression control Made valid when auto tuning selection is set to "0400" in parameter No. 2. Used to suppress vibration at a stop. 0: Invalid 1: Valid In case of the internal speed control mode, set "1" at the second digit and validate servo lock at stop to use this setting. P S Encoder cable communication system selection 0: Two-wire type 1: Four-wire type Incorrect setting will result in an encoder alarm 1 (AL. 16) or encoder alarm 2 (AL. 20). 21 *OP3 Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection) Used to select the input form of the pulse train input signal. (Refer to Section 3.4.1.) P S 0000 Refer to Name and function 0 0 column. Command pulse train input form 0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train 1: Signed pulse train 2: A/B phase pulse train Pulse train logic selection 0: Positive logic 1: Negative logic 5 - 11 P 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 22 *OP4 Name and function Function selection 4 Used to select stop processing at forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) off and choose TLC/VLC output. Initial value Unit 0000 Refer to P S Name and function 0 0 0 Expansion parameters 1 Setting Control range mode column. How to make a stop when forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is valid. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.) 0: Sudden stop 1: Slow stop 23 FFC 24 ZSP 25 26 Feed forward gain Set the feed forward gain. When the setting is 100%, the droop pulses during operation at constant speed are nearly zero. However, sudden acceleration/deceleration will increase the overshoot. As a guideline, when the feed forward gain setting is 100%, set 1s or more as the acceleration/deceleration time constant up to the rated speed. Zero speed Used to set the output range of the zero speed (ZSP). For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 5 - 12 0 % 0 to 100 P 50 r/min 0 to 10000 P S 0 100 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol Expansion parameters 1 27 *ENR Name and function Encoder output pulses Used to set the encoder pulses (A-phase or B-phase) output by the servo amplifier. Set the value 4 times greater than the A-phase or B-phase pulses. You can use parameter No. 54 to choose the output pulse designation or output division ratio setting. The number of A/B-phase pulses actually output is 1/4 times greater than the preset number of pulses. The maximum output frequency is 1.3Mpps (after multiplication by 4). Use this parameter within this range. For output pulse designation Set " 0 " (initial value) in parameter No. 54. Set the number of pulses per servo motor revolution. Output pulse set value [pulses/rev] At the setting of 5600, for example, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: 5600 A B-phase output pulses 1400[pulse] 4 For output division ratio setting Set "1 "in parameter No. 54. The number of pulses per servo motor revolution is divided by the set value. Resolution per servo motor revolution Output pulse [pulses/rev] Set value At the setting of 8, for example, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: A B-phase output pulses 28 TL1 29 30 31 MO1 32 MO2 33 MBR 34 GD2 10000 8 1 4 Initial value 4000 Setting Control range mode pulse/ 1 P S rev to 65535 Unit 313[pulse] Internal torque limit 1 Set this parameter to limit servo motor torque on the assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%]. When 0 is set, torque is not produced. (Note) External input Torque limit value made valid signals TL1 0 Internal torque limit value 1 (parameter No. 28) 1 Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28 Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 76 Note.0 :off 1 :on When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the maximum output voltage ( 8V). (Refer to Section 3.4.1, (5)) For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. Analog monitor 1 offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor 1 (MO1). Analog monitor 2 offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor 2 (MO2). Electromagnetic brake sequence output Used to set the delay time (Tb) between electronic brake interlock (MBR) and the base drive circuit is shut-off. Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Used to set the ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment. When auto tuning mode 1 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. (Refer to section 7.1.1) In this case, it varies between 0 and 1000. 5 - 13 100 % 0 to 100 P S 0 0 0 0 mV mV 100 ms 70 0.1 times 999 to 999 999 to 999 0 to 1000 0 to 3000 P S P S P S P S 5. PARAMETERS Expansion parameters 1 Class No. Symbol 35 PG2 36 VG1 37 VG2 38 VIC 39 VDC 40 41 Name and function Position loop gain 2 Used to set the gain of the position loop. Set this parameter to increase the position response to level load disturbance. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1,2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed loop gain 1 Normally this parameter setting need not be changed. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2, manual mode and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed loop gain 2 Set this parameter when vibration occurs on machines of low rigidity or large backlash. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed integral compensation Used to set the integral time constant of the speed loop. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed differential compensation Used to set the differential compensation. Made valid when the proportion control (PC) is switched on. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. *DIA Input signal automatic ON selection Used to set automatic servo-on (SON) forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN). Setting Control range mode Initial value Unit 35 rad/s 1 to 1000 P 177 rad/s 20 to 8000 P S 817 rad/s 20 to 20000 P S 48 ms 1 to 1000 P S 0 to 1000 P S Refer to P S 980 0 0000 Name and function 0 column. Servo-on (SON) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) 5 - 14 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 42 *DI1 Name and function Input signal selection 1 Used to assign the control mode changing signal input pins and to set the clear (CR). 0002 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function 0 0 Expansion parameters 1 Initial value column. Control change (LOP) input pin assignment Used to set the control mode change signal input connector pins. Note that this parameter is made valid when parameter No. 0 is set to select the position/internal speed change mode. Set value Connector pin No. 0 CN1-4 1 CN1-3 2 CN1-5 3 CN1-6 4 CN1-7 P/S If forward rotation stroke end (LSP) or reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to any pin with parameter No. 48, this setting is invalid. Clear (CR) selection 0: Droop pulses are cleared on the leading edge. 1: While turning on, droop pulses are always cleared. 5 - 15 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 43 *DI2 Name and function Input signal selection 2 (CN1-4) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 4. Note that the setting digit and assigned signal differ according to the control mode. 0111 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. 0 0 Position Input signals of control mode CN1-pin 4 Internal speed selected. control mode Signals that may be assigned in each control mode are indicated below by their symbols. Setting of any other signal will be invalid. Set value (Note) Control mode P S 0 Expansion parameters 1 Initial value 1 SON SON 2 RES RES 3 PC PC 4 5 CR CR 6 SP1 7 SP2 8 ST1 9 ST2 A SP3 B CM1 C CM2 D TL1 TL1 E CDP CDP F Note: P: Position control mode S: Internal speed control mode This parameter is unavailable when parameter No.42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 4. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 48 is set to assign the Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) to be assigned to CN1-pin 4. 5 - 16 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 44 *DI3 Name and function Input signal selection 3 (CN1-3) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 3. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). Initial value 0882 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and function column. 0 0 Position control mode Internal speed control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 3 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 3. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 48 is set to assign the Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) to be assigned to CN1-pin 3. *DI4 Expansion parameters 1 45 Input signal selection 4 (CN1-5) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 5. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0995 Refer to P S Name and function column. 0 9 Position control mode Internal speed control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 5 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 5. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 48 is set to assign the Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) to be assigned to CN1-pin 5 46 *DI5 Input signal selection 5 (CN1-6) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 6. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0000 Refer to Name and function column. 0 0 Position control mode Internal speed control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 6 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 6. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 48 is set to assign the Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) to be assigned to CN1pin 6. 5 - 17 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 47 *DI6 Name and function Input signal selection 6 (CN1-7) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 7. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). Initial value 0000 Expansion parameters 1 Refer to P S and function column. Position control mode Internal speed control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 7 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1-pin 7. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 48 is set to assign the Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) to be assigned to CN1pin 7. LSP/LSN input terminal selection *LSPN Select the pins where the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) will be assigned. If the signals have already been assigned using parameter No. 42 to 47, this parameter setting has preference. However, if the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) is assigned at pin 6 of CN1 (default setting), the setting of parameter No. 46 takes priority. Similarly, if the reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned at pin 7 of CN1 (default setting), the setting of parameter No. 47 takes priority. If the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) are assigned at the same pin, the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) takes priority while the reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is disabled. 0 Setting Control range mode Name 0 0 48 Unit 0 Select the pin where the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) will be assigned. Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 Connector pin No. CN1-5 CN1-4 CN1-6 CN1-7 CN1-3 Select the pin where the reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) will be assigned. The settings are the same as those of the first digit. 5 - 18 0403 Refer to Name and function column. P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 49 *DO1 Initial value Name and function Output signal selection 1 Used to select the connector pins to output the alarm code and warning (WNG). Setting range Control mode Refer to P S Name and function 0 0 column. Setting of alarm code output Connector pins Set value CN1-10 CN1-11 CN1-12 0 INP or SA RD ZSP Alarm code is output at alarm occurrence. 1 (Note) Alarm code Alarm CN1 CN1 CN1 display pin 10 pin 11 pin 12 0 Expansion parameters 1 0000 Unit 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Name 88888 Watchdog AL.12 Memory error 1 AL.13 Clock error AL.15 Memory error 2 AL.17 Board error 2 AL.19 Memory error 3 AL.37 Parameter error AL.8A Serial communication time-out error AL.8E Serial communication error AL.30 Regenerative error AL.33 Overvoltage AL.10 Undervoltage AL.45 Main circuit device overheat AL.46 Servo motor overheat AL.50 Overload 1 AL.51 Overload 2 AL.24 Main circuit AL.32 Overcurrent AL.31 Overspeed AL.35 Command pulse frequency error AL.52 Error excessive AL.16 Encoder error 1 AL.1A Motor combination error AL.20 Encoder error 2 Note: 0:off 1:on Setting of warning (WNG) output Select the connector pin to output warning. The old signal before selection will be unavailable. Set value 0 1 2 3 4 Connector pin No. Not output. CN1-11 CN1-9 CN1-10 CN1-12 5 - 19 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 50 51 *OP6 Initial value Name and function For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0000 Function selection 6 Used to select the operation to be performed when the reset (RES) switches on. 0000 0 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and function 0 0 column. Operation to be performed when the reset (RES) switches on 0: Base circuit not switched off 1: Base circuit switched off 52 53 *OP8 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0000 Function selection 8 Used to select the protocol of serial communication. 0000 0 Refer to P S Name and 0 function Expansion parameters 2 column. Protocol checksum selection 0: Yes (checksum added) 1: No (checksum not added) Protocol checksum selection 0: With station numbers 1: No station numbers 54 *OP9 Function selection 9 Use to select the command pulse rotation direction, encoder output pulse direction and encoder pulse output setting. Name and column. Servo motor rotation direction changing Changes the servo motor rotation direction for the input pulse train. Set value Servo motor rotation direction At forward rotation At reverse rotation pulse input pulse input 0 CCW CW 1 CW CCW Encoder pulse output phase changing Changes the phases of A/B-phase encoder pulses output . Servo motor rotation direction Set value 1 Refer to function 0 0 0000 CCW CW A phase A phase B phase B phase A phase A phase B phase B phase Encoder output pulse setting selection (refer to parameter No. 27) 0: Output pulse setting 1: Division ratio setting 5 - 20 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 55 *OPA Initial value Name and function Function selection A Used to select the position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No. 7) control system. 0 0 Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to P Name and function 0 column. Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant control 0: Primary delay 1: Linear acceleration/deceleration 56 SIC 57 58 NH1 Serial communication time-out selection Used to set the communication protocol time-out period in [s]. When you set "0", time-out check is not made. 0 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 10 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 Used to selection the machine resonance suppression filter. (Refer to Section 8.2.) 0 s 0000 P S 1 to 60 Refer to P S Name and function 0 column. Expansion parameters 2 Notch frequency selection Set "00" when you have set adaptive vibration suppression control to be "valid" or "held" (parameter No. 60: 1 or 2 ). Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency value value value value 00 Invalid 08 562.5 10 281.3 18 187.5 01 4500 09 500 11 264.7 19 180 02 2250 0A 450 12 250 1A 173.1 03 1500 0B 409.1 13 236.8 1B 166.7 04 1125 0C 375 14 225 1C 160.1 05 900 0D 346.2 15 214.3 1D 155.2 06 750 0E 321.4 16 204.5 1E 150 07 642.9 0F 300 17 195.7 1F 145.2 Notch depth selection 59 NH2 Setting value Depth Gain 0 Deep 40dB 1 to 14dB 2 3 Shallow 8dB 4dB Machine resonance suppression filter 2 Used to set the machine resonance suppression filter. 0000 Refer to Name and 0 function column. Notch frequency Same setting as in parameter No. 58 However, you need not set "00" if you have set adaptive vibration suppression control to be "valid" or "held". Notch depth Same setting as in parameter No. 58 5 - 21 P S 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 60 LPF Name and function Low-pass filter/adaptive vibration suppression control Used to selection the low-pass filter and adaptive vibration suppression control. (Refer to Chapter 8.) Initial value Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and function 0 column. Low-pass filter selection 0: Valid (Automatic adjustment) 1: Invalid VG2 setting 10 When you choose "valid", 2 (1 GD2 setting 0.1) [Hz] bandwidth filter is set automatically. Expansion parameters 2 Adaptive vibration suppression control selection Choosing "valid" or "held" in adaptive vibration suppression control selection makes the machine resonance control filter 1 (parameter No. 58) invalid. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Machine resonance frequency is always detected and the filter is generated in response to resonance to suppress machine vibration. 2: Held The characteristics of the filter generated so far are held, and detection of machine resonance is stopped. Adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity selection Used to set the sensitivity of machine resonance detection. 0: Normal 1: Large sensitivity 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment when gain changing is valid. 70 0.1 times 0 to 3000 P S 62 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio Used to set the ratio of changing the position control gain 2 when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid. 100 % 10 to 200 P 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio Used to set the ratio of changing the speed control gain 2 when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid. 100 % 10 to 200 P S 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio Used to set the ratio of changing the speed integral compensation when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid. 100 % 50 to 1000 P S 5 - 22 5. PARAMETERS Class No. Symbol 65 *CDP Name and function Gain changing selection Used to select the gain changing condition. (Refer to Section 8.5.) Initial value Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to P S Name and 0 0 0 function column. Expansion parameters 2 Gain changing selection Gains are changed in accordance with the settings of parameters No. 61 to 64 under any of the following conditions: 0: Invalid 1: Gain changing (CDP) is ON 2: Command frequency is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 3: Droop pulse value is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 4: Servo motor speed is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 66 CDS Gain changing condition Used to set the value of gain changing condition (command frequency, droop pulses, servo motor speed) selected in parameter No. 65.The set value unit changes with the changing condition item. (Refer to Section 8.5.) 10 kpps pulse r/min 10 to 9999 P S 67 CDT Gain changing time constant Used to set the time constant at which the gains will change in response to the conditions set in parameters No. 65 and 66. (Refer to Section 8.5.) 1 ms 0 to 100 P S For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0 68 69 CMX2 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse. Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution. 1 0 1 to 65535 P 70 CMX3 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse. Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution. 1 0 1 to 65535 P 71 CMX4 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse. Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution. 1 0 1 to 65535 P r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed S 72 SC4 Internal speed command 4 Used to set speed 4 of internal speed commands. 5 - 23 200 5. PARAMETERS Expansion parameters 2 Class No. Symbol Name and function Initial value 73 SC5 Internal speed command 5 Used to set speed 5 of internal speed commands. 300 74 SC6 Internal speed command 6 Used to set speed 6 of internal speed commands. 500 75 SC7 Internal speed command 7 Used to set speed 7 of internal speed commands. 800 76 TL2 Internal torque limit 2 Set this parameter to limit servo motor torque on the assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%]. When 0 is set, torque is not produced. When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the maximum output voltage ( 8V). 100 77 78 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 79 00 10000 10 80 10 81 100 82 100 83 100 84 0000 5 - 24 Setting Control range mode S r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed 0 to inr/min S stantaneous permissible speed S r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed Unit % 0 to 100 P S 5. PARAMETERS 5.2 Detailed description 5.2.1 Electronic gear CAUTION Wrong setting can lead to unexpected fast rotation, causing injury. POINT 1 CMX 50. 50 CDV If the set value is outside this range, noise may be generated during acceleration/ deceleration or operation may not be performed at the preset speed and/or acceleration/deceleration time constants. The following specification symbols are required to calculate the electronic gear. The guideline of the electronic gear setting range is CMX CDV Input pulse train The machine can be moved at any multiplication factor to input pulses. Parameter No.3 Parameter No.4 Motor CMX CDV Deviation counter Feedback pulse Electronic gear Encoder The following setting examples are used to explain how to calculate the electronic gear: POINT The following specification symbols are required to calculate the electronic gear Pb : Ballscrew lead [mm] n : Reduction ratio Pt : Servo motor resolution [pulses/rev] 0: Travel per command pulse [mm/pulse] S : Travel per servo motor revolution [mm/rev] : Angle per pulse [ /pulse] : Angle per revolution [ /rev] (1) For motion in increments of 10 m per pulse n n NL/NM 1/2 NL Machine specifications Ballscrew lead Pb 10 [mm] Reduction ratio: n 1/2 Servo motor resolution: Pt 10000 [pulses/rev] CMX CDV 0 Pt S 0 Pt n Pb 10 10 3 10000 1/2 10 Hence, set 20 to CMX and 1 to CDV. 5 - 25 Pb 10[mm] NM Servo motor 10000 [pulse/rev] 20000 1000 20 1 5. PARAMETERS (2) Conveyor setting example For rotation in increments of 0.01 per pulse Servo motor 10000 [pulse/rev] Machine specifications Table Table : 360 /rev Reduction ratio: n 1/18 Servo motor resolution: Pt CMX CDV Pt 0.01 10000 [pulses/rev] 10000 1/18 360 100 20 Timing belt : 4/64 5 1 Hence, set 5 to CMX and 1 to CDV. 5.2.2 Analog monitor The servo status can be output to two channels in terms of voltage. Use this function when using an ammeter to monitor the servo status or synchronizing the torque/speed with the other servo. (1) Setting Change the following digits of parameter No.17: Parameter No. 17 0 0 Analog monitor 1 (MO1) output selection (Signal output to across MO1-LG) Analog monitor 2 (MO2) output selection (Signal output to across MO2-LG) Parameters No.31 and 32 can be used to set the offset voltages to the analog output voltages. The setting range is between 999 and 999mV. Parameter No. Description 31 Used to set the offset voltage for the analog monitor 1 (MO1) output. 32 Used to set the offset voltage for the analog monitor 2 (MO2) output. 5 - 26 Setting range [mV] 999 to 999 5. PARAMETERS (2) Set content The servo amplifier is factory-set to output the servo motor speed to Analog monitor 1 (MO1) and the torque to Analog monitor 2 (MO2). The setting can be changed as listed below by changing the parameter No.17 value: Refer to Appendix 2 for the measurement point. Setting 0 Output item Servo motor speed Description Setting 6 CCW direction 8[V] Output item Droop pulses ( 10V/128pulse) Description 10[V] CCW direction 128[pulse] Max. speed 0 0 Max. speed 8[V] 1 Torque 8[V] Driving in CCW direction 7 Droop pulses ( 10V/2048pulse) 10[V] 0 2048[pulse] 0 Max. torque 2 CCW direction 2048[pulse] Max. torque Driving in CW direction 10[V] CW direction CW direction 128[pulse] 8[V] Servo motor speed 8 CW direction 8[V] 10[V] CW direction CCW direction Droop pulses ( 10V/8192pulse) 10[V] CCW direction 8192[pulse] 0 8192[pulse] Max. speed 0 Max. speed 10[V] CW direction 3 Torque 9 Driving in CW direction 8[V] Driving in CCW direction Droop pulses ( 10V/32768pulse) 10[V] CCW direction 32768[pulse] 0 32768[pulse] Max. torque 0 Max. torque 10[V] CW direction 4 Current command 8[V] A CCW direction Droop pulses ( 10V/131072pulse) Max. command current 10[V] 131072[pulse] 0 0 Max. command current 8[V] CW direction CW direction 5 Command pulse frequency CCW direction B CCW direction 10[V] 131072[pulse] 10[V] Bus voltage 8[V] 500kpps 0 500kpps 0 10[V] CW direction 5 - 27 400[V] Command pulse Command pulse frequency Droop pulse Position control Speed command 5 - 28 Servo motor speed Differential Speed control Current command Torque Current control Encoder M Servo Motor Position feedback Current feedback PWM Current encoder Bus voltage 5. PARAMETERS (3) Analog monitor block diagram 5. PARAMETERS 5.2.3 Using forward/reverse rotation stroke end to change the stopping pattern The stopping pattern is factory-set to make a sudden stop when the forward/reverse rotation stroke end is made valid. A slow stop can be made by changing the parameter No. 22 value. Parameter No.22 Setting 0 (initial value) Stopping method Sudden stop Position control mode : Motor stops with droop pulses cleared. Internal speed control mode : Motor stops at deceleration time constant of zero. Slow stop Position control mode : The motor is decelerated to a stop in accordance 1 with the parameter No. 7 value. Internal speed control mode : The motor is decelerated to a stop in accordance with the parameter No. 12 value. 5.2.4 Alarm history clear The servo amplifier stores one current alarm and five past alarms from when its power is switched on first. To control alarms which will occur during operation, clear the alarm history using parameter No.16 before starting operation. Clearing the alarm history automatically returns to " 0 ". After setting, this parameter is made valid by switch power from OFF to ON. Parameter No.16 Alarm history clear 0: Invalid (not cleared) 1: Valid (cleared) 5 - 29 5. PARAMETERS 5.2.5 Position smoothing By setting the position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No.7), you can run the servo motor smoothly in response to a sudden position command. The following diagrams show the operation patterns of the servo motor in response to a position command when you have set the position command acceleration/deceleration time constant. Choose the primary delay or linear acceleration/deceleration in parameter No. 55 according to the machine used. (1) For step input Command : Input position command t t : Position command after filtering for primary delay : Position command after filtering for linear acceleration/deceleration : Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant (parameter No. 7) t Time (3t) (2) For trapezoidal input (3t) t : Input position command Command : Position command after filtering for linear acceleration/deceleration : Position command after filtering for primary delay t t (3t) 5 - 30 Time : Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant (parameter No. 7) 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.1 Display flowchart Use the display (5-digit, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the servo amplifier for status display, parameter setting, etc. Set the parameters before operation, diagnose an alarm, confirm external sequences, and/or confirm the operation status. Press the "MODE" "UP" or "DOWN" button once to move to the next screen. To refer to or set the expansion parameters, make them valid with parameter No. 19 (parameter write disable). button MODE Status display Diagnosis Alarm Basic parameters Expansion parameters 1 Expansion parameters 2 (Note) Cumulative feedback pulses [pulse] Sequence Current alarm Parameter No. 0 Parameter No. 20 Parameter No. 50 Motor speed [r/min] External I/O signal display Last alarm Parameter No. 1 Parameter No. 21 Parameter No. 51 Droop pulses [pulse] Output (DO) signal forced output Second alarm in past Cumulative command pulses [pulse] Test operation Jog feed Third alarm in past Command pulse frequency [kpps] Test operation mode Positioning operation Fourth alarm in past Parameter No. 18 Parameter No. 48 Parameter No. 83 Test operation mode Motor-less operation Fifth alarm in past Parameter No. 19 Parameter No. 49 Parameter No. 84 Test operation mode Machine analyzer operation Sixth alarm in past Regenerative load ratio [%] Software version low Parameter error No. Effective load ratio [%] Software version high Peak load ratio [%] Manufacturer setting screen Instantaneous torque [%] Motor series ID Within one-revolution position low [pulse] Motor type ID Within one-revolution position, high [100 pulses] Encoder ID UP DOWN Load inertia moment ratio [times] Bus voltage [V] Note: The initial status display at power-on depends on the control mode. Position control mode: Cumulative feedback pulses(C), Internal speed control mode: Servo motor speed(r) Also, parameter No. 18 can be used to change the initial indication of the status display at power-on. 6- 1 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.2 Status display The servo status during operation is shown on the 5-digit, 7-segment LED display. Press the "UP" or "DOWN" button to change display data as desired. When the required data is selected, the corresponding symbol appears. Press the "SET" button to display its data. At only power-on, however, data appears after the symbol of the status display selected in parameter No. 18 has been shown for 2. The servo amplifier display shows the lower five digits of 16 data items such as the servo motor speed. 6.2.1 Display examples The following table lists display examples: Item Displayed data Status Servo amplifier display Forward rotation at 3000r/min Servo motor speed Reverse rotation at 3000r/min Reverse rotation is indicated by " ". Load inertia moment 15.5 times 11252pulse Multirevolution counter 12566pulse Lit Negative value is indicated by the lit decimal points in the upper four digits. 6- 2 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.2.2 Status display list The following table lists the servo statuses that may be shown: Name Symbol Unit Description Cumulative feedback pulses C pulse Servo motor speed r r/min Feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder are counted and displayed. The value in excess of 99999 is counted, bus since the servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of the actual value. Press the "SET" button to reset the display value to zero. Reverse rotation is indicated by the lit decimal points in the upper four digits. The servo motor speed is displayed. The value rounded off is displayed in 0.1r/min. Droop pulses E pulse Cumulative command pulses P pulse Command pulse frequency n kpps Regenerative load ratio L % Effective load ratio J % Peak load ratio b % Instantaneous torque T % Cy1 pulse Within one-revolution position low The number of droop pulses in the deviation counter is displayed. When the servo motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the decimal points in the upper four digits are lit. Since the servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of the actual value. The number of pulses displayed is not yet multiplied by the electronic gear. The position command input pulses are counted and displayed. As the value displayed is not yet multiplied by the electronic gear (CMX/CDV), it may not match the indication of the cumulative feedback pulses. The value in excess of 99999 is counted, but since the servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of the actual value. Press the "SET" button to reset the display value to zero. When the servo motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the decimal points in the upper four digits are lit. The frequency of the position command input pulses is displayed. The value displayed is not multiplied by the electronic gear (CMX/CDV). The ratio of regenerative power to permissible regenerative power is displayed in %. The continuous effective load torque is displayed. The effective value in the past 15 seconds is displayed relative to the rated torque of 100%. The maximum torque generated during acceleration/deceleration, etc. The highest value in the past 15 seconds is displayed relative to the rated torque of 100%. Torque that occurred instantaneously is displayed. The value of the torque that occurred is displayed in real time relative to the rate torque of 100%. Position within one revolution is displayed in encoder pulses. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of pulses. The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation. 6- 3 Display range 99999 to 99999 5400 to 5400 99999 to 99999 99999 to 99999 800 to 800 0 to 100 0 to 300 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 99999 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION Display range Name Symbol Unit Description Within one-revolution position high Cy2 100 pulse The within one-revolution position is displayed in 100 pulse increments of the encoder. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of pulses. The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation. 0 to 1310 Load inertia moment ratio dC 0.1 Times The estimated ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment is displayed. 0.0 to 300.0 Bus voltage Pn V The voltage (across P-N) of the main circuit converter is displayed. 0 to 450 6.2.3 Changing the status display screen The status display item of the servo amplifier display shown at power-on can be changed by changing the parameter No. 18 settings. The item displayed in the initial status changes with the control mode as follows: Control mode Status display at power-on Position Cumulative feedback pulses Position/ internal speed Cumulative feedback pulses/servo motor speed Internal speed Servo motor speed 6- 4 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.3 Diagnostic mode Name Display Description Not ready. Indicates that the servo amplifier is being initialized or an alarm has occurred. Sequence Ready. Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion of initialization and the servo amplifier is ready to operate. External I/O signal display Indicates the ON-OFF states of the external I/O signals. The upper segments correspond to the input signals and the lower segments to the output signals. Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The I/O signals can be changed using parameters No. 43 to 49. Output signal (DO) forced output The digital output signal can be forced on/off. For more information, refer to section 6.7. Refer to section 6.6. Jog feed Positioning operation Test operation mode Motorless operation Machine analyzer operation Jog operation can be performed when there is no command from the external command device. For details, refer to section 6.8.2. The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP154E) is required for positioning operation. This operation cannot be performed from the operation section of the servo amplifier. Positioning operation can be performed once when there is no command from the external command device. Without connection of the servo motor, the servo amplifier provides output signals and displays the status as if the servo motor is running actually in response to the external input signal. For details, refer to section 6.8.4. Merely connecting the servo amplifier allows the resonance point of the mechanical system to be measured. The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP154E or later) is required for machine analyzer operation. Software version low Indicates the version of the software. Software version high Indicates the system number of the software. Manufacturer setting screen Screen for manufacturer setting. When this screen is being displayed, do not press any other buttons than "UP" and "DOWN" button. Motor series Press the "SET" button to show the motor series ID of the servo motor currently connected. Motor type Press the "SET" button to show the motor type ID of the servo motor currently connected. Encoder Press the "SET" button to show the encoder ID of the servo motor currently connected. 6- 5 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.4 Alarm mode The current alarm, past alarm history and parameter error are displayed. The lower 2 digits on the display indicate the alarm number that has occurred or the parameter number in error. Display examples are shown below. Name Display Description Indicates no occurrence of an alarm. Current alarm Indicates the occurrence of overvoltage (AL.33). Flickers at occurrence of the alarm. Indicates that the last alarm is overload 1 (AL.50). Indicates that the second alarm in the past is overvoltage (AL.33). Indicates that the third alarm in the past is undervoltage (AL.10). Alarm history Indicates that the fourth alarm in the past is overspeed (AL.31). Indicates that there is no fifth alarm in the past. Indicates that there is no sixth alarm in the past. Indicates no occurrence of parameter error (AL.37). Parameter error No. Indicates that the data of parameter No. 1 is faulty. Functions at occurrence of an alarm (1) Any mode screen displays the current alarm. (2) Even during alarm occurrence, the other screen can be viewed by pressing the button in the operation section. At this time, the decimal point in the fourth digit flickers. (3) For any alarm, remove its cause and clear it in any of the following methods (for clearable alarms, refer to Section 10.2.1): (a) Switch power OFF, then ON. (b) Press the "SET" button on the current alarm screen. (c) Turn on the alarm reset (RES). (4) Use parameter No. 16 to clear the alarm history. (5) Pressing "SET" button on the alarm history display screen for 2s or longer shows the following detailed information display screen. Note that this is provided for maintenance by the manufacturer. (6) Press the "UP" or "DOWN" button to display the next alarm in the history. 6- 6 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.5 Parameter mode The parameters whose abbreviations are marked* are made valid by changing the setting and then switching power off once and switching it on again. Refer to Section 5.1.2. (1) Operation example The following example shows the operation procedure performed after power-on to change the control mode (parameter No. 0) to the Internal speed control mode. Using the "MODE" button, show the basic parameter screen. The parameter number is displayed. Press UP or DOWN to change the number. Press SET twice. The set value of the specified parameter number flickers. Press UP once. During flickering, the set value can be changed. Use ( or . UP DOWN 2: Internal speed control mode) Press SET to enter. / To shift to the next parameter, press the UP DOWN button. When changing the parameter No. 0 setting, change its set value, then switch power off once and switch it on again to make the new value valid. (2) Expansion parameters To use the expansion parameters, change the setting of parameter No. 19 (parameter write disable). Refer to section 5.1.1. 6- 7 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.6 External I/O signal display The ON/OFF states of the digital I/O signals connected to the servo amplifier can be confirmed. (1) Operation Call the display screen shown after power-on. Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen. Press UP once. External I/O signal display screen (2) Display definition CN1 8 CN1 CN1 7 6 CN1 CN1 5 3 CN1 4 Input signals Always lit Output signals CN1 21 CN1 9 CN1 CN1 10 12 CN1 11 Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The 7-segment LED shown above indicates ON/OFF. Each segment at top indicates the input signal and each segment at bottom indicates the output signal. The signals corresponding to the pins in the respective control modes are indicated below: CN1 Pin No. Input/Output (Note 1) I/O 3 (Note 2) Signal abbreviation Related parameter No. P S I RES ST1 43 to 47 4 I SON SON 43 to 47 5 I CR ST2 43 to 47 6 I LSP LSP 43 to 48 7 I LSN LSN 43 to 48 8 I EMG EMG 9 O ALM ALM 49 10 O INP SA 49 11 O RD RD 49 12 O ZSP ZSP 49 21 O OP OP Note: 1. I: Input signal, O: Output signal 2. P: Position control mode, S: Internal speed control mode 3. The signal of CN1A-18 is always output. 6- 8 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (3) Default signal indications (a) Position control mode EMG (CN 1-8) Emergency stop LSN (CN 1-7) Reverse rotation stroke end LSP (CN 1-6) Forward rotation stroke end CR (CN 1-5) Clear RES (CN 1-3) Reset SON (CN 1-4) Servo-on Input signals Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF Output signals RD (CN 1-11) Ready INP (CN 1-10) In position ZSP (CN 1-12) Zero speed ALM (CN 1-9) Trouble OP (CN 1-21) Encoder Z-phase pulse (b) Internal speed control mode EMG (CN 1-8) Emergency stop LSN (CN 1-7) Reverse rotation stroke end LSP (CN 1-6) Forward rotation stroke end ST2 (CN 1-5) Reverse rotation start ST1 (CN 1-3) Forward rotation start SON (CN 1-4) Servo-on Input signals Output signals Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF RD (CN 1-11) Ready SA (CN 1-10) Limiting speed ZSP (CN 1-12) Zero speed ALM (CN 1-9) Trouble OP (CN 1-21) Encoder Z-phase pulse 6- 9 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.7 Output signal (DO) forced output POINT When the servo system is used in a vertical lift application, turning on the electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) after assigning it to pin CN1-12 will release the electromagnetic brake, causing a drop. Take drop preventive measures on the machine side. The output signal can be forced on/off independently of the servo status. This function is used for output signal wiring check, etc. This operation must be performed in the servo off state. Operation Call the display screen shown after power-on. Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen. Press UP twice. Press SET for more than 2 seconds. CN1 12 CN1 9 CN1 12 CN1 10 CN1 11 Switch on/off the signal below the lit segment. Always lit Indicates the ON/OFF of the output signal. The correspondences between segments and signals are as in the output signals of the external I/O signal display. (Lit: ON, extinguished: OFF) Press MODE once. The segment above CN1-pin 10 is lit. Press UP once. CN1-pin 10 is switched on. (CN1-pin 10-SG conduct.) Press DOWN once. CN1-pin 10 is switched off. Press SET for more than seconds. 6 - 10 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.8 Test operation mode CAUTION The test operation mode is designed to confirm servo operation and not to confirm machine operation. In this mode, do not use the servo motor with the machine. Always use the servo motor alone. If any operational fault has occurred, stop operation using the emergency stop (EMG) signal. POINT The servo configuration software is required to perform positioning operation. Test operation cannot be performed if the servo-on (SON) is not turned OFF. 6.8.1 Mode change Call the display screen shown after power-on. Choose jog operation/motor-less operation in the following procedure. Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen. Press UP three times. Press UP five times. Press SET for more than 2s. When this screen appears, jog feed can be performed. Flickers in the test operation mode. Press SET for more than 2s. 6 - 11 When this screen is displayed, motor-less operation can be performed. 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.8.2 Jog operation Jog operation can be performed when there is no command from the external command device. (1) Operation Connect EMG-SG to start jog operation to use the internal power supply. Hold down the "UP" or "DOWN" button to run the servo motor. Release it to stop. When using the servo configuration software, you can change the operation conditions. The initial conditions and setting ranges for operation are listed below: Item Initial setting Setting range Speed [r/min] 200 0 to instantaneous permissible speed Acceleration/deceleration time constant [ms] 1000 0 to 50000 How to use the buttons is explained below: Button "UP" "DOWN" Description Press to start CCW rotation. Release to stop. Press to start CW rotation. Release to stop. If the communication cable is disconnected during jog operation performed by using the servo configuration software, the servo motor will be decelerated to a stop. (2) Status display You can confirm the servo status during jog operation. Pressing the "MODE" button in the jog operation-ready status calls the status display screen. With this screen being shown, perform jog operation with the "UP" or "DOWN" button. Every time you press the "MODE" button, the next status display screen appears, and on completion of a screen cycle, pressing that button returns to the jog operation-ready status screen. For full information of the status display, refer to Section 6.2. In the test operation mode, you cannot use the "UP" and "DOWN" buttons to change the status display screen from one to another. (3) Termination of jog operation To end the jog operation, switch power off once or press the "MODE" button to switch to the next screen and then hold down the "SET" button for 2 or more seconds. 6 - 12 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.8.3 Positioning operation POINT The servo configuration software is required to perform positioning operation. Positioning operation can be performed once when there is no command from the external command device. (1) Operation Connect EMG-SG to start positioning operation to use the internal power supply. Click the "Forward" or "Reverse" button on the servo configuration software starts the servo motor, which will then stop after moving the preset travel distance. You can change the operation conditions on the servo configuration software. The initial conditions and setting ranges for operation are listed below: Item Initial setting Travel distance [pulse] Setting range 10000 0 to 9999999 Speed [r/min] 200 0 to instantaneous permissible speed Acceleration/deceleration time constant [ms] 1000 0 to 50000 How to use the buttons is explained below: Button Description "Forward" Click to start positioning operation CCW. "Reverse" Click to start positioning operation CW. "Pause" Click during operation to make a temporary stop. Pressing the "Pause" button again erases the remaining distance. To resume operation, click the button that was clicked to start the operation. If the communication cable is disconnected during positioning operation, the servo motor will come to a sudden stop. (2) Status display You can monitor the status display even during positioning operation. 6 - 13 6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION 6.8.4 Motor-less operation Without connecting the servo motor, you can provide output signals or monitor the status display as if the servo motor is running in response to external input signals. This operation can be used to check the sequence of a host programmable controller or the like. (1) Operation After turning off the signal across SON-SG, choose motor-less operation. After that, perform external operation as in ordinary operation. (2) Status display You can confirm the servo status during motor-less operation. Pressing the "MODE" button in the motor-less operation-ready status calls the status display screen. With this screen being shown, perform motor-less operation. Every time you press the "MODE" button, the next status display screen appears, and on completion of a screen cycle, pressing that button returns to the motor-less operation-ready status screen. For full information of the status display, refer to Section 6.2. In the test operation mode, you cannot use the "UP" and "DOWN" buttons to change the status display screen from one to another. (3) Termination of motor-less operation To terminate the motor-less operation, switch power off. 6 - 14 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.1 Different adjustment methods 7.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier The gain adjustment in this section can be made on a single servo amplifier. For gain adjustment, first execute auto tuning mode 1. If you are not satisfied with the results, execute auto tuning mode 2, manual mode 1 and manual mode 2 in this order. (1) Gain adjustment mode explanation Gain adjustment mode Parameter No. 2 setting Estimation of load inertia moment ratio Automatically set parameters Manually set parameters Auto tuning mode 1 (initial value) 010 Always estimated PG1 (parameter No. 6) GD2 (parameter No. 34) PG2 (parameter No. 35) VG1 (parameter No. 36) VG2 (parameter No. 37) VIC (parameter No. 38) Response level setting of parameter No. 2 Auto tuning mode 2 020 Fixed to parameter No. PG1 (parameter No. 6) 34 value PG2 (parameter No. 35) VG1 (parameter No. 36) VG2 (parameter No. 37) VIC (parameter No. 38) GD2 (parameter No. 34) Response level setting of parameter No. 2 Manual mode 1 030 PG2 (parameter No. 35) VG1 (parameter No. 36) Manual mode 2 040 Interpolation mode 000 PG1 (parameter No. 6) GD2 (parameter No. 34) VG2 (parameter No. 37) VIC (parameter No. 38) PG1 (parameter No. 6) GD2 (parameter No. 34) PG2 (parameter No. 35) VG1 (parameter No. 36) VG2 (parameter No. 37) VIC (parameter No. 38) Always estimated 7- 1 GD2 (parameter No. 34) PG2 (parameter No. 35) VG2 (parameter No. 37) VIC (parameter No. 38) PG1 (parameter No. 6) VG1 (parameter No. 36) 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (2) Adjustment sequence and mode usage START Usage Interpolation made for 2 or more axes? Yes Interpolation mode No Operation Allows adjustment by merely changing the response level setting. First use this mode to make adjustment. Auto tuning mode 1 Operation Yes No OK? No Operation OK? Used when the conditions of auto tuning mode 1 are not met and the load inertia moment ratio could not be estimated properly, for example. This mode permits adjustment easily with three gains if you were not satisfied with auto tuning results. No Manual mode 1 Operation Yes OK? Yes Auto tuning mode 2 Yes Used when you want to match the position gain (PG1) between 2 or more axes. Normally not used for other purposes. OK? You can adjust all gains manually when you want to do fast settling or the like. No Manual mode 2 END 7.1.2 Adjustment using servo configuration software This section gives the functions and adjustment that may be performed by using the servo amplifier with the servo configuration software which operates on a personal computer. Function Description Adjustment Machine analyzer With the machine and servo motor coupled, the characteristic of the mechanical system can be measured by giving a random vibration command from the personal computer to the servo and measuring the machine response. Gain search Executing gain search under to-and-fro positioning command measures settling characteristic while simultaneously changing gains, and automatically searches for gains which make settling time shortest. Response at positioning settling of a machine can be simulated from machine analyzer results on personal computer. Machine simulation 7- 2 You can grasp the machine resonance frequency and determine the notch frequency of the machine resonance suppression filter. You can automatically set the optimum gains in response to the machine characteristic. This simple adjustment is suitable for a machine which has large machine resonance and does not require much settling time. You can automatically set gains which make positioning settling time shortest. You can optimize gain adjustment and command pattern on personal computer. 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.2 Auto tuning 7.2.1 Auto tuning mode The servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function which estimates the machine characteristic (load inertia moment ratio) in real time and automatically sets the optimum gains according to that value. This function permits ease of gain adjustment of the servo amplifier. (1) Auto tuning mode 1 The servo amplifier is factory-set to the auto tuning mode 1. In this mode, the load inertia moment ratio of a machine is always estimated to set the optimum gains automatically. The following parameters are automatically adjusted in the auto tuning mode 1. Parameter No. Abbreviation 6 PG1 Name 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 35 PG2 Position control gain 2 36 VG1 Speed control gain 1 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 38 VIC Speed integral compensation Position control gain 1 POINT The auto tuning mode 1 may not be performed properly if the following conditions are not satisfied. Time to reach 2000r/min is the acceleration/deceleration time constant of 5s or less. Speed is 150r/min or higher. The ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment is not more than 100 times. The acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or more of the rated torque. Under operating conditions which will impose sudden disturbance torque during acceleration/deceleration or on a machine which is extremely loose, auto tuning may not function properly, either. In such cases, use the auto tuning mode 2 or manual mode 1,2 to make gain adjustment. (2) Auto tuning mode 2 Use the auto tuning mode 2 when proper gain adjustment cannot be made by auto tuning mode 1. Since the load inertia moment ratio is not estimated in this mode, set the value of a correct load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34). The following parameters are automatically adjusted in the auto tuning mode 2. Parameter No. Abbreviation 6 PG1 Name Position control gain 1 35 PG2 Position control gain 2 36 VG1 Speed control gain 1 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 38 VIC Speed integral compensation 7- 3 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation The block diagram of real-time auto tuning is shown below. Load inertia moment Automatic setting Command Encoder Control gains PG1,VG1 PG2,VG2,VIC Current control Servo motor Current feedback Set 0 or 1 to turn on. Gain table Switch Load inertia moment ratio estimation section Position/speed feedback Speed feedback Parameter No. 34 Load inertia moment ratio estimation value Parameter No. 2 Gain adjustment mode selection Real-time auto tuning section First digit Response level setting When a servo motor is accelerated/decelerated, the load inertia moment ratio estimation section always estimates the load inertia moment ratio from the current and speed of the servo motor. The results of estimation are written to parameter No. 34 (the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor). These results can be confirmed on the status display screen of the servo configuration software section. If the value of the load inertia moment ratio is already known or if estimation cannot be made properly, chose the "auto tuning mode 2" (parameter No.2: 2 ) to stop the estimation of the load inertia moment ratio (Switch in above diagram turned off), and set the load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34) manually. From the preset load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34) value and response level (The first digit of parameter No. 2), the optimum control gains are automatically set on the basis of the internal gain tale. The auto tuning results are saved in the EEP-ROM of the servo amplifier every 60 minutes since poweron. At power-on, auto tuning is performed with the value of each control gain saved in the EEP-ROM being used as an initial value. POINT If sudden disturbance torque is imposed during operation, the estimation of the inertia moment ratio may malfunction temporarily. In such a case, choose the "auto tuning mode 2" (parameter No. 2: 2 ) and set the correct load inertia moment ratio in parameter No. 34. When any of the auto tuning mode 1, auto tuning mode 2 and manual mode 1 settings is changed to the manual mode 2 setting, the current control gains and load inertia moment ratio estimation value are saved in the EEP-ROM. 7- 4 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning Since auto tuning is made valid before shipment from the factory, simply running the servo motor automatically sets the optimum gains that match the machine. Merely changing the response level setting value as required completes the adjustment. The adjustment procedure is as follows. Auto tuning adjustment Acceleration/deceleration repeated Yes Load inertia moment ratio estimation value stable? No Auto tuning conditions not satisfied. (Estimation of load inertia moment ratio is difficult) No Yes Choose the auto tuning mode 2 (parameter No.2 : 020 ) and set the load inertia moment ratio (parameter No.34) manually. Adjust response level setting so that desired response is achieved on vibration-free level. Acceleration/deceleration repeated Requested performance satisfied? No Yes END To manual mode 7- 5 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode Set the response (The first digit of parameter No.2) of the whole servo system. As the response level setting is increased, the trackability and settling time for a command decreases, but a too high response level will generate vibration. Hence, make setting until desired response is obtained within the vibrationfree range. If the response level setting cannot be increased up to the desired response because of machine resonance beyond 100Hz, adaptive vibration suppression control (parameter No. 60) or machine resonance suppression filter (parameter No. 58 59) may be used to suppress machine resonance. Suppressing machine resonance may allow the response level setting to increase. Refer to Section 8.2, 8.3 for adaptive vibration suppression control and machine resonance suppression filter. Parameter No. 2 Response level setting Gain adjustment mode selection Machine characteristic Response level setting 1 Machine rigidity Machine resonance frequency guideline Low 15Hz 2 20Hz 3 25Hz 4 30Hz 5 35Hz 6 45Hz 7 55Hz 8 Middle 85Hz A 105Hz B 130Hz C 160Hz D 200Hz E 240Hz High Large conveyor Arm robot General machine tool conveyor 70Hz 9 F Guideline of corresponding machine 300Hz 7- 6 Precision working machine Inserter Mounter Bonder 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment) If you are not satisfied with the adjustment of auto tuning, you can make simple manual adjustment with three parameters. 7.3.1 Operation of manual mode 1 In this mode, setting the three gains of position control gain 1 (PG1), speed control gain 2 (VG2) and speed integral compensation (VIC) automatically sets the other gains to the optimum values according to these gains. User setting PG1 VG2 VIC GD2 Automatic setting PG2 VG1 Therefore, you can adjust the model adaptive control system in the same image as the general PI control system (position gain, speed gain, speed integral time constant). Here, the position gain corresponds to PG1, the speed gain to VG2 and the speed integral time constant to VIC. When making gain adjustment in this mode, set the load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34) correctly. 7.3.2 Adjustment by manual mode 1 POINT If machine resonance occurs, adaptive vibration suppression control (parameter No. 60) or machine resonance suppression filter (parameter No. 58 59) may be used to suppress machine resonance. (Refer to Section 8.2, 8.3.) (1) For speed control (a) Parameters The following parameters are used for gain adjustment: Parameter No. Abbreviation 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Name 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 38 VIC Speed integral compensation (b) Adjustment procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Operation Description Set an estimated value to the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment (parameter No. 34). Increase the speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37) within the vibration- and unusual noise-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place. Decrease the speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38) within the vibration-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place. If the gains cannot be increased due to mechanical system resonance or the like and the desired response cannot be achieved, response may be increased by suppressing resonance with adaptive vibration suppression control or machine resonance suppression filter and then executing steps 2 and 3. While checking the settling characteristic and rotational status, fineadjust each gain. 7- 7 Increase the speed control gain. Decrease the time constant of the speed integral compensation. Suppression of machine resonance. Refer to Section 8.2, 8.3. Fine adjustment 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c)Adjustment description 1) Speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop response frequency(Hz) Speed control gain 2 setting (1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment) 2 2) Speed integral compensation (VIC: parameter No. 38) To eliminate stationary deviation against a command, the speed control loop is under proportional integral control. For the speed integral compensation, set the time constant of this integral control. Increasing the setting lowers the response level. However, if the load inertia moment ratio is large or the mechanical system has any vibratory element, the mechanical system is liable to vibrate unless the setting is increased to some degree. The guideline is as indicated in the following expression: Speed integral compensation setting(ms) 2000 to 3000 Speed control gain 2 setting/ (1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment setting 0.1) (2) For position control (a) Parameters The following parameters are used for gain adjustment: Parameter No. Abbreviation 6 PG1 Position control gain 1 Name 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 38 VIC Speed integral compensation (b) Adjustment procedure Step Operation 1 Set an estimated value to the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment (parameter No. 34). Description 2 Set a slightly smaller value to the position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6). 3 Increase the speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37) within the Increase the speed control gain. vibration- and unusual noise-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place. 4 Decrease the speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38) within Decrease the time constant of the speed the vibration-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place. integral compensation. 5 Increase the position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6). 6 If the gains cannot be increased due to mechanical system resonance or Suppression of machine resonance. the like and the desired response cannot be achieved, response may be Refer to Section 8.2, 8.3. increased by suppressing resonance with adaptive vibration suppression control or machine resonance suppression filter and then executing steps 3 to 5. 7 While checking the settling characteristic and rotational status, fine- Fine adjustment adjust each gain. 7- 8 Increase the position control gain. 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT (c) Adjustment description 1) Position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6) This parameter determines the response level of the position control loop. Increasing position control gain 1 improves trackability to a position command but a too high value will make overshooting liable to occur at the time of settling. Position control gain 1 guideline Speed control gain 2 setting (1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment) ( 13 to 15 ) 2) Speed control gain 2 (VG2: parameter No. 37) This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression: Speed loop response frequency(Hz) Speed control gain 2 setting (1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment) 2 3) Speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38) To eliminate stationary deviation against a command, the speed control loop is under proportional integral control. For the speed integral compensation, set the time constant of this integral control. Increasing the setting lowers the response level. However, if the load inertia moment ratio is large or the mechanical system has any vibratory element, the mechanical system is liable to vibrate unless the setting is increased to some degree. The guideline is as indicated in the following expression: Speed integral compensation setting(ms) 2000 to 3000 Speed control gain 2 setting/ (1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 setting 7- 9 0.1) 7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT 7.4 Interpolation mode The interpolation mode is used to match the position control gains of the axes when performing the interpolation operation of servo motors of two or more axes for an X-Y table or the like. In this mode, the position control gain 2 and speed control gain 2 which determine command trackability are set manually and the other parameter for gain adjustment are set automatically. (1) Parameter (a) Automatically adjusted parameters The following parameters are automatically adjusted by auto tuning. Parameter No. Abbreviation 34 35 37 38 GD2 PG2 VG2 VIC Name Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Position control gain 2 Speed control gain 2 Speed integral compensation (b) Manually adjusted parameters The following parameters are adjustable manually. Parameter No. Abbreviation 6 36 PG1 VG1 Name Position control gain 1 Speed control gain 1 (2) Adjustment procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Operation Description Set 15Hz (parameter No. 2: 010 ) as the machine resonance frequency of response in the auto tuning mode 1. During operation, increase the response level setting (parameter No. 2), and return the setting if vibration occurs. Check the values of position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6) and speed control gain 1 (parameter No. 36). Set the interpolation mode (parameter No. 2: 000 ). Using the position control gain 1 value checked in step 3 as the guideline of the upper limit, set in PG1 the value identical to the position loop gain of the axis to be interpolated. Using the speed control gain 1 value checked in step 3 as the guideline of the upper limit, look at the rotation status and set in speed control gain 1 the value three or more times greater than the position control gain 1 setting. Looking at the interpolation characteristic and rotation status, fine-adjust the gains and response level setting. Select the auto tuning mode 1. Adjustment in auto tuning mode 1. Check the upper setting limits. Select the interpolation mode. Set position control gain 1. Set speed control gain 1. Fine adjustment. (3) Adjustment description (a) Position control gain 1 (parameter No.6) This parameter determines the response level of the position control loop. Increasing position control gain 1 improves trackability to a position command but a too high value will make overshooting liable to occur at the time of settling. The droop pulse value is determined by the following expression. Rotation speed (r/min) 131,072(pulse) 60 Droop pulse value (pulse) Position control gain 1 setting (b) Speed control gain 1 (parameter No. 36) Set the response level of the speed loop of the model. Make setting using the following expression as a guideline. Speed control gain 1 setting Position control gain 1 setting 3 7 - 10 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT The functions given in this chapter need not be used generally. Use them if you are not satisfied with the machine status after making adjustment in the methods in Chapter 7. If a mechanical system has a natural resonance level point, increasing the servo system response may cause the mechanical system to produce resonance (vibration or unusual noise) at that resonance frequency. Using the machine resonance suppression filter and adaptive vibration suppression control functions can suppress the resonance of the mechanical system. 8.1 Function block diagram Speed control 00 Parameter No.58 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 Parameter No.60 Parameter No.59 00 0 except Parameter Current No.60 command Machine resonance suppression filter 2 00 Low-pass filter 0 Servo motor 1 except Encoder 00 Adaptive vibration suppression control 1 or 2 8.2 Machine resonance suppression filter (1) Function The machine resonance suppression filter is a filter function (notch filter) which decreases the gain of the specific frequency to suppress the resonance of the mechanical system. You can set the gain decreasing frequency (notch frequency) and gain decreasing depth. Mechanical system response level Machine resonance point Frequency Notch depth Notch frequency 8- 1 Frequency 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS You can use the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) and machine resonance suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59) to suppress the vibration of two resonance frequencies. Note that if adaptive vibration suppression control is made valid, the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) is made invalid. Machine resonance point Mechanical system response level Frequency Notch depth Frequency Parameter No. 58 Parameter No. 59 POINT The machine resonance suppression filter is a delay factor for the servo system. Hence, vibration may increase if you set a wrong resonance frequency or a too deep notch. (2) Parameters (a) Machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) Set the notch frequency and notch depth of the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) When you have made adaptive vibration suppression control selection (parameter No. 60) "valid" or "held", make the machine resonance suppression filter 1 invalid (parameter No. 58: 0000). Parameter No. 58 Notch frequency Setting Setting Setting Frequency Frequency Frequency value value value Setting Frequency value 00 Invalid 08 562.5 10 281.3 18 01 4500 09 500 11 264.7 19 180 02 2250 0A 450 12 250 1A 173.1 03 1500 0B 409.1 13 236.8 1B 166.7 04 1125 0C 375 14 225 1C 160.1 05 900 0D 346.2 15 214.3 1D 155.2 06 750 0E 321.4 16 204.5 1E 150 07 642.9 0F 300 17 195.7 1F 145.2 Notch depth Setting value Depth (Gain) 0 1 2 3 Deep ( 40dB) ( 14dB) ( 8dB) Shallow( 4dB) 8- 2 187.5 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS POINT If the frequency of machine resonance is unknown, decrease the notch frequency from higher to lower ones in order. The optimum notch frequency is set at the point where vibration is minimal. A deeper notch has a higher effect on machine resonance suppression but increases a phase delay and may increase vibration. The machine characteristic can be grasped beforehand by the machine analyzer on the servo configuration software. This allows the required notch frequency and depth to be determined. Resonance may occur if parameter No. 58 59 is used to select a close notch frequency and set a deep notch. (b) Machine resonance suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59) The setting method of machine resonance suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59) is the same as that of machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58). However, the machine resonance suppression filter 2 can be set independently of whether adaptive vibration suppression control is valid or invalid. 8.3 Adaptive vibration suppression control (1) Function Adaptive vibration suppression control is a function in which the servo amplifier detects machine resonance and sets the filter characteristics automatically to suppress mechanical system vibration. Since the filter characteristics (frequency, depth) are set automatically, you need not be conscious of the resonance frequency of a mechanical system. Also, while adaptive vibration suppression control is valid, the servo amplifier always detects machine resonance, and if the resonance frequency changes, it changes the filter characteristics in response to that frequency. Machine resonance point Mechanical system response level Mechanical system response Frequency level Notch depth Notch depth Machine resonance point Frequency Frequency Frequency Notch frequency Notch frequency When machine resonance is large and frequency is low When machine resonance is small and frequency is high POINT The machine resonance frequency which adaptive vibration suppression control can respond to is about 150 to 500Hz. Adaptive vibration suppression control has no effect on the resonance frequency outside this range. Use the machine resonance suppression filter for the machine resonance of such frequency. Adaptive vibration suppression control may provide no effect on a mechanical system which has complex resonance characteristics or which has too large resonance. Under operating conditions in which sudden disturbance torque is imposed during operation, the detection of the resonance frequency may malfunction temporarily, causing machine vibration. In such a case, set adaptive vibration suppression control to be "held" (parameter No. 60: 2 ) to fix the characteristics of the adaptive vibration suppression control filter. 8- 3 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) Parameters The operation of adaptive vibration suppression control selection (parameter No.60). Parameter No. 60 Adaptive vibration suppression control selection Choosing "valid" or "held" in adaptive vibration suppression control selection makes the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) invalid. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Machine resonance frequency is always detected to generate the filter in response to resonance, suppressing machine vibration. 2: Held Filter characteristics generated so far is held, and detection of machine resonance is stopped. Adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity selection Set the sensitivity of detecting machine resonance. 0: Normal 1: Large sensitivity POINT Adaptive vibration suppression control is factory-set to be invalid (parameter No. 60: 0000). Setting the adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity can change the sensitivity of detecting machine resonance. Setting of "large sensitivity" detects smaller machine resonance and generates a filter to suppress machine vibration. However, since a phase delay will also increase, the response of the servo system may not increase. 8.4 Low-pass filter (1) Function When a ballscrew or the like is used, resonance of high frequency may occur as the response level of the servo system is increased. To prevent this, the low-pass filter is factory-set to be valid for a torque command. The filter frequency of this low-pass filter is automatically adjusted to the value in the following expression: Filter frequency(Hz) 2 Speed control gain 2 setting 10 (1 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment setting 0.1) (2) Parameter Set the operation of the low-pass filter (parameter No. 60.) Parameter No. 60 Low-pass filter selection 0: Valid (automatic adjustment) 1: Invalid initial value POINT In a mechanical system where rigidity is extremely high and resonance level is difficult to occur, setting the low-pass filter to be "invalid" may increase the servo system response level to shorten the settling time. 8- 4 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 8.5 Gain changing function This function can change the gains. You can change between gains during rotation and gains during stop or can use an external input signal to change gains during operation. 8.5.1 Applications This function is used when: (1) You want to increase the gains during servo lock but decrease the gains to reduce noise during rotation. (2) You want to increase the gains during settling to shorten the stop settling time. (3) You want to change the gains using an external input signal to ensure stability of the servo system since the load inertia moment ratio varies greatly during a stop (e.g. a large load is mounted on a carrier). 8.5.2 Function block diagram The valid control gains PG2, VG2, VIC and GD2 of the actual loop are changed according to the conditions selected by gain changing selection CDP (parameter No. 65) and gain changing condition CDS (parameter No. 66). CDP Parameter No.65 External input signal CDP Command pulse frequency Droop pulses Changing Model speed CDS Parameter No.66 Comparator GD2 Parameter No.34 GD2B Parameter No.61 Valid GD2 value PG2 Parameter No.35 PG2 PG2B 100 Valid PG2 value VG2 Parameter No.37 VG2 VG2B 100 Valid VG2 value VIC Parameter No.38 VIC VICB 100 8- 5 Valid VIC value 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 8.5.3 Parameters When using the gain changing function, always set " 4 " in parameter No.2 (auto tuning) to choose the manual mode of the gain adjustment modes. The gain changing function cannot be used in the auto tuning mode. Parameter Abbrevi No. ation Name Unit Description Position and speed gains of a model used to set the response level to a command. Always valid. 6 PG1 Position control gain 1 rad/s 36 VG1 Speed control gain 1 rad/s 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 0.1 times 35 PG2 Position control gain 2 rad/s 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 rad/s 38 VIC Speed integral compensation Control parameters before changing ms 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 62 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio % Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing position control gain 2 to position control gain 2. 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio % Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing speed control gain 2 to speed control gain 2. 64 VICB Speed integral changing ratio % Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing speed integral compensation to speed integral compensation. 65 CDP Gain changing selection compensation 66 CDS Gain changing condition 67 CDT Gain changing time constant 0.1 times Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment after changing. Used to select the changing condition. kpps pulse r/min ms Used to set the changing condition values. You can set the filter time constant for a gain change at changing. 8- 6 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (1) Parameters No. 6, 34 to 38 These parameters are the same as in ordinary manual adjustment. Gain changing allows the values of ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment, position control gain 2, speed control gain 2 and speed integral compensation to be changed. (2) Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 (GD2B: parameter No. 61) Set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment after changing. If the load inertia moment ratio does not change, set it to the same value as ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment (parameter No. 34). (3) Position control gain 2 changing ratio (parameter No. 62), speed control gain 2 changing ratio (parameter No. 63), speed integral compensation changing ratio (parameter No. 64) Set the values of after-changing position control gain 2, speed control gain 2 and speed integral compensation in ratio (%). 100% setting means no gain change. For example, at the setting of position control gain 2 100, speed control gain 2 2000, speed integral compensation 20 and position control gain 2 changing ratio 180%, speed control gain 2 changing ratio 150% and speed integral compensation changing ratio 80%, the after-changing values are as follows: Position control gain 2 Position control gain 2 Position control gain 2 changing ratio /100 180rad/s Speed control gain 2 Speed control gain 2 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio /100 3000rad/s Speed integral compensation Speed integral compensation Speed integral compensation changing ratio /100 16ms (4) Gain changing selection (parameter No. 65) Used to set the gain changing condition. Choose the changing condition in the first digit. If you set "1" here, you can use the gain changing (CDP) external input signal for gain changing. The gain changing (CDP) can be assigned to the pins using parameters No. 43 to 48. Parameter No. 65 Gain changing selection Gains are changed in accordance with the settings of parameters No. 61 to 64 under any of the following conditions: 0: Invalid 1: Gain changing (CDP) input is ON 2: Command frequency is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 3: Droop pulse value is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 4: Servo motor speed is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting (5) Gain changing condition (parameter No. 66) When you selected "command frequency", "droop pulses" or "servo motor speed" in gain changing selection (parameter No.65), set the gain changing level. The setting unit is as follows: Gain changing condition Unit Command frequency kpps Droop pulses pulse Servo motor speed r/min (6) Gain changing time constant (parameter No. 67) You can set the primary delay filter to each gain at gain changing. This parameter is used to suppress shock given to the machine if the gain difference is large at gain changing, for example. 8- 7 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS 8.5.4 Gain changing operation This operation will be described by way of setting examples. (1) When you choose changing by external input (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Name Setting Unit 6 PG1 Position control gain 1 100 rad/s 36 VG1 Speed control gain 1 1000 rad/s 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 4 0.1 times 35 PG2 Position control gain 2 120 rad/s 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 3000 rad/s 38 VIC Speed integral compensation 20 ms 100 0.1 times 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 62 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio 70 % 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio 133 % 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio 250 % 65 CDP Gain changing selection 67 CDT Gain changing time constant 0001 (Changed by ON/OFF of pin CN1-10) 100 (b) Changing operation OFF Gain changing (CDP) Change of each gain ON After-changing gain Before-changing gain CDT 100ms Position control gain 1 100 Speed control gain 1 1000 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment OFF 4.0 10.0 4.0 Position control gain 2 120 84 120 Speed control gain 2 3000 4000 3000 20 50 20 Speed integral compensation 8- 8 ms 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS (2) When you choose changing by droop pulses (a) Setting Parameter No. Abbreviation Setting Unit 6 PG1 Position control gain 1 Name 100 rad/s 36 VG1 Speed control gain 1 1000 rad/s 34 GD2 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 40 0.1 times 35 PG2 Position control gain 2 120 rad/s 37 VG2 Speed control gain 2 3000 rad/s 38 VIC Speed integral compensation 20 ms 100 0.1 times 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 62 PG2B Position control gain 2 changing ratio 70 % 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio 133 % 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio 250 % 65 CDP Gain changing selection 0003 (Changed by droop pulses) 66 CDS Gain changing condition 50 pulse 67 CDT Gain changing time constant 100 ms (b) Changing operation Command pulse Droop pulses [pulses] 0 Droop pulses CDS CDS After-changing gain Change of each gain Before-changing gain CDT 100ms Position control gain 1 100 Speed control gain 1 1000 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 4.0 10.0 4.0 10.0 Position control gain 2 120 84 120 84 Speed control gain 2 3000 4000 3000 4000 20 50 20 50 Speed integral compensation 8- 9 8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS MEMO 8 - 10 9. INSPECTION 9. INSPECTION WARNING Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, make sure that the charge lamp is off more than 10 minutes after power-off. Then, confirm that the voltage is safe in the tester or the like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. Any person who is involved in inspection should be fully competent to do the work. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. For repair and parts replacement, contact your safes representative. POINT Do not test the servo amplifier with a megger (measure insulation resistance), or it may become faulty. Do not disassemble and/or repair the equipment on customer side. (1) Inspection It is recommended to make the following checks periodically: (a) Check for loose terminal block screws. Retighten any loose screws. (b) Check the cables and the like for scratches and cracks. Perform periodic inspection according to operating conditions. (c) Check the servo motor bearings, brake section, etc. for unusual noise. (d) Check the cables and the like for scratches and cracks. Perform periodic inspection according to operating conditions. (e) Check the servo motor shaft and coupling for misalignment. (2) Life The following parts must be changed periodically as listed below. If any part is found faulty, it must be changed immediately even when it has not yet reached the end of its life, which depends on the operating method and environmental conditions. For parts replacement, please contact your sales representative. Part name Life guideline Smoothing capacitor Relay 10 years Number of power-on and number of emergency stop times : 100,000 times Bearings 20,000 to 30,000 hours Encoder 20,000 to 30,000 hours Oil seal 5,000 hours (a) Smoothing capacitor Affected by ripple currents, etc. and deteriorates in characteristic. The life of the capacitor greatly depends on ambient temperature and operating conditions. The capacitor will reach the end of its life in 10 years of continuous operation in normal air-conditioned environment. (b) Relays Their contacts will wear due to switching currents and contact faults occur. Relays reach the end of their life when the cumulative number of power-on and emergency stop times is 100,000, which depends on the power supply capacity. 9- 1 9. INSPECTION (c) Servo amplifier cooling fan The cooling fan bearings reach the end of their life in 10,000 to 30,000 hours. Normally, therefore, the fan must be changed in a few years of continuous operation as a guideline. It must also be changed if unusual noise or vibration is found during inspection. (d) Bearings When the servo motor is run at rated speed under rated load, change the bearings in 20,000 to 30,000 hours as a guideline. This differs on the operating conditions. The bearings must also be changed if unusual noise or vibration is found during inspection. (e) Oil seal, V ring Must be changed in 5,000 hours of operation at rated speed as a guideline. This differs on the operating conditions. These parts must also be changed if oil leakage, etc. is found during inspection. 9- 2 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.1 Trouble at start-up CAUTION Excessive adjustment or change of parameter setting must not be made as it will make operation instable. POINT Using the optional servo configuration software, you can refer to unrotated servo motor reasons, etc. The following faults may occur at start-up. If any of such faults occurs, take the corresponding action. 10.1.1 Position control mode (1) Troubleshooting No. 1 2 3 Start-up sequence Power on (Note) Fault LED is not lit. LED flickers. Investigation Possible cause Not improved if connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3 are disconnected. 1. Power supply voltage fault 2. Servo amplifier is faulty. Improved when connectors CN1 is disconnected. Power supply of CNP1 cabling is shorted. Improved when connector CN2 is disconnected. 1. Power supply of encoder cabling is shorted. 2. Encoder is faulty. Improved when connector CN3 is disconnected. Power supply of CN3 cabling is shorted. Refer to Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Switch on servo-on signal. Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Servo motor shaft is 1. Check the display to see if 1. Servo-on signal is not input. (Wiring mistake) the servo amplifier is not servo-locked 2. 24VDC power is not ready to operate. (is free). supplied to COM. 2. Check the external I/O signal indication to see if the servo-on (SON) signal is ON. Section 6.6 Enter input command. (Test operation) Servo motor does not rotate. Check cumulative command 1. Wiring mistake pulses. (a) For open collector pulse train input, 24VDC power is not supplied to OPC. (b) LSP/LSN-SG are not connected. 2. No pulses is input. 1. Mistake in wiring to controller. 2. Mistake in setting of parameter No. 54. Servo motor run in reverse direction. 10 - 1 Section 6.2 Chapter 5 10. TROUBLESHOOTING No. 4 Start-up sequence Gain adjustment Fault Investigation Possible cause Make gain adjustment in the Gain adjustment fault following procedure: 1. Increase the auto tuning response level. 2. Repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Chapter 7 Large load inertia moment causes the servo motor shaft to oscillate side to side. Gain adjustment fault If the servo motor may be run with safety, repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Chapter 7 Pulse counting error, etc. Confirm the cumulative command pulses, cumulative due to noise. feedback pulses and actual servo motor position. Note: Switch power on again after making sure that the charge lamp has turned off completely. 5 Cyclic operation Refer to Rotation ripples (speed fluctuations) are large at low speed. Position shift occurs 10 - 2 (2) in this section 10. TROUBLESHOOTING (2) How to find the cause of position shift Positioning unit Servo amplifier (a) Output pulse counter Electronic gear (parameters No. 3, 4) Machine Servo motor Q P (A) (C) Servo-on (SON), stroke end (LSP/LSN) input L CMX SM CDV (d) Machine stop position M (B) (b) Cumulative command pulses C Encoder (c) Cumulative feedback pulses When a position shift occurs, check (a) output pulse counter, (b) cumulative command pulse display, (c) cumulative feedback pulse display, and (d) machine stop position in the above diagram. (A), (B) and (C) indicate position shift causes. For example, (A) indicates that noise entered the wiring between positioning unit and servo amplifier, causing pulses to be mis-counted. In a normal status without position shift, there are the following relationships: 1) Q P (positioning unit's output counter servo amplifier's cumulative command pulses) CMX(parameter No.3) 2) P CDV(parameter No.4) C (cumulative command pulses electronic gear cumulative feedback pulses) M (cumulative feedback pulses travel per pulse machine position) 3) C Check for a position shift in the following sequence: 1) When Q P Noise entered the pulse train signal wiring between positioning unit and servo amplifier, causing pulses to be miss-counted. (Cause A) Make the following check or take the following measures: Check how the shielding is done. Change the open collector system to the differential line driver system. Run wiring away from the power circuit. Install a data line filter. CMX 2) When P C CDV During operation, the servo-on signal (SON) or forward/reverse rotation stroke end signal was switched off or the clear signal (CR) and the reset signal (RES) switched on. (Cause C) If a malfunction may occur due to much noise, increase the input filter setting (parameter No. 1). M 3) When C Mechanical slip occurred between the servo motor and machine. (Cause B) 10 - 3 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.1.2 Internal speed control mode No. 1 2 3 Start-up sequence Power on (Note) Fault LED is not lit. LED flickers. Investigation Possible cause Not improved if connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3 are disconnected. 1. Power supply voltage fault 2. Servo amplifier is faulty. Improved when connectors CN1 is disconnected. Power supply of CN1 cabling is shorted. Improved when connector CN2 is disconnected. 1. Power supply of encoder cabling is shorted. 2. Encoder is faulty. Improved when connector CN3 is disconnected. Power supply of CN3 cabling is shorted. Refer to Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Switch on servo-on signal. Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Servo motor shaft is not servo-locked (is free). 1. Check the display to see if 1. Servo-on signal is not input. (Wiring mistake) the servo amplifier is 2. 24VDC power is not ready to operate. supplied to COM. 2. Check the external I/O signal indication to see if the servo-on (SON) signal is ON. Section 6.6 Switch on forward rotation start (ST1) or reverse rotation start (ST2). Servo motor does not rotate. Call the external I/O signal display and check the ON/OFF status of the input signal. LSP, LSN, ST1 or ST2 is off. Section 6.6 Check the internal speed commands 1 to 7 (parameters No. 8 to 10 72 to 75). Set value is 0. (1), Section 5.1.2 Check the internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28). Torque limit level is too low as compared to the load torque. Make gain adjustment in the Gain adjustment fault following procedure: 1. Increase the auto tuning response level. 2. Repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Chapter 7 Gain adjustment fault If the servo motor may be run with safety, repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Note: Switch power on again after making sure that the charge lamp has turned off completely. Chapter 7 4 Gain adjustment Rotation ripples (speed fluctuations) are large at low speed. Large load inertia moment causes the servo motor shaft to oscillate side to side. 10 - 4 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.2 When alarm or warning has occurred POINT Configure up a circuit which will detect the trouble (ALM) signal and turn off the servo-on (SON) signal at occurrence of an alarm. 10.2.1 Alarms and warning list When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed. If any alarm or warning has occurred, refer to Section 10.2.2 or 10.2.3 and take the appropriate action. Set " 1" in parameter No. 49 to output the alarm code in ON/OFF status across the corresponding pin and SG. Warnings (AL.96 to AL.E9) have no alarm codes. Any alarm code is output at occurrence of the corresponding alarm. In the normal status, the signals available before alarm code setting (CN1-12: ZSP, CN1-11: RD, CN1-10: INP or SA) are output. After its cause has been removed, the alarm can be deactivated in any of the methods marked in the alarm deactivation column. (Note 2) Alarm code Display CN1-10 pin CN1-11 pin Name CN1-12 pin Alarm deactivation Press Alarm "SET" on reset Power current OFF ON (RES) alarm signal screen. Warnings Alarms AL.10 0 1 0 Undervoltage AL.12 0 0 0 Memory error 1 AL.13 0 0 0 Clock error AL.15 0 0 0 Memory error 2 AL.16 1 0 1 Encoder error 1 AL.17 0 0 0 Board error AL.19 0 0 0 Memory error 3 AL.1A 1 0 1 Motor combination error AL.20 1 1 0 Encoder error 2 AL.24 0 0 1 Main circuit error (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.30 0 1 0 Regenerative error AL.31 0 1 1 Overspeed AL.32 0 0 1 Overcurrent AL.33 0 1 0 Overvoltage AL.35 0 1 1 Command pulse frequency error AL.37 0 0 0 Parameter error AL.45 1 1 0 Main circuit device overheat AL.46 1 1 0 Servo motor overheat (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.50 1 1 0 Overload 1 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.51 1 1 0 Overload 2 AL.52 0 1 1 Error excessive AL.8A 0 0 0 Serial communication time-out error AL.8E 0 0 0 Serial communication error 88888 0 0 0 Watchdog AL.E0 Excessive regenerative warning Removing the cause of occurrence AL.E1 Overload warning deactivates the alarm AL.E6 Servo emergency stop warning automatically. AL.E9 Under voltage warning Note: 1. Deactivate the alarm about 30 minutes of cooling time after removing the cause of occurrence. 2. 0: off 1: on 10 - 5 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.2.2 Remedies for alarms CAUTION When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur. POINT When any of the following alarms has occurred, always remove its cause and allow about 30 minutes for cooling before resuming operation. If operation is resumed by switching power off, then on to reset the alarm, the servo amplifier and servo motor may become faulty. Regenerative error (AL.30) Overload 1 (AL.50) Overload 2 (AL.51) The alarm can be deactivated by switching power off, then on press the "SET" button on the current alarm screen or by turning on the reset signal (RES). For details, refer to Section 10.2.1. When an alarm occurs, the trouble signal (ALM) switches off and the dynamic brake is operated to stop the servomotor. At this time, the display indicates the alarm No. The servo motor comes to a stop. Remove the cause of the alarm in accordance with this section. The optional servo configuration software may be used to refer to the cause. Display AL.10 Name Undervoltage Definition Power supply voltage dropped to 160VAC or less. Cause 1. Power supply voltage is low. Action Review the power supply. 2. There was an instantaneous control power failure of 60ms or longer. 3. Shortage of power supply capacity caused the power supply voltage to drop at start, etc. 4. Power was restored after the bus voltage had dropped to 200VDC. AL.12 5. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the servo amplifier. Change the servo amplifier. Memory error 1 RAM, memory fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifier AL.13 Clock error AL.15 Memory error 2 EEP-ROM fault AL.16 Encoder error 1 Communication 1. Encoder connector (CN2) error occurred disconnected. between encoder 2. Encoder fault and servo amplifier. 3. Encoder cable faulty (Wire breakage or shorted) Change the servo motor. AL.17 Board error Change the servo amplifier. AL.19 Memory error 3 ROM memory fault Printed board fault CPU/parts fault 1. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the servo amplifier. 2. The number of write times to EEPROM exceeded 100,000. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier 10 - 6 Connect correctly. Repair or change cable. 10. TROUBLESHOOTING Display Name AL.1A Motor combination error AL.20 Encoder error 2 AL.24 AL.30 Main circuit error Regenerative alarm Definition Wrong combination of servo anplifier and servo motor. Communication error occurred between encoder and servo amplifier. Cause Action Wrong combination of servo Use correct combination. amplifier and servo motor connected. 1. Encoder connector (CN2) disconnected. Connect correctly. 2. Encoder fault 3. Encoder cable faulty (Wire breakage or shorted) Ground fault 1. Power input wires and servo motor occurred at the output wires are in contact at servo motor outputs main circuit terminal block (TE1). (U,V and W phases) 2. Sheathes of servo motor power of the servo cables deteriorated, resulting in amplififer. ground fault. 3. Main circuit of servo amplifier failed. Checking method AL.24 occurs if the servo is switched on after disconnecting the U, V, W power cables from the servo amplifier. Change the servo motor. Repair or change the cable. Permissible regenerative power of the built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is exceeded. Set correctly. Connect correctly 1. Wrong setting of parameter No. 0 2. Built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is not connected. 3. High-duty operation or continuous regenerative operation caused the permissible regenerative power of the regenerative brake option to be exceeded. Connect correctly. Change the cable. Change the servo amplifier. 1. Reduce the frequency of positioning. 2. Use the regenerative brake option of larger capacity. 3. Reduce the load. Checking method Call the status display and check the regenerative load ratio. Regenerative transistor fault 4. Power supply voltage is abnormal. Review power supply MR-E- A:260V or more Change servo amplifier or regenerative 5. Built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake brake option. option faulty. Change the servo amplifier. 6. Regenerative transistor faulty. Checking method 1) The regenerative brake option has overheated abnormally. 2) The alarm occurs even after removal of the built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option. 10 - 7 10. TROUBLESHOOTING Display AL.31 Name Overspeed Definition Cause Speed has exceeded 1. Input command pulse frequency the instantaneous exceeded the permissible permissible speed. instantaneous speed frequency. Action Set command pulses correctly. Increase acceleration/deceleration time 2. Small acceleration/deceleration time constant caused overshoot to constant. be large. AL.32 AL.33 AL.35 Overcurrent Overvoltage 3. Servo system is instable to cause overshoot. 1. Re-set servo gain to proper value. 2. If servo gain cannot be set to proper value: 1) Reduce load inertia moment ratio; or 2) Reexamine acceleration/ deceleration time constant. 4. Electronic gear ratio is large (parameters No. 3, 4) Set correctly. 5. Encoder faulty. Change the servo motor. Current that flew is 1. Short occurred in servo amplifier higher than the output phases U, V and W. permissible current 2. Transistor (IPM) of the servo of the servo amplifier faulty. amplifier. Checking method Alarm (AL.32) occurs if power is switched on after U,V and W are disconnected. Converter bus voltage exceeded 400VDC. Input pulse Command pulse frequency frequency of the command pulse is error too high. Correct the wiring. Change the servo amplifier. 3. Ground fault occurred in servo amplifier output phases U, V and W. Correct the wiring. 4. External noise caused the overcurrent detection circuit to misoperate. Take noise suppression measures. 1. Lead of built-in regenerative brake 1. Change lead. 2. Connect correctly. resistor or regenerative brake option is open or disconnected. 2. Regenerative transistor faulty. Change servo amplifier 3. Wire breakage of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option 1. For wire breakage of built-in regenerative brake resistor, change servo amplifier. 2. For wire breakage of regenerative brake option, change regenerative brake option. 4. Capacity of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option is insufficient. Add regenerative brake option or increase capacity. 5. Power supply voltage high. Review the power supply. 1. Pulse frequency of the command pulse is too high. Change the command pulse frequency to a proper value. 2. Noise entered command pulses. Take action against noise. 3. Command device failure Change the command device. 10 - 8 10. TROUBLESHOOTING Display AL.37 Name Parameter error Definition Cause Action Parameter setting is 1. Servo amplifier fault caused the Change the servo amplifier. wrong. parameter setting to be rewritten. 2. Regenerative brake option or servo Set parameter No.0 correctly. motor not used with servo amplifier was selected in parameter No.0. 3. The number of write times to EEP- Change the servo amplifier. ROM exceeded 100,000 due to parameter write, etc. AL.45 AL.46 AL.50 Main circuit Main circuit device device overheat overheat Servo motor overheat Overload 1 Servo motor temperature rise actuated the thermal protector. Load exceeded overload protection characteristic of servo amplifier. 1. Servo amplifier faulty. Change the servo amplifier. The drive method is reviewed. 2. The power supply was turned on and off continuously by overloaded status. 3. Air cooling fan of servo amplifier stops. 1. Exchange the cooling fan or the servo amplifier. 2. Reduce ambient temperature. 1. Ambient temperature of servo motor is over 40 (104 ). Review environment so that ambient temperature is 0 to 40 (104 ). 2. Servo motor is overloaded. 1. Reduce load. 2. Review operation pattern. 3. Use servo motor that provides larger output. 3. Thermal protector in encoder is faulty. Change servo motor. 1. Servo amplifier is used in excess of its continuous output current. 1. Reduce load. 2. Review operation pattern. 3. Use servo motor that provides larger output. 2. Servo system is instable and hunting. 1. Repeat acceleration/ deceleration to execute auto tuning. 2. Change auto tuning response setting. 3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain adjustment manually. 3. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern. 2. Install limit switches. 4. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly. Servo amplifier's output terminals U, V, W do not match servo motor's input terminals U, V, W. 5. Encoder faulty. Checking method When the servo motor shaft is rotated with the servo off, the cumulative feedback pulses do not vary in proportion to the rotary angle of the shaft but the indication skips or returns midway. 10 - 9 Change the servo motor. 10. TROUBLESHOOTING Display AL.51 Name Overload 2 Definition Cause Machine collision or 1. Machine struck something. the like caused max. output current to 2. Wrong connection of servo motor. flow successively for Servo amplifier's output terminals several seconds. U, V, W do not match servo Servo motor locked: motor's input terminals U, V, W. 1s or more 3. Servo system is instable and During rotation: hunting. 2.5s or more 4. Encoder faulty. Action 1. Review operation pattern. 2. Install limit switches. Connect correctly. 1. Repeat acceleration/deceleration to execute auto tuning. 2. Change auto tuning response setting. 3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain adjustment manually. Change the servo motor. Checking method When the servo motor shaft is rotated with the servo off, the cumulative feedback pulses do not vary in proportion to the rotary angle of the shaft but the indication skips or returns midway. AL.52 Error excessive The droop pulse value of the deviation counter exceeded 2.5 rotations. 1. Acceleration/deceleration time constant is too small. Increase the acceleration/deceleration time constant. 2. Torque limit value (parameter No.28) is too small. Increase the torque limit value. 3. Motor cannot be started due to torque shortage caused by power supply voltage drop. 1. Review the power supply capacity. 2. Use servo motor which provides larger output. 4. Position control gain 1 (parameter Increase set value and adjust to ensure No.6) value is small. proper operation. 5. Servo motor shaft was rotated by external force. 1. When torque is limited, increase the limit value. 2. Reduce load. 3. Use servo motor that provides larger output. 6. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation pattern. 2. Install limit switches. 7. Encoder faulty Change the servo motor. 8. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly. Servo amplifier's output terminals U, V, W do not match servo motor's input terminals U, V, W. AL.8A AL.8E 88888 RS-232C or RS-422 Serial communication communication time-out error stopped for longer than the time set in parameter No.56. Serial Serial communication communication error occurred error between servo amplifier and communication device (e.g. personal computer). 1. Communication cable breakage. Repair or change communication cable 2. Communication cycle longer than parameter No. 56 setting. Set correct value in parameter. 3. Wrong protocol. Correct protocol. 1. Communication cable fault (Open cable or short circuit) Repair or change the cable. 2. Communication device (e.g. personal computer) faulty Change the communication device (e.g. personal computer). Watchdog Fault of parts in servo amplifier Change servo amplifier. CPU, parts faulty 10 - 10 10. TROUBLESHOOTING 10.2.3 Remedies for warnings If AL.E6 occurs, the servo off status is established. If any other warning occurs, operation can be continued but an alarm may take place or proper operation may not be performed. Use the optional servo configuration software to refer to the cause of warning. Display Name Definition Cause Action Regenerative power increased to 85% or 1. Reduce frequency of more of permissible regenerative power of positioning. built-in regenerative brake resistor or 2. Change regenerative brake regenerative brake option. option for the one with larger Checking method capacity. Call the status display and check 3. Reduce load. regenerative load ratio. AL.E0 Excessive regenerative warning There is a possibility that regenerative power may exceed permissible regenerative power of built-in regenerative brake resistor or regenerative brake option. AL.E1 Overload warning There is a possibility that Load increased to 85% or more of overload Refer to AL.50, AL.51. alarm 1 or 2 occurrence level. overload alarm 1 or 2 may occur. Cause, checking method Refer to AL.50,51. AL.E6 Servo emergency EMG-SG are open. stop warning AL.E9 Under voltage warning External emergency stop was made valid. Ensure safety and deactivate (EMG-SG opened.) emergency stop. Review the power supply. This alarm occurs when the servo motor speed decreases to or below 50r/min with the bus voltage dropping. 10 - 11 10. TROUBLESHOOTING MEMO 10 - 12 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS 11.1 Servo amplifiers (1) MR-E-10A MR-E-20A [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) 6 (0.24) 156 (6.14) 168 (6.61) 135 (5.32) .24) 6( 0 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 6 (0.24) Weight: 0.7 [kg] (1.54 [lb]) PE terminals Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (169.9 [oz in]) 11 - 1 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (2) MR-E-40A [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) 135 (5.32) 6 (0.24) 168 (6.61) 156 (6.14) 4) 0.2 70 (2.76) 6( 70 (2.76) 22 (0.87) Weight: 1.1 [kg] (2.43 [lb]) PE terminals Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (169.9 [oz in]) 11 - 2 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (3) MR-E-70A MR-E-100A [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) 70 (2.76) 190 (7.48) 25 (0.98) 6 ( 0. 24 ) 6 (0.24) 156 (6.14) 159 (6.26) 168 (6.61) 70 (2.76) 42 22 (1.65) (0.87) Weight: 1.7 [kg] (3.75 [lb]) PE terminals Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] (169.9 [oz in]) 11 - 3 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (4) MR-E-200A [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) 195 (7.68) 6( 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 156 (6.14) 156 (6.14) 168 (6.61) 4) 0.2 40 (1.58) 78 (3.07) 6 (0.24) Weight: 2.0 [kg] (4.41 [lb]) PE terminal Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m] 11 - 4 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS 11.2 Connectors (1) Servo amplifier side <3M > (a) Soldered type Model Connector Shell kit [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) : 10126-3000VE : 10326-52F0-008 22.0 (0.87) 10.0(0.39) 12.0(0.47) 14.0 (0.55) 39.0 (1.54) 23.8 (0.94) Logo, etc. are indicated here. 33.3 (1.31) 12.7(0.50) (b) Threaded type 33.3 (1.31) 12.7 (0.50) 10.0 14.0 (0.55) 12.0 (0.47) 27.4 (1.08) 5.7 (0.22) 39.0 (1.54) 23.8 (0.94) 22.0 (0.87) [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) (0.39) Model Connector : 10126-3000VE Shell kit : 10326-52A0-008 Note. This is not available as option and should be user-prepared. 11 - 5 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (2) CN2 Connector Connector housing Cover A Cover B Shell cover Shell body Cable clamp Screw : 54593-1011 : 54594-1015 : 54595-1005 : 58935-1000 : 58934-1000 : 58934-0000 : 58203-0010 40 (1.58) [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) 22.7 (0.89) 11 (0.43) 12.5 (0.49) (3) CN3 Connector (Marushin electric mfg) Connector: MP371/6 14.8 ( 0.58) 8.95 (0.35) 6 (0.24) 44.5 (1.75) 5 ( 0.20) 5 3 6 4 1 11 - 6 2 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (4) CNP1 CNP2 Connector (molex) (a) Insulation displacement type [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Connector Circuit number indication Variable Dimensions Number of [mm] ([in]) Poles A B Application 51240-0300 17.8 (0.70) 10 (0.39) 3 CNP2 (1kW or less) 51240-0600 32.8 (1.29) 25 (0.98) 6 CNP1 (1kW or less) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Crimping tool: 57349-5300 (molex) (A) (B) 5 (0.20) Pitch 8.5 (0.34) 11.4 0.5 (0.02) (0.45) 2.5 (0.10) 25 (0.98) 15.3 (0.60) [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Connector Circuit number indication Variable Dimensions Number of [mm] ([in]) Poles A B 51241-0300 22.8 (0.9) 15 (0.59) 3 CNP2 (2kW) 51241-0600 45.3 (1.78) 37.5 (1.48) 6 CNP1 (2kW) 1 2 3 4 5 Crimping tool: 57349-5300 (molex) A (B) 3.75 7.5 (0.3) (0.15) Pitch 11.4 0.5 (0.02) (0.45) 8.5 (0.34) 25 (0.98) 15.3 (0.60) 11 - 7 Application 6 11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS (b) Insertion type [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Connector Housing Variable Dimensions Number of [mm] ([in]) Poles A B Application 55757-0310 16.5 (0.65) 10 (0.39) 3 CNP2 (1kW or less) 55755-0610 31.5 (1.24) 25 (0.98) 6 CNP1 (1kW or less) Housing cover A (B) 26.5 (1.04) 8.5 (0.34) 1.5 (0.06) 18 (0.71) 14.3 (0.56) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) Pitch [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Connector Housing Housing cover A (B) 7.5 (0.3) Pitch 26.5 (1.04) 8.5 18 (0.71) (0.34) 1.5 (0.06) 14.3 (0.56) 5 7.5 (0.20)(0.3) 11 - 8 Variable Dimensions Number of [mm] ([in]) Poles A B Application 54927-0310 21.5 (0.85) 22.5 (0.89) 3 CNP2 (2kW) 54927-0610 44 (1.73) 37.5 (1.48) 6 CNP1 (2kW) 12. CHARACTERISTICS 12. CHARACTERISTICS 12.1 Overload protection characteristics An electronic thermal relay is built in the servo amplifier to protect the servo motor and servo amplifier from overloads. Overload 1 alarm (AL.50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection curve shown in any of Figs 12.1, Overload 2 alarm (AL.51) occurs if the maximum current flew continuously for several seconds due to machine collision, etc. Use the equipment on the left-hand side area of the continuous or broken line in the graph. In a machine like the one for vertical lift application where unbalanced torque will be produced, it is recommended to use the machine so that the unbalanced torque is 70% or less of the rated torque. 1000 1000 During rotation During rotation 100 Operation time[s] Operation time[s] 100 During servo lock 10 During servo lock 10 1 1 0.1 0.1 0 50 150 200 100 (Note) Load ratio [%] 250 300 a. MR-E-10A to MR-E-100A 0 50 150 200 100 (Note) Load ratio [%] 250 300 b. MR-E-200A Note: If the servo motor is stopped or low-speed (30r/min or less) operation is performed at an abnormally high duty with torque more than 100% of the rating being generated, the servo amplifier may fail even in a status where the electronic thermal relay protection is not activated. Fig 12.1 Electronic thermal relay protection characteristics 12.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss (1) Amount of heat generated by the servo amplifier Table 12.1 indicates servo amplifiers' power supply capacities and losses generated under rated load. For thermal design of an enclosure, use the values in Table 12.1 in consideration for the worst operating conditions. The actual amount of generated heat will be intermediate between values at rated torque and zero torque according to the duty used during operation. When the servo motor is run at less than the maximum speed, the power supply capacity will be smaller than the value in the table, but the servo amplifier's generated heat will not change. Table 12.1 Power supply capacity and generated heat per servo amplifier at rated output Servo amplifier Servo motor (Note 1) Power supply capacity[kVA] (Note 2) Servo amplifier-generated heat[W] At rated torque With servo off Area required for heat dissipation [m2] [ft2] MR-E-10A(1) HC-KFE13 0.3 25 15 0.5 5.4 MR-E-20A(1) HC-KFE23 0.5 25 15 0.5 5.4 MR-E-40A(1) HC-KFE43 0.9 35 15 0.7 7.5 MR-E-60A HC-SFE52 1.0 40 15 0.8 8.6 MR-E-70A HC-KFE73 1.3 50 15 1.0 10.8 MR-E-100A HC-SFE102 1.7 50 15 1.0 10.8 MR-E-200A HC-SFE202 3.5 90 20 1.8 19.4 Note:1. Note that the power supply capacity will vary according to the power supply impedance. This value assumes that the power factor improving reactor is not used. 2. Heat generated during regeneration is not included in the servo amplifier-generated heat. To calculate heat generated by the regenerative brake option, use Equation 13.1 in Section 13.1.1. 12 - 1 12. CHARACTERISTICS (2) Heat dissipation area for enclosed servo amplifier The enclosed control box (hereafter called the control box) which will contain the servo amplifier should be designed to ensure that its temperature rise is within 10 at the ambient temperature of 40 (104 ). (With a 5 (41 ) safety margin, the system should operate within a maximum 55 (131 ) limit.) The necessary enclosure heat dissipation area can be calculated by Equation 12.1: P ............................................................................................................................................. (12.1) K T where, A : Heat dissipation area [m2] P : Loss generated in the control box [W] T : Difference between internal and ambient temperatures [ ] K : Heat dissipation coefficient [5 to 6] A When calculating the heat dissipation area with Equation 12.1, assume that P is the sum of all losses generated in the enclosure. Refer to Table 12.1 for heat generated by the servo amplifier. "A" indicates the effective area for heat dissipation, but if the enclosure is directly installed on an insulated wall, that extra amount must be added to the enclosure's surface area. The required heat dissipation area will vary wit the conditions in the enclosure. If convection in the enclosure is poor and heat builds up, effective heat dissipation will not be possible. Therefore, arrangement of the equipment in the enclosure and the use of a fan should be considered. Table 12.1 lists the enclosure dissipation area for each servo amplifier when the servo amplifier is operated at the ambient temperature of 40 (104 ) under rated load. (Outside) (Inside) Air flow Fig. 12.2 Temperature distribution in enclosure When air flows along the outer wall of the enclosure, effective heat exchange will be possible, because the temperature slope inside and outside the enclosure will be steeper. 12 - 2 12. CHARACTERISTICS 12.3 Dynamic brake characteristics Fig. 12.3 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated. Use Equation 12.2 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds. (Refer to Fig. 12.4) Emergency stop(EMG) ON OFF Time constant V0 Machine speed Time te Fig. 12.3 Dynamic brake operation diagram Time constant [ms] te 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 23 [s] Lmax Vo JM JL JL V0 te 1 ....................................................................................................................... (12.2) 60 JM : Maximum coasting distance .................................................................................................[mm][in] : Machine rapid feedrate ......................................................................................... [mm/min][in/min] : Servo motor inertial moment................................................................................. [kg cm2][oz in2] : Load inertia moment converted into equivalent value on servo motor shaft..... [kg cm2][oz in2] : Brake time constant ........................................................................................................................ [s] : Delay time of control section........................................................................................................... [s] (There is internal relay delay time of about 30ms.) 0.045 0.04 0.035 0.03 Time constant Lmax 73 43 13 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Speed [r/min] 0.025 0.02 0.015 0.01 0.005 0 0 202 52 102 500 1000 1500 152 2000 Speed [r/min] a. HC-KFE series b. HC-SFE series Fig. 12.4 Dynamic brake time constant Use the dynamic brake at the load inertia moment indicated in the following table. If the load inertia moment is higher than this value, the built-in dynamic brake may burn. If there is a possibility that the load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi. Servo amplifier Load inertia moment ratio [times] MR-E-10A to MR-E-200A 30 12 - 3 12. CHARACTERISTICS 12.4 Encoder cable flexing life The flexing life of the cables is shown below. This graph calculated values. Since they are not guaranteed values, provide a little allowance for these values. 1 108 5 107 a 1 107 a : Long flexing-life encoder cable MR-EKCBL M-H MR-ESCBL M-H MR-ENCBL M-H 5 106 1 106 Flexing life [times] 5 105 1 105 5 104 1 104 5 103 1 103 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 Flexing radius [mm] 12 - 4 200 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT WARNING Before connecting any option or auxiliary equipment, make sure that the charge lamp is off more than 10 minutes after power-off, then confirm the voltage with a tester or the like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. CAUTION Use the specified auxiliary equipment and options. Unspecified ones may lead to a fault or fire. 13.1 Options 13.1.1 Regenerative brake options CAUTION The specified combinations of regenerative brake options and servo amplifiers may only be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur. (1) Combination and regenerative power The power values in the table are resistor-generated regenerative powers and not rated powers. Regenerative power[W] Servo amplifier Built-in regenerative MR-RB032 brake resistor [40 ] MR-RB12 [40 ] MR-E-10A 30 MR-E-20A 30 100 MR-RB32 [40 ] MR-E-40A 10 30 100 MR-E-70A 20 30 100 300 MR-E-100A 20 30 100 300 MR-E-200A 100 MR-RB30 [13 ] (Note) MR-RB50 [13 ] 300 500 Note: Always install a cooling fan. (2) Selection of the regenerative brake option (a) Simple selection method In horizontal motion applications, select the regenerative brake option as described below: When the servo motor is run without load in the regenerative mode from the running speed to a stop, the permissible duty is as indicated in Section 5.1 of the separately available Servo Motor Instruction Manual. For the servo motor with a load, the permissible duty changes according to the inertia moment of the load and can be calculated by the following formula: Permissible duty Permissible duty for servo motor with no load (value indication Section 5.1 in Servo Motor Instruction Manual) (m 1) ratedspeed running speed where m 2 [times/min] load inertia moment/servo motor inertia moment From the permissible duty, find whether the regenerative brake option is required or not. Permissible duty number of positioning times [times/min] Select the regenerative brake option out of the combinations in (1) in this section. 13 - 1 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Unbalance torque Servo motor speed (b) To make selection according to regenerative energy Use the following method when regeneration occurs continuously in vertical motion applications or when it is desired to make an in-depth selection of the regenerative brake option: a. Regenerative energy calculation Use the following table to calculate the regenerative energy. Friction torque TF Up t1 Tpsa1 t2 Tpsd1 t3 Tpsa2 t4 Tpsd2 1) ( ) TU Time Down Generated torque M tf(1 cycle) No (Driving) 2) 4) 8) 5) 6) 3) (Regenerative) 7) ( ) Formulas for calculating torque and energy in operation Torque applied to servo motor [N m] Regenerative power 1) T1 2) T2 3) T3 4), 8) T4 5) T5 6) T6 7) T7 (JL JM) N0 4 9.55 10 TU 1 TU Tpsa1 TF TF (JL JM) N0 9.55 104 TU (JL JM) N0 4 9.55 10 TU TF (JL JM) N0 4 9.55 10 Energy [J] E1 E2 1 TU Tpsd1 1 Tpsa2 E3 TF TU TF Tpsd2 TU TF N0 T1 Tpsa1 0.1047 N0 T2 t1 0.1047 N0 T3 Tpsd1 2 E4 0 (No regeneration) 0.1047 E5 N0 T5 Tpsa2 2 E6 1 0.1047 2 E7 0.1047 N0 T6 t3 0.1047 N0 T7 Tpsd2 2 From the calculation results in 1) to 8), find the absolute value (Es) of the sum total of negative energies. b. Losses of servo motor and servo amplifier in regenerative mode The following table lists the efficiencies and other data of the servo motor and servo amplifier in the regenerative mode. Servo amplifier MR-E-10A(1) MR-E-20A(1) MR-E-40A(1) MR-E-70A MR-E-100A MR-E-200A Inverse efficiency[%] 55 70 85 80 80 85 Capacitor charging[J] 9 9 11 18 18 40 Inverse efficiency ( ) :Efficiency including some efficiencies of the servo motor and servo amplifier when rated (regenerative) torque is generated at rated speed. Since the efficiency varies with the speed and torque, allow for about 10%. Capacitor charging (Ec) :Energy charged into the electrolytic capacitor in the servo amplifier. 13 - 2 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Subtract the capacitor charging from the result of multiplying the sum total of regenerative energies by the inverse efficiency to calculate the energy consumed by the regenerative brake option. ER [J] Es Ec Calculate the power consumption of the regenerative brake option on the basis of single-cycle operation period tf [s] to select the necessary regenerative brake option. PR [W] ER/tf ............................................................................................(13.1) (3) Connection of the regenerative brake option Set parameter No.2 according to the open to be used. Parameter No.0 Selection of regenerative 0: Not used. 2: MR-RB032 3: MR-RB12 4: MR-RB32 5: MR-RB30 6: MR-RB50 (4) Connection of the regenerative brake option The regenerative brake option will generate heat of about 100 . Fully examine heat dissipation, installation position, used cables, etc. before installing the option. For wiring, use flame-resistant cables and keep them clear of the regenerative brake option body. Always use twisted cables of max. 5m(16.4ft) length for connection with the servo amplifier. Always remove the wiring from across P-D and fit the regenerative brake option across P-C. The G3 and G4 terminals act as a thermal protector. G3-G4 are disconnected when the regenerative brake option overheats abnormally. Servo amplifier D Always remove the lead from across P-D. Regenerative brake option P P C C G3 (Note2) G4 5m (16.4 ft) max. Fan (Note 1) Note: 1. When using the MR-RB50, forcibly cool it with a cooling fan (1.0m3/min, 92 or so). 2. Make up a sequence which will switch off the magnetic contactor (MC) when abnormal heating occurs. G3-G4 contact specifications Maximum voltage: 120V AC/DC Maximum current: 0.5A/4.8VDC Maximum capacity: 2.4VA 13 - 3 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (5) Outline drawing (a) MR-RB032 MR-RB12 [Unit: mm (in)] LA TE1 Terminal block 5 (0.20) G3 G4 P C 6 (0.23) 12 (0.47) G3 G4 P C 6 (0.23) TE1 168 (6.61) 156 (6.14) MR-RB 144 (5.67) 12 (0.47) 6 (0.23) 6 (0.24) mounting hole LB Terminal screw: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m](4 to 5 [lb in]) 1.6 (0.06) 20 (0.79) LD LC Regenerative Regenerative Resistance brake option power[W] [ ] MR-RB032 30 40 MR-RB12 100 40 Variable dimensions LA LB LC LD 30 15 119 99 (1.18) (0.59) (4.69) (3.9) 40 15 169 149 (1.57) (0.59) (6.69) (5.87) (b) MR-RB32 MR-RB30 [Unit: mm (in)] 3.2(0.13) 318(12.52) Terminal block 125(4.92) 150(5.91) 79 (7.05) P C G3 G4 Terminal block 10 17 (0.39) (0.67) 7(0.28) 90 (3.54) 100(3.94) Regenerative brake option MR-RB32 MR-RB30 Regenerative Resistance Weight power[W] [ ] [kg] [lb] 300 40 2.9 6.4 300 13 2.9 6.4 13 - 4 Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10 [lb in]) Weight [kg] [lb] 0.5 1.1 1.1 2.4 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) MR-RB50 [Unit: mm (in)] 325(12.80) Terminal block 350(13.78) 7 14 slot 2.3(0.09) 200(7.87) Regenerative brake option MR-RB50 17(0.67) 12 (0.47) Regenerative Resistance power [W] [ ] 500 13 Terminal block 7(0.28) 116(4.57) 128(5.04) P C G3 G4 Terminal screw: M4 Tightening torque: 1.2 [N m](10 [lb in]) Weight [kg] [lb] 5.6 12.3 13 - 5 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.1.2 Cables and connectors (1) Cable make-up The following cables are used for connection with the servo motor and other models. Those indicated by broken lines in the figure are not options. Servo amplifier 9) Operation panel 13) Analog monitor Personal computer 14) Controller 12) 13) Analog monitor 20) 21) 24) 25) To U, V, W, 18) 19) Power supply HC-KFE 1) 2) 10) 11) 22) 23) 6) Regenerative brake option HC-SFE 15) 16) 17) 3) 4) 5) 7) 8) 13 - 6 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT No. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Product Model Standard encoder MR-EKCBL M-L cable Refer to (2) (a) in this section. Long flexing life MR-EKCBL M-H encoder cable Refer to (2) (b) in this section. Standard encoder MR-ESCBL M-L cable Refer to (2) (c) in this section. Long flexing life MR-ESCBL M-H encoder cable Refer to (2) (d) in this section. IP65-compliant MR-ENECBL M-H encoder cable Refer to (2) (d) in this section. Description (Note) (molex or equivalent) Housing: 1-172161-9 Connector pin: 170359-1 (AMP or equivalent) (Note) (molex or equivalent) Plug: MS3106B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A (Japan Aviation Electronics) (Note) (molex or equivalent) Plug: MS3106A20-29S (D190) Cable clamp : CE3057-12A-3 (D265) Back shell: CE02-20BS-S (DDK) Application Standard flexing life IP20 Long flexing life IP20 Standard flexing life IP20 Long flexing life IP20 Long flexing life IP65 IP67 Not oilresistant. 6) Encoder connector set MR-ECNM (Note) (molex or equivalent) Housing: 1-172161-9 Pin: 170359-1 Cable clamp: MTI-0002 (AMP or equivalent) IP20 7) Encoder connector set MR-ECNS (Note) (molex or equivalent) Plug: MS3106B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A (JAE) IP20 8) Encoder connector set MR-ENECNS (Note) (molex or equivalent) Plug: MS3106A20-29S (D190) Cable clamp : CE3057-12A-3 (D265) Back shell: CE02-20BS-S (DDK) IP65 IP67 9) Control signal connector set MR-ECN1 (In units of 20 pcs. /box) 10) Amplifier power MR-ECNP1-A supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. /box) set (Insulation displacement type) MR-E-10A to 100A 11) Amplifier power MR-ECNP1-B supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. /box) set (Insertion type) MR-E-10A to 100A Connector: 10126-3000VE Shell kit: 10326-52F0-008 (3M or equivalent) Connector: 51240-0600 (molex or equivalent) Connector: 54927-0610 (molex or equivalent) Terminal: 56125-0118 (molex or equivalent) Insulation displacement type Insertion type Note: The models of the soldering type are 54593-1011 (connector housing), 54594-1015 (cover A), 54595-1005 (cover B), 58935-1000 (shell cover), 58934-1000 (shell body), 58937-0000 (cable clamp) and 58203-0010 (screw). The models of the insulation displacement type are 51209-1001 (connector housing), 54594-1015 (cover A), 54595-1005 (cover B), 58935-1000 (shell cover), 58934-1000 (shell body), 59351-8187 (terminal), 58937-0000 (cable clamp) and 58203-0010 (screw). 13 - 7 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT No. Product Model Description Connector: MJ372/6 (Marushin Musen Denki or equivalent) Analog monitor RS-232C branch 12) cable MR-E3CBL15-P Analog monitor 13) RS-232C connector Communication cable MR-ECN3 (In units of 20 pcs. /box) Refer to (3) in this Connector: MP371/6 section. (Mini-DIN 6-pin male) QC30R2 (Marushin Musen Denki or equivalent) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) Motor power supply MR-PWCNS1 connector set Refer to Servo Motor Instruction Manual. Motor power MR-PWCNS2 supply connector Refer to Servo set Motor Instruction Manual. Brake connector MR-BKCN set Refer to Servo Motor Instruction Manual. Motor power MR-PWCNK1 supply connector set Motor power MR-PWCNK2 supply connector set MR-ECNP2-A Motor power supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. /box) (Insulation displacement type) MR-E-10A to 100A MR-ECNP2-B Motor power supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. (Insertion type) /box) MR-E-10A to 100A Amplifier power supply connector set 22) (Insulation displacement type) MR-E-200A Amplifier power supply connector 23) set (Insertion type) MR-E-200A Connector: MP371/6 Connector: MP371/6 (Marushin Musen Denki or equivalent) Connector: DE-9SF-N Case: DE-C1-J6-S6 (JAE) Plug: CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS Cable clamp: CE3057-12A-2 (D265) (DDK) Plug: CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS Cable clamp: CE3057-16A-2 (D265) (DDK) Plug: MS3106A10SL-4S (D190) (DDK) Cable connector: YS010-5-8 (Daiwa Dengyo) Plug: 5559-04P-210 Terminal: 5558PBT3L (for AWG16) (6 pcs.) (molex) Plug: 5559-06P-210 Terminal: 5558PBT3L (for AWG16) (8 pcs.) (molex) Connector: 51240-0300 Terminal: 56125-0118 (molex or equivalent) (molex or equivalent) Connector: 54927-0310 (molex or equivalent) MR-ECNP1-A1 Connector: 54241-0600 (In units of 20 pcs. (molex or equivalent) /box) Connector: 54241-0300 (molex or equivalent) MR-ECNP2-B1 Connector: 54928-0310 Motor power supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. (molex or equivalent) 25) (Insertion type) /box) MR-E-10A to 100A 13 - 8 Must be used for compliance with the EN Standard. IP65 IP67 EN Standardcompliant IP65 IP67 IP20 For motor with brake IP20 Insulation displacement type Insertion type Terminal: 56125-0118 (molex or equivalent) MR-ECNP1-B1 Connector: 54928-0610 (In units of 20 pcs. (molex or equivalent) /box) MR-ECNP2-A1 Motor power supply connector (In units of 20 pcs. /box) 24) (Insulation displacement type) MR-E-10A to 100A Application Analog monitor RS232C branch cable Analog monitor for RS-232C For connection with PC-AT compatible personal computer Insulation displacement type Insertion type Terminal: 56125-0118 (molex or equivalent) Insulation displacement type Insertion type 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Encoder cable If you have fabricated the encoder cable, connect it correctly. Otherwise, misoperation or explosion may occur. CAUTION POINT The encoder cable is not oil resistant. Refer to Section 12.4 for the flexing life of the encoder cable. When the encoder cable is used, the sum of the resistance values of the cable used for P5 and the cable used for LG should be within 2.4 . When soldering the wire to the connector pin, insulate and protect the connection portion using heat-shrinkable tubing. When using the encoder cable of four-wire type communication system, set "1 " in parameter No. 20 to select the four-wire type. Generally use the encoder cable available as our options. If the required length is not found in the options, fabricate the cable on the customer side. When fabricating an encoder cable, use the recommended wires given in Section 13.2.1 and the MRECNM connector set for encoder cable fabrication, and fabricate an encoder cable as shown in the wiring diagram. Refer to section 14.5 and choose the encode side connector according to the servo motor installation environment. (a) MR-EKCBL M-L (standard flex life model) These encoder cables are used with the HC-KFE series servo motors. 1) Model explanation Model: MR-EKCBL M-L Standard flex life Symbol Cable Length [m(ft)] Communication System 2 (6.56) 2 5 (16.4) 5 Two-wire type 10 (32.8) 10 20 (65.6) 20 (Note) Four-wire type 30 (98.4) 30 Note: Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. 2) Connection diagram For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1. Encoder cable supplied to servo motor Servo amplifier Encoder connector Encoder cable (option or fabricated) CN2 Servo motor Encoder 50m(164.0ft) max. Encoder connector 172161-9 (AMP) 1 MR 4 MD 7 P5E 30cm (0.98ft) 13 - 9 2 MRR 3 5 6 MDR CONT 8 9 P5G SHD 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Encoder cable of less than 30m When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNM connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to less than 30m. MR-EKCBL2M-L MR-EKCBL5M-L MR-EKCBL10M-L MR-EKCBL20M-L Servo amplifier side AWG23 Encoder side Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G MR MRR 3 4 1 2 MR MRR MR MRR 3 4 1 2 MR MRR 9 3 9 3 (Note) SD Plate (Note) 9 SD SHD Plate 9 SHD Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. Encoder cable of 30m or more POINT The communication system of the encoder cable in this wiring diagram is the four-wire type. Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNM connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to 50m. MR-EKCBL30M-L Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G MR MRR MD MDR 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 3 6 MR MRR MD MDR CONT 9 SHD (Note) SD Plate Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 10 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) MR-EKCBL M-H (long flex life model) Use this encoder cable with the HC-KFE series servo motor. 1) Model explanation Model: MR-EKCBL M-H Long flex life Symbol Cable Length [m(ft)] Communication System 2 (6.56) 2 5 (16.4) 5 Two-wire type 10 (32.8) 10 20 (65.6) 20 30 (98.4) 30 (Note) Four-wire type 40 (131.2) 40 50 (164.0) 50 Note: Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. 2) Connection diagram For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1. Encoder cable supplied to servo motor Servo amplifier Encoder connector Encoder cable (option or fabricated) CN2 Servo motor Encoder 50m(164.0ft) max. Encoder connector 172161-9 (AMP) 1 2 MR MRR 4 MD 7 P5E 30cm (0.98ft) 5 3 6 MDR CONT 8 9 P5G SHD Encoder cable of less than 30m When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNM connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to less than 30m. 13 - 11 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MR-EKCBL2M-H MR-EKCBL5M-H MR-EKCBL10M-H Servo amplifier side MR-EKCBL20M-H Encoder side Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G MR MRR 3 4 1 2 MR MRR MR MRR 3 4 1 2 MR MRR 9 3 9 3 (Note) SD Plate (Note) 9 SD SHD Plate 9 SHD Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. Encoder cable of 30m or more POINT The communication system of the encoder cable in this wiring diagram is the four-wire type. Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNM connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to 50m. MR-EKCBL30M-H MR-EKCBL40M-H MR-EKCBL50M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 7 8 P5E P5G MR MRR MD MDR 3 4 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 3 6 MR MRR MD MDR CONT 9 SHD (Note) SD Plate Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 12 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (c) MR-ESCBL M-L (standard flex life model) These encoder cables are used with the HC-SFE series servo motors. 1) Model explanation Model: MR-ESCBL M-L Standard flex life Symbol Cable Length [m(ft)] Communication System 2 (6.56) 2 5 (16.4) 5 Two-wire type 10 (32.8) 10 20 (65.6) 20 (Note) Four-wire type 30 (98.4) 30 Note: Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. 2) Connection diagram For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1. Servo amplifier Encoder connector Encoder cable (Optional or fabricated) CN2 Encoder connector Servo motor AB M L N C P D K T J S R E H F G Encoder 50m(164.0ft) max. Pin Signal MD A B MDR C MR D MRR E F G H J Pin Signal K L M CONT N SHD P R LG S P5 T Encoder cable of less than 30m When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNS connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to less than 30m. MR-ESCBL2M-L MR-ESCBL5M-L MR-ESCBL10M-L MR-ESCBL20M-L Servo amplifier side AWG23 Encoder side Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G MR MRR 3 4 C MR D MRR MR MRR 3 4 C MR D MRR 9 F 9 F (Note) SD Plate (Note) N SHD SD Plate Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 13 N SHD 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Encoder cable of 30m or more POINT The communication system of the encoder cable in this wiring diagram is the four-wire type. Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNS connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to 50m. MR-ESCBL30M-L Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G MR MRR MD MDR 3 4 7 8 9 C D A B F M MR MRR MD MDR CONT (Note) SD Plate N SHD Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 14 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) MR-ESCBL M-H (long flex life model) MR-ENECBL M-H (IP65/IP67-compatible, long flex life model) These encoder cables are used with the HC-SFE series servo motors. 1) Model explanation Model: MR-ESCBL M-H Long flex life Symbol Cable Length [m(ft)] Communication System 2 (6.56) 2 5 (16.4) 5 Two-wire type 10 (32.8) 10 20 (65.6) 20 30 (98.4) 30 (Note) Four-wire type 40 (131.2) 40 50 (164.0) 50 Note: Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. Model: MR-ENECBL M-H Long flex life Symbol Cable Length [m(ft)] Communication System 2 (6.56) 2 5 (16.4) 5 Two-wire type 10 (32.8) 10 20 (65.6) 20 30 (98.4) 30 (Note) Four-wire type 40 (131.2) 40 50 (164.0) 50 Note: Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. 13 - 15 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 2) Connection diagram For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1. Servo amplifier Encoder connector Encoder cable (Optional or fabricated) CN2 Encoder connector Servo motor L AB M N C P D K T J S R E H F G Encoder 50m(164.0ft) max. Pin Signal MD A B MDR C MR D MRR E F G H J Pin Signal K L M CONT N SHD P R LG S P5 T Encoder cable of less than 30m When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNS (IP20-compatible model) or MR-ENECNS (IP65/IP67-compatible model) connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to less than 30m. MR-ESCBL2M-H MR-ESCBL5M-H MR-ESCBL10M-H MR-ENECBL2M-H MR-ENECBL5M-H MR-ENECBL10M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side MR-ESCBL20M-H MR-ENECBL20M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G MR MRR 3 4 C MR D MRR MR MRR 3 4 C MR D MRR 9 F 9 F (Note) SD Plate (Note) SD N SHD Plate Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 16 N SHD 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Encoder cable of 30m or more POINT The communication system of the encoder cable in this wiring diagram is the four-wire type. Set "1 " in parameter No. 20. When fabricating an encoder cable, use the MR-ECNS (IP20-compatible model) or MR-ENECNS (IP65/IP67-compatible model) connector set. Referring to the following wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder cable of up to 50m. MR-ESCBL30M-H MR-ESCBL40M-H MR-ESCBL50M-H MR-ENECBL30M-H MR-ENECBL40M-H MR-ENECBL50M-H Servo amplifier side Encoder side P5 LG 1 2 S P5E R P5G MR MRR MD MDR 3 4 7 8 9 C D A B F M MR MRR MD MDR CONT (Note) SD Plate N SHD Note. When an encoder cable is fabricated, this wire is not required. 13 - 17 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (3) Communication cable POINT This cable may not be used with some personal computers. After fully examining the signals of the RS-232C connector, refer to this section and fabricate the cable. (a) Model definition Model: QC30R2 (Cable length 3[m](10[ft])) (b) Connection diagram for fabrication MR-CPCATCBL3M Personal computer side TXD 3 RXD GND RTS CTS DSR DTR 2 5 7 8 6 4 D-SUB9 pins Servo amplifier side Plate 1 3 2 SD RXD LG TXD Mini DIN 6 pins When fabricating the cable, refer to the connection diagram in this section. Though this connection diagram is not the connection diagram of the QC30R2, it is identical in functions. The following must be observed in fabrication: 1) Always use a shielded, multi-core cable and connect the shield with SD securely. 2) The optional communication cable is 3m(10ft) long. When the cable is fabricated, its maximum length is 15m(49ft) in offices of good environment with minimal noise. 13 - 18 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.1.3 Analog monitor, RS-232C branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P) (1) Usage The analog monitor, RS-232C branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P) is designed for use when a personal computer and analog monitor outputs are used at the same time. Servo amplifier Analog monitor, RS-232C branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P) Communication cable (QC30R2) CN3 MO2 LG MO1 LG (2) Connection diagram Servo amplifier RS-232C Plate SD RXD 1 TXD 2 1 RXD 2 3 TXD LG Plate SD LG 3 Analog monitor MO1 4 3 4 LG MO1 6 MO2 MO2 6 Plate SD Plate SD 13 - 19 Analog monitor output 2 Analog monitor output 1 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.1.4 Servo configurations software The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP154E) uses the communication function of the servo amplifier to perform parameter setting changes, graph display, test operation, etc. on a personal computer. (1) Specifications Item Communication signal Baudrate [bps] Monitor Alarm Diagnostic Parameters Test operation Advanced function File operation Others Description Conforms to RS-232C. 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600 Display, high speed monitor, trend graph Minimum resolution changes with the processing speed of the personal computer. Display, history, amplifier data Digital I/O, no motor rotation, total power-on time, amplifier version info, motor information, tuning data, absolute encoder data, automatic voltage control, Axis name setting. Parameter list, turning, change list, detailed information Jog operation, positioning operation, motor-less operation, Do forced output, program operation. Machine analyzer, gain search, machine simulation. Data read, save, print Automatic demo, help display (2) System configuration (a) Components To use this software, the following components are required in addition to the servo amplifier and servo motor: Model (Note 2) Personal computer OS Display Keyboard Mouse Printer Communication cable (Note 1) Description IBM PC-AT compatible where the English version of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0 or Windows 2000 Professional operates Processor: Pentium 133MHz or more (Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional) Pentium 150MHz or more (Windows Me) Memory: 16MB or more (Windows 95), 24MB or more (Windows 98) 32MB or more (Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional) Free hard disk space: 30MB or more Serial port used Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional (English version) One whose resolution is 800 600 or more and that can provide a high color (16 bit) display. Connectable with the above personal computer. Connectable with the above personal computer. Connectable with the above personal computer. Note that a serial mouse is not used. Connectable with the above personal computer. QC30R2 When this cannot be used, refer to (3) Section 13.1.2 and fabricate. Note: 1. Windows and Windows NT are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United State and other countries. 2. On some personal computers, this software may not run properly. (b) Configuration diagram Servo amplifier Personal computer Communication cable CN3 To RS-232C connector 13 - 20 CN2 Servo motor 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.2 Auxiliary equipment Always use the devices indicated in this section or equivalent. To comply with the EN Standard or UL/CUL (CSA) Standard, use the products which conform to the corresponding standard. 13.2.1 Recommended wires (1) Wires for power supply wiring The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this section or equivalent. 1) Power supply lead 3) Motor power supply lead Servo motor Servo amplifier Power supply L1 U U L2 V V L3 W W Motor 5) Electromagnetic brake lead ElectroB1 magnetic B2 brake (Note) D Regenerative brake option C Encoder P 4) Regenerative brake option lead Encoder cable (refer to Section 13.1.2) Note: When using the regenerative brake option, always remove the wiring across D-P. The following table lists wire sizes. The wires used assume that they are 600V vinyl wires and the wiring distance is 30m(98.4ft) max. If the wiring distance is over 30m(98.4ft), choose the wire size in consideration of voltage drop. Refer to Section 3.11 for connection with the connector (CNP1, CNP2). The servo motor side connection method depends on the type and capacity of the servo motor. Refer to Section 3.8. To enable the built-in regenerative brake, connect the wiring across D-P. (Refer to Section 3.7.2 for the connection method.) To comply with the UL/C-UL (CSA) Standard, use UL-recognized copper wires rated at 60 (140 ) or more for wiring. Table 13.1 Recommended wires 2 Servo amplifier MR-E-10A MR-E-20A MR-E-40A MR-E-70A MR-E-100A MR-E-200A (Note) Wires [mm ] 1) L1 L2 2 (AWG14) L3 3) U V W 4) P C 5) B1 B2 1.25 (AWG16) 2 (AWG14) 1.25 (AWG16) 2 (AWG14) (Note) 2.5 (AWG14) (Note) 2.5 (AWG14) Note: Use the heat-resistant PVC coble (more than 105 ), if AWG14 cable is used in ambient temperature more than 40 . 13 - 21 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Wires for cables When fabricating a cable, use the wire models given in the following table or equivalent: Table 13.2 Wires for option cables Type Model MR-EKCBL M-L MR-ESCBL M-L Encoder cable MR-EKCBL M-H MR-ESCBL M-H MR-ENECBL M-H Communication QC30R2 cable Length [m(ft)] 2 to 10 (6.56 to 32.8) 20 30 (65.6 98.4) 2 to 10 (6.56 to 32.8) Core size Number [mm2] of Cores 0.3 0.08 0.3 0.2 20 (65.6) 0.2 30 to 50 (98.4 to 164) 0.2 3 (9.84) 0.08 4 (2 pairs) 4 (2 pairs) 12 (6 pairs) 12 (6 pairs) 12 (6 pairs) 14 (7 pairs) 6 (3 pairs) Characteristics of one core Structure Conductor [Wires/mm] resistance[ /mm] Insulation coating ODd[mm] (Note 1) (Note 3) Finishing OD [mm] 12/0.18 65.7 1.3 7/0.127 234 0.67 7/0.18 63.6 1.2 8.2 40/0.08 105 0.88 7.2 40/0.08 105 0.88 7.2 40/0.08 105 0.88 8.0 7/0.127 222 0.38 4.6 7.3 Note 1: d is as shown below: d Conductor Insulation sheath 2: Purchased from Toa Electric Industry 3: Standard OD. Max. OD is about 10% greater. 4: BANDO ELECTRIC WIRE 13 - 22 Wire model (Note 4) 20276 composite 4pair shielded cable (A-TYPE) UL20276AWG#23 6 pair (BLACK) (Note 2) A14B2339 4P (Note 2) A14B2343 6P (Note 3) J14B0238 (0.2 7P) UL20276 AWG#28 3pair (BLACK) 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.2.2 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors Always use one no-fuse breaker and one magnetic contactor with one servo amplifier. When using a fuse instead of the no-fuse breaker, use the one having the specifications given in this section. Servo amplifier No-fuse breaker MR-E-10A MR-E-20A MR-E-40A MR-E-70A MR-E-100A MR-E-200A 30A frame 5A 30A frame 5A 30A frame 10A 30A frame 15A 30A frame 15A 30A frame 20A Class Fuse Current [A] K5 K5 K5 K5 K5 K5 10 10 15 15 15 15 Voltage [V] Magnetic contactor S-N10 AC250 S-N18 13.2.3 Power factor improving reactors The input power factor is improved to be about 90%. For use with a 1-phase power supply, it may be slightly lower than 90%. [Unit : mm] FR-BAL NFB 3-phase 200 to 230VAC H 5 W NFB Installation screw C MC 1-phase 230VAC D 5 Servo amplifier R X S Y T Z FR-BAL D1 5 RX S Y T Z MC L1 L2 L3 Servo amplifier R X S Y T Z L1 L2 L3 W1 Servo amplifier Model Dimensions [mm (in) ] W W1 H D D1 C Mounting Terminal screw size screw size Weight [kg (lb)] MR-E-10A/20A FR-BAL-0.4K 135 (5.31) 120 (4.72) 115 (4.53) 59 (2.32) 45 (1.77) 7.5 (0.29) M4 M3.5 2.0 (4.4) MR-E-40A FR-BAL-0.75K 135 (5.31) 120 (4.72) 115 (4.53) 69 (2.72) 57 (2.24) 7.5 (0.29) M4 M3.5 2.8 (6.17) MR-E-70A FR-BAL-1.5K 160 (6.30) 145 (5.71) 140 (5.51) 71 (2.79) 55 (2.17) 7.5 (0.29) M4 M3.5 3.7 (8.16) MR-E-100A FR-BAL-2.2K 160 (6.30) 145 (5.71) 140 (5.51) 91 (3.58) 75 (2.95) 7.5 (0.29) M4 M3.5 5.6 (12.35) MR-E-200A FR-BAL-3.7K 220 (8.66) 200 (7.87) 192 (7.56) 90 (3.54) 70 (2.76) 10 (0.39) M5 M4 8.5 (18.74) 13 - 23 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.2.4 Relays The following relays should be used with the interfaces: Interface Selection example Input signals (interface DI-1) signals To prevent defective contacts , use a relay for small signal (twin contacts). (Ex.) Omron : type G2A , MY Relay used for digital output signals (interface DO-1) Small relay with 12VDC or 24VDC of 40mA or less (Ex.) Omron : type MY 13.2.5 Surge absorbers A surge absorber is required for the electromagnetic brake. Use the following surge absorber or equivalent. Insulate the wiring as shown in the diagram. Maximum rating Static Maximum capacity Varistor voltage limit voltage (reference rating (range) V1mA Permissible circuit Surge Energy Rated voltage immunity immunity power [A] [J] [W] [A] [V] [pF] 5 0.4 25 360 300 AC[Vma] DC[V] 140 180 Note: 1 time 8 (Note) 500/time value) [V] 220 (198 to 242) 20 s (Example) ERZV10D221 (Matsushita Electric Industry) TNR-10V221K (Nippon chemi-con) Outline drawing [mm] ( [in] ) (ERZ-C10DK221) 4.7 1.0 (0.19 0.04) Vinyl tube 30.0 (1.18) or more 0.8 (0.03) 3.0 (0.12) or less 16.5 (0.65) 13.5 (0.53) Crimping terminal for M4 screw 13.2.6 Noise reduction techniques Noises are classified into external noises which enter the servo amplifier to cause it to malfunction and those radiated by the servo amplifier to cause peripheral devices to malfunction. Since the servo amplifier is an electronic device which handles small signals, the following general noise reduction techniques are required. Also, the servo amplifier can be a source of noise as its outputs are chopped by high carrier frequencies. If peripheral devices malfunction due to noises produced by the servo amplifier, noise suppression measures must be taken. The measures will vary slightly with the routes of noise transmission. (1) Noise reduction techniques (a) General reduction techniques Avoid laying power lines (input and output cables) and signal cables side by side or do not bundle them together. Separate power lines from signal cables. Use shielded, twisted pair cables for connection with the encoder and for control signal transmission, and connect the shield to the SD terminal. Ground the servo amplifier, servo motor, etc. together at one point (refer to Section 3.10). 13 - 24 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Reduction techniques for external noises that cause the servo amplifier to malfunction If there are noise sources (such as a magnetic contactor, an electromagnetic brake, and many relays which make a large amount of noise) near the servo amplifier and the servo amplifier may malfunction, the following countermeasures are required. Provide surge absorbers on the noise sources to suppress noises. Attach data line filters to the signal cables. Ground the shields of the encoder connecting cable and the control signal cables with cable clamp fittings. (c) Techniques for noises radiated by the servo amplifier that cause peripheral devices to malfunction Noises produced by the servo amplifier are classified into those radiated from the cables connected to the servo amplifier and its main circuits (input and output circuits), those induced electromagnetically or statically by the signal cables of the peripheral devices located near the main circuit cables, and those transmitted through the power supply cables. Noises produced by servo amplifier Noises transmitted in the air Noise radiated directly from servo amplifier Route 1) Noise radiated from the power supply cable Route 2) Noise radiated from servo motor cable Route 3) Magnetic induction noise Routes 4) and 5) Static induction noise Route 6) Noises transmitted through electric channels Noise transmitted through power supply cable Route 7) Noise sneaking from grounding cable due to leakage current Route 8) 5) 7) 7) 1) Instrument 7) 2) Receiver Sensor power supply Servo amplifier 2) 3) 8) 6) Sensor 4) 3) Servo motor 13 - 25 SM 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Noise transmission route Suppression techniques 1) 2) 3) When measuring instruments, receivers, sensors, etc. which handle weak signals and may malfunction due to noise and/or their signal cables are contained in a control box together with the servo amplifier or run near the servo amplifier, such devices may malfunction due to noises transmitted through the air. The following techniques are required. (1) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected devices and the servo amplifier. (2) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected signal cables and the I/O cables of the servo amplifier. (3) Avoid laying the power lines (Input cables of the servo amplifier) and signal cables side by side or bundling them together. (4) Insert a line noise filter to the I/O cables or a radio noise filter on the input line. (5) Use shielded wires for signal and power cables or put cables in separate metal conduits. 4) 5) 6) When the power lines and the signal cables are laid side by side or bundled together, magnetic induction noise and static induction noise will be transmitted through the signal cables and malfunction may occur. The following techniques are required. (1) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected devices and the servo amplifier. (2) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected signal cables and the I/O cables of the servo amplifier. (3) Avoid laying the power lines (Input cables of the servo amplifier) and signal cables side by side or bundling them together. (4) Use shielded wires for signal and power cables or put the cables in separate metal conduits. 7) When the power supply of peripheral devices is connected to the power supply of the servo amplifier system, noises produced by the servo amplifier may be transmitted back through the power supply cable and the devices may malfunction. The following techniques are required. (1) Insert the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) on the power cables (Input cables) of the servo amplifier. (2) Insert the line noise filter (FR-BSF01) on the power cables of the servo amplifier. 8) When the cables of peripheral devices are connected to the servo amplifier to make a closed loop circuit, leakage current may flow to malfunction the peripheral devices. If so, malfunction may be prevented by disconnecting the grounding cable of the peripheral device. (2) Noise reduction products (a) Data line filter Noise can be prevented by installing a data line filter onto the encoder cable, etc. For example, the ZCAT3035-1330 of TDK and the ESD-SR-25 of Tokin make are available as data line filters. As a reference example, the impedance specifications of the ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK) are indicated below. This impedances are reference values and not guaranteed values. 10 to 100MHz 100 to 500MHz 80 150 39 1(1.54 0.04) 34 1 (1.34 0.04) Loop for fixing the cable band TDK Product name Lot number Outline drawing (ZCAT3035-1330) 13 - 26 13 1 30 1 (0.51 0.04) (1.18 0.04) [Unit: mm]([Unit: in.]) Impedance[ ] 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (b) Surge suppressor The recommended surge suppressor for installation to an AC relay, AC valve, AC electromagnetic brake or the like near the servo amplifier is shown below. Use this product or equivalent. MS Relay Surge suppressor Surge suppressor Surge suppressor This distance should be short (within 20cm(0.79 in.)). (Ex.) 972A.2003 50411 (Matsuo Electric Co.,Ltd. 200VAC rating) Outline drawing [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in.]) Rated voltage AC[V] C [ F] R [Ω] Test voltage AC[V] 200 0.5 50 (1W) Across T-C 1000(1 to 5s) Vinyl sheath Blue vinyl cord Red vinyl cord 10(0.39)or less 10 3 (0.39 0.12) 18 1.5 (0.71 0.06) 6(0.24) 10(0.39)or less 4(0.16) 10 3 (0.39 48 1.5 200(7.87) 0.15) (1.89 0.06) or more 15 1(0.59 0.04) 200(7.87) or more Note that a diode should be installed to a DC relay, DC valve or the like. Maximum voltage: Not less than 4 times the drive voltage of the relay or the like Maximum current: Not less than twice the drive current of the relay or the like 31(1.22) RA Diode (c) Cable clamp fitting (AERSBAN -SET) Generally, the earth of the shielded cable may only be connected to the connector's SD terminal. However, the effect can be increased by directly connecting the cable to an earth plate as shown below. Install the earth plate near the servo amplifier for the encoder cable. Peel part of the cable sheath to expose the external conductor, and press that part against the earth plate with the cable clamp. If the cable is thin, clamp several cables in a bunch. The clamp comes as a set with the earth plate. Cable Strip the cable sheath of the clamped area. Earth plate 40(1.57) Cable clamp (A,B) cutter External conductor cable Clamp section diagram 13 - 27 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Outline drawing [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in.]) Earth plate Clamp section diagram 2- 5(0.20) hole installation hole 6 (0.24) 10(0.39) 0.3 0 24 22(0.87) 35(1.38) Note: Screw hole for grounding. Connect it to the earth plate of the control box. Type A B C Accessory fittings Clamp fitting L AERSBAN-DSET 100 (3.94) 86 (3.39) 30 (1.18) clamp A: 2pcs. A 70 (2.76) AERSBAN-ESET 70 (2.76) 56 (2.20) clamp B: 1pc. B 45 (1.77) 13 - 28 (0.940) A C 35 (1.38) 24 L or less 11(0.43) (Note)M4 screw 0 0.2 7 (0.28) (0.940) B 0.3(0.01) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 30(1.18) 17.5(0.69) 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (d) Line noise filter (FR-BSF01) This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of the servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current) especially within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band. Connection diagram Outline drawing [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in.]) Wind the 3-phase wires by the equal number of times in the same direction, and connect the filter to the power supply side and output side of the servo amplifier. The effect of the filter on the power supply side is higher as the number of winds is larger. The number of turns is generally four. If the wires are too thick to be wound, use two or more filters and make the total number of turns as mentioned above. On the output side, the number of turns must be four or less. Do not wind the grounding wire together with the 3-phase wires. The filter effect will decrease. Use a separate wire for grounding. Example 1 NFB Servo amplifier 22 (0.87) 110 (4.33) 95 (3.74) 65 (2.56) L2 Line noise L3 filter (Number of turns: 4) 65 (2.56) 33 (1.3) L1 Example 2 NFB 2- 5 (0.20) 3 (0.12) Power supply FR-BSF01 Servo amplifier Power supply L1 L2 Line noise L3 filter Two filters are used (Total number of turns: 4) (e) Radio noise filter (FR-BIF)...for the input side only This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side of the servo amplifier especially in 10MHz and lower radio frequency bands. The FR-BIF is designed for the input side only. Connection diagram Outline drawing (Unit: mm) ([Unit: in.]) L1 L2 Power supply L3 Green 29 (1.14) Radio noise filter FR-BIF 58 (2.28) 5 (0.20) hole 29 (1.14) 44 (1.73) 13 - 29 4 (0.16) Servo amplifier Red White Blue 42 (1.65) NFB Leakage current: 4mA About 300(11.81) Make the connection cables as short as possible. Grounding is always required. 7 (0.28) 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.2.7 Leakage current breaker (1) Selection method High-frequency chopper currents controlled by pulse width modulation flow in the AC servo circuits. Leakage currents containing harmonic contents are larger than those of the motor which is run with a commercial power supply. Select a leakage current breaker according to the following formula, and ground the servo amplifier, servo motor, etc. securely. Make the input and output cables as short as possible, and also make the grounding cable as long as possible (about 30cm (11.8 in)) to minimize leakage currents. Rated sensitivity current 10 {Ig1 Ign Iga K (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] ..........(13.2) K: Constant considering the harmonic contents Cable Leakage current breaker NV Noise filter Ig1 Ign Ig1: Ig2: Ign: Iga: Igm: Servo amplifier Iga Leakage current Ig2 Models provided with harmonic and surge reduction techniques NV-SP NV-SW NV-CP NV-CW NV-L 1 General models BV-C1 NFB NV-L 3 SM Igm Leakage current on the electric channel from the leakage current breaker to the input terminals of the servo amplifier (Found from Fig. 13.1.) Leakage current on the electric channel from the output terminals of the servo amplifier to the servo motor (Found from Fig. 13.1.) Leakage current when a filter is connected to the input side (4.4mA per one FR-BIF) Leakage current of the servo amplifier (Found from Table 13.4.) Leakage current of the servo motor (Found from Table 13.3.) Table 13.3 Servo motor's leakage current example (Igm) 120 [mA] Cable K Mitsubishi products Type 100 Table 13.4 Servo amplifier's leakage current example (Iga) 80 Servo motor output [kW] Leakage current [mA] Servo amplifier capacity [kW] Leakage current [mA] 60 0.1 to 1.0 0.1 0.1 to 0.6 0.1 40 1.0 to 2.2 0.2 0.7 to 2.0 0.15 20 0 Table 13.5 Leakage circuit breaker selection example 2 3.5 8 1422 38 80 150 5.5 30 60 100 Cable size[mm2] Rated sensitivity Servo amplifier Fig. 13.1 Leakage current example (Ig1, Ig2) for CV cable run in metal conduit current of leakage circuit breaker [mA] MR-E-10A to MR-E-200A 13 - 30 15 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT (2) Selection example Indicated below is an example of selecting a leakage current breaker under the following conditions: 2mm2 5m 2mm2 5m NV Servo amplifier MR-E-40A Ig1 Iga Servo motor SM HC-KFE73 Ig2 Igm Use a leakage current breaker generally available. Find the terms of Equation (13.2) from the diagram: Ig1 20 5 1000 0.1 [mA] Ig2 20 5 1000 0.1 [mA] Ign 0 (not used) Iga 0.1 [mA] Igm 0.1 [mA] Insert these values in Equation (13.2): Ig 10 {0.1 0 0.1 1 (0.1 0.1)} 4.0 [mA] According to the result of calculation, use a leakage current breaker having the rated sensitivity current (Ig) of 4.0[mA] or more. A leakage current breaker having Ig of 15[mA] is used with the NVSP/SW/CP/CW/HW series. 13 - 31 13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 13.2.8 EMC filter For compliance with the EMC Directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter: Some EMC filters are large in leakage current. (1) Combination with the servo amplifier Recommended filter Servo amplifier Model Leakage current [mA] Weight [kg]([lb]) MR-E-10A to MR-E-100A SF1252 38 0.75 (1.65) MR-E-200A SF1253 57 1.37 (1.65) (2) Connection example EMC filter (Note 1) Power supply 3-phase 200 to 230V AC, 1-phase 230VAC or 1-phase 100 to120VAC NFB LINE Servo amplifier LOAD L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 (Note 2) Note: 1. For 1-phase 230VAC power supply, connect the power supply to L1,L2 and leave L3 open. 2. Connect when the power supply has earth. (3) Outline drawing [Unit: mm(in)] SF1252 SF1253 6.0(0.236) L1' L2' L3' LOAD (output side) 8.5 (0.335) LINE LINE (input side) 156.0(6.142) 140.0(5.512) 168.0(6.614) LINE 156.0(6.142) 140.0(5.512) LOAD L1 L2 L3 LINE (input side) LABEL LABEL 168.0(6.614) L1 L2 L3 6.0(0.236) 209.5(8.248) LOAD 149.5(5.886) L1' L2' L3' 16.0(0.63) LOAD (output side) 8.5 (0.335) 42.0 (1.654) 13 - 32 23.0(0.906) 49.0 (1.929) 14. SERVO MOTOR 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.1 Compliance with the overseas standards 14.1.1 Compliance with EC directives Use the servo motor compatible with the EN Standard. Unless otherwise specified, the handling, performance, specifications and others of the EN Standardcompatible models are the same as those of the standard models. To comply with the EN Standard, also observe the following items strictly. (1) Wiring Use the servo motor side power connector which complies with the EN Standard. The EN Standard-compliant power connector sets are available from us as options. Power Connector Set Model MR-PWCNS1 MR-PWCNS2 Servo Motor Model HC-SFE52 (B) to 152 (B) HC-SFE202 (B) (2) Installation The flange of the machine mounted with the HC-KFE must be connected to the earth. 14.1.2 Conformance with UL/C-UL standard Mount the servo motor on a flange which has the following size or produces an equivalent or higher heat dissipation effect: Note that if the servo motor used is the same, the flange size depends on the servo amplifier combined. Flange size [mm] 150 150 6 250 250 6 250 250 12 300 300 12 300 300 20 Servo motor HC-KFE HC-SFE 13 23 43 52 to 152 73 202 14 - 1 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.2 Model name make-up (1) Name plate AC SERVO MOTOR HC-SFE152 Model Input power Rated output Rated speed, Protection structure, Insulation class, Weight Serial number INPUT 3AC 145V 8.2A OUTPUT 1.5kW IEC60034-1 '99 2000r/min IP65CI.F 9.5kg SER.No. AS958300202X MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN (2) Model (a) HC-KFE series (low inertia, small capacity) HC-KFE 3 Appearance Series name Shaft type Symbol Shaft Shape Reduction Gear None Standard (Straight shaft) None Without K (Note) With keyway G1 For general industrial machine G2 For precision application Reduction gear Symbol Note: With key Electromagnetic brake Rated speed 3000[r/min] Rated output Symbol Rated Output [W] 1 100 2 200 4 400 7 750 14 - 2 Symbol Electromagnetic Brake None Without B With 14. SERVO MOTOR (b) HC-SFE series (middle inertia, middle capacity) HC-SFE Series name 2 Appearance Shaft type Symbol Shaft Shape None Standard (Straight shaft) K With keyway Note: Without key Reduction gear Symbol (Note) Reduction Gear None Without G1 For general industrial machine (flange type) G1H For general industrial machine (leg type) G2 For precision application Electromagnetic brake Rated speed 2000 [r/min] Symbol Electromagnetic Brake None Without Rated output B With Symbol Rated Output [W] 5 500 10 1000 15 1500 20 2000 14 - 3 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.3 Parts identification Name/Application Lead type Refer To Section 14.7.1 Encoder Encoder cable with encoder connector Section 14.5 Power cable Power lead (U, V, W) Earth lead Brake lead (for motor with electromagnetic brake) Section 14.5 Servo motor shaft Name/Application Connector type Encoder Section 14.7.4 Refer To Section 14.7.1 Encoder connector Section 14.5 Power connector Power supply (U, V, W) Earth Brake (for motor with electromagnetic brake) Some motors with electromagnetic brakes have brake connectors separately. Section 14.5 Servo motor shaft 14 - 4 Section 14.7.4 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.4 Installation CAUTION Stacking in excess of the limited number of products is not allowed. Install the equipment to incombustibles. Installing them directly or close to combustibles will led to a fire. Install the equipment in a load-bearing place in accordance with this Instruction Manual. Do not get on or put heavy load on the equipment to prevent injury. Use the equipment within the specified environmental condition range. Do not subject the servo motor to drop impact or shock loads as they are precision equipment. Do not install or operate a faulty servo amplifier. Do not hold the cable, shaft or encoder to carry the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault or injury may occur. The lifting eyebolts of the servo motor may only be used to transport the servo motor. They must not be used to transport the servo motor when it is mounted on a machine. The servo motor with reduction gear must be installed in the specified direction. Otherwise, it can leak oil, leading to a fire or fault. Securely fix the servo motor to the machine. If fixed insecurely, the servo motor will come off during operation, leading to injury. When coupling the shaft end of the servo motor, do not subject the shaft end to impact, such as hammering. The encoder may become faulty. Cover the shaft of the servo motor to make its rotary part completely inaccessible during operation. Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break, leading to injury. When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi. 14 - 5 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.4.1 Environmental conditions Environment Ambient temperature Ambient humidity [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Storage temperature Storage humidity Ambient Altitude [m/s2] (Note) Vibration [ft/s2] Conditions 0 to 40 (non-freezing) 32 to 104 (non-freezing) 80%RH or less (non-condensing) 15 to 70 (non-freezing) 5 to 158 (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt Max. 1000m (3280ft) above sea level HC-KFE series X,Y:49 HC-SFE52 to 152 X,Y:24.5 X:24.5 HC-SFE202 Y:49 HC-KFE series X,Y:161 HC-SFE52 to 152 X,Y:80 X:80 HC-SFE202 Y:161 Note: Except the servo motor with reduction gear. Servo motor X Y Graph of vibration servo amplitude vs. speed 200 Vibration amplitude (both amplitudes) [ m] Vibration occurs in the directions shown below. The values were measured at the portion which indicates the maximum value (normally the bracket opposite to load side). When the servo motor is at a stop, the bearings are likely to fret and vibration should therefore be suppressed to about half of the permissible value. 100 80 60 50 40 30 20 500 Vibration 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 Speed [r/min] 14.4.2 Installation orientation The following table lists directions of installation: Servo Motor Series HC-KFE HC-SFE Direction of Installation Remarks May be installed in any For installation in the horizontal direction, it is recommended to set the direction. connector section downward. When the servo motor with electromagnetic brake is installed with the shaft end at top, the brake plate may generate sliding sound but it is not a fault. Refer to Section 14.6.3 for the installation orientation of the servo motor with reduction gear. 14 - 6 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.4.3 Load mounting precautions POINT During assembling, the shaft end must not be hammered. Doing so can cause the encoder to fail. (1) When mounting a pulley to the servo motor shaft provided with a keyway, use the screw hole in the shaft end. To fit the pulley, first insert a double-end stud into the screw hole of the shaft, put a washer against the end face of the coupling, and insert and tighten a nut to force the pulley in. Servo motor Double-end stud Nut Washer Pulley (2) For the servo motor shaft with a keyway, use the screw hole in the shaft end. For the shaft without a keyway, use a friction coupling or the like. (3) When removing the pulley, use a pulley remover to protect the shaft from impact. (4) To ensure safety, fit a protective cover or the like on the rotary area, such as the pulley, mounted to the shaft. (5) When a threaded shaft end part is needed to mount a pulley on the shaft, please contact us. (6) The orientation of the encoder on the servo motor cannot be changed. (7) For installation of the servo motor, use spring washers, etc. and fully tighten the bolts so that they do not become loose due to vibration. 14 - 7 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.4.4 Permissible load for the shaft POINT Do not use a rigid coupling as it may apply excessive bending load to the shaft, leading to shaft breakage. (a) Use a flexible coupling and make sure that the misalignment of the shaft is less than the permissible radial load. (b) When using a pulley, sprocket or timing belt, select a diameter that will fit into the permissible radial load. (c) Excess of the permissible load can cause the bearing life to reduce and the shaft to break. (d) The load indicated in this section is static load in a single direction and does not include eccentric load. Make eccentric load as small as possible. Not doing so can cause the servo motor to be damaged. (1) Without reduction gear (Note ) L Servo Motor 053 / 13 HC-KFE 23 / 43 73 HC-SFE Permissible Radial Load Permissible Thrust Load [mm] [in] [N] [lb] [N] [lb] 25 0.98 88 20 59 13 30 1.18 245 55 98 22 40 1.57 392 88 147 33 52 to 152 55 2.17 980 220 490 110 202 79 3.11 2058 463 980 220 Note : For the symbols in the table, refer to the following diagram: L Radial load Thrust load L: Distance from flange mounting surface to load center (2) With reduction gear The permissible radial loads in the table are the values at the center of the reduction gear output shaft. Q/ 2 Q (a) HC-KFE series 1) General industrial machine-compliant Gear ratio Item [N] Permissible Radial Load [lb] [N] Permissible Thrust Load [lb] HC-KFE13(B) G1 HC-KFE23(B) G1 HC-KFE43(B) G1 HC-KFE73(B) G1 1/5 150 330 430 1/12 240 710 620 1/20 370 1/5 34 74 97 1/12 54 160 139 780 760 1/20 83 1/5 200 350 430 1/12 320 720 620 1/20 450 1/5 45 1/12 72 1/20 101 14 - 8 175 171 970 780 760 79 960 97 162 175 218 139 171 216 14. SERVO MOTOR 2) Precision application-compliant ratio HC-KFE13(B) G2 HC-KFE23(B) G2 HC-KFE43(B) G2 HC-KFE73(B) G2 1/5 160 160 340 390 1/9 200 420 480 600 1/20 540 610 790 1040 1/29 610 700 900 1190 1/5 36 36 76 88 1/9 45 94 108 135 Gear Item [N] Permissible Radial Load [lb] [N] Permissible Thrust Load [lb] 1/20 121 137 178 234 1/29 137 157 202 268 1/5 220 220 370 390 1/9 270 450 490 600 1/20 660 640 790 1140 1/29 750 830 1010 1290 1/5 49 49 83 87 1/9 61 101 110 135 1/20 148 144 178 256 1/29 167 187 227 290 (b) HC-SFE (2000r/min) series 1) General industrial machine-compliant Item [N] Permissible Radial Load [lb] [N] Permissible Thrust Load [lb] Gear ratio HC-SFE52(B) G1 HC-SFE102(B) G1 HC-SFE152(B) G1 HC-SFE202(B) G1 1/6 2058 2842 2842 2842 1/11 2391 3273 3273 3273 1/17 2832 3646 3646 3646 1/29 3273 4410 5135 7291 1/35 5253 5253 6047 8555 1/43 5253 6047 8555 8555 1/59 5800 9741 9741 9741 1/6 463 639 639 639 1/11 538 728 728 728 1/17 637 820 820 820 1/29 728 991 1154 1639 1/35 1181 1181 1359 1923 1/43 1181 1359 1923 1923 1/59 1304 2190 2190 2190 1/6 1470 2352 2352 2352 1/11 1470 2764 2764 2764 1/17 1470 2940 2940 2940 1/29 1470 2940 3920 6860 1/35 2940 2940 3920 6860 1/43 2940 3920 6860 6860 1/59 2940 6860 6860 6860 1/6 330 529 529 529 1/11 330 621 621 621 1/17 330 661 661 661 1/29 330 661 881 1542 1/35 661 661 881 1542 1/43 661 881 1542 1542 1/59 661 1542 1542 1542 14 - 9 14. SERVO MOTOR 2) Precision application-compliant Item [N] Permissible Radial Load [lb] [N] Permissible Thrust Load [lb] Gear ratio HC-SFE52(B) G2 HC-SFE102(B) G2 HC-SFE152(B) G2 HC-SFE202(B) G2 1/5 833 833 833 1666 1/9 980 980 1960 1960 1/20 1274 2646 2646 6076 1/29 2940 2940 6860 6860 1/45 3430 8036 8036 8036 1/5 187 187 187 375 1/9 220 220 441 441 1/20 286 595 595 1366 1/29 661 661 1542 1542 1/45 771 1807 1807 1807 1/5 1176 1176 1176 2156 1/9 1568 1568 2646 2646 1/20 2254 3724 3724 9506 1/29 4704 4704 11760 11760 1/45 5390 14700 14700 14700 1/5 264 264 264 485 1/9 353 353 595 595 1/20 507 837 837 2137 1/29 1058 1058 2644 2644 1/45 1212 3305 3305 3305 14 - 10 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.4.5 Protection from oil and water (1) Next, the servo motor is not waterproof (IP44). Do not subject the servo motor to oil and water. Especially for the HC-KFE series, do not subject the shaft-through portion to oil. Servo Motor Series Protection HC-KFE IP55 Oil or water Servo motor (2) When the gear box is mounted horizontally, the oil level in the gear box should always be lower than the oil seal lip on the servo motor shaft. If it is higher than the oil seal lip, oil will enter the servo motor, leading to a fault. Also, provide a breathing hole in the gear box to hold the internal pressure low. The HC-KFE series servo motor is not equipped with a V ring or an oil seal and cannot be used with the gear box as described above. Oil should be shut off on the gear box side. Gear Servo motor Height above oil level h Lip V ring Servo Motor HC-SFE Height above Oil Level h [mm] [in] 52 to 152 20 0.79 202 to 702 25 0.98 (3) When installing the servo motor horizontally, face the power cable and encoder cable downward. When installing the servo motor vertically or obliquely, provide a trap for the cable. Cable trap 14 - 11 14. SERVO MOTOR (4) Do not use the servo motor with its cable soaked in oil or water. (Figure on the right) Cover Servo motor Oil/water pool Capillary phenomenon (5) When the servo motor is to be installed with the shaft end at top, provide measures so that it is not exposed to oil and water entering from the machine side, gear box, etc. Gear Lubricating oil Servo motor (6) If the servo motor is exposed to oil such as coolant, the sealant, packing, cable and others may be affected depending on the oil type. (7) In the environment where the servo motor is exposed to oil mist, oil, water and/or like, the servo motor of the standard specifications may not be usable. Contact us. (8) In the case of the servo motor with oil seal, the oil seal may sound during operation. It poses no problems in function. 14.4.6 Cable The power supply and encoder cables routed from the servo motor should be fixed to the servo motor to keep them unmovable. Otherwise, cable breaks may occur. In addition, do not modify the connectors, terminals and others at the ends of the cables. 14 - 12 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.5. Connectors used for servo motor wiring This section gives connector makeups on an operating environment basis. Use the models of the manufacturers given or equivalent. 14.5.1 HC-KFE series Use the connectors indicated in this section or equivalent for connection of the power supply, electromagnetic brake and encoder. These connectors may be used for the EN Standard and UL/C-UL Standard but are not waterproof. 1) For connection of power supply and brake Servo Motor Plug (molex) Terminal (molex) 5557-04R-210 5559-04P-210 5558PBT3L HC-KFE Servo Motor Cable Side Connector Connector Supplied for Servo Motor (molex) Manual crimping tool Cable Side Connector Connector Supplied for Servo Motor (molex) Plug (molex) Terminal (molex) 5557-06R-210 5559-06P-210 5558PBT3L HC-KFE B 57022-5300 Manual crimping tool 57022-5300 2) For connection of encoder Servo Motor Cable Side Connector Connector Supplied for Servo Motor (AMP) Housing (AMP) Connector pin (AMP) Cable clamp (Toa Electric Industry) 1-172169-9 1-172161-9 170359-1 170363-1 (loose piece) MTI-0002 HC-KFE (B) 14.5.2 HC-SFE series (1) Non-waterproof, UL/C-UL Standard-compliant (a) When using cabtyre cables 1) For connection of power supply 1) Plug 2) Cable clamp Servo Motor Cable 1) Plug 2) Cable clamp Connector Supplied for Servo Motor HC-SFE52(B) to 152(B) CE05-2A22-23PD-B HC-SFE202(B) CE05-2A24-10PD-B Type Cable 1) Plug (DDK) Model Straight Angle Straight MS3106B22-23S MS3108B22-23S MS3106B24-10S Angle MS3108B24-10S 2) Cable clamp (DDK) MS3057-12A MS3057-16A 2) For connection of encoder 1) Plug 2) Cable clamp Servo Motor HC-SFE52(B) to 202(B) Cable 2) Cable clamp 1) Plug Connector Supplied for Servo Motor MS3102A20-29P 14 - 13 Cable 1) Plug (DDK) Type Model Straight MS3106B20-29S Angle MS3108B20-29S 2) Cable clamp (DDK) MS3057-12A 14. SERVO MOTOR 3) For connection of brake 1) Plug 2) Connector for cable Cable Cable 1) Plug 2) Connector for cable Connector Supplied for Servo Motor Servo Motor HC-SFE202B MS3102A10SL-4P 1) Plug (DDK) 2) Connector for Cable Cable Maker OD Type Model 4 to 8 ACS-08RL-MS10F 8 to 12 ACS-12RL-MS10F Daiwa Dengyo 5 to 8.3 YSO10-5 to 8 Straight Nippon flex 4 to 8 8 to 12 ACA-08RL-MS10F ACA-12RL-MS10F Angle Daiwa Dengyo 5 to 8.3 YLO10-5 to 8 Straight Nippon flex Angle MS3106A10SL-4S (b) When using flexible conduits 1) For connection of power supply 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor Conduit 1) Plug 1) Plug (DDK) 2) Connector for conduit Type Maker Nippon flex Straight HC-SFE52(B) to 152(B) CE05-2A2223PD-B Daiwa Dengyo MS3106A2223S(D190) Nippon flex Angle Daiwa Dengyo Nippon flex Straight HC-SFE202(B) CE05-2A2410PD-B Daiwa Dengyo MS3106A2410S(D190) Nippon flex Angle Daiwa Dengyo 14 - 14 Conduit Size Model Model ID 1/2 3/4 1 16 22 28 1/2 3/4 1 16 22 28 1/2 3/4 1 16 22 28 1/2 3/4 1 16 22 28 RCC-104RL-MS22F RCC-106RL-MS22F RCC-108RL-MS22F MSA-16-22 MSA-22-22 MSA-28-22 RCC-304RL-MS22F RCC-306RL-MS22F RCC-308RL-MS22F MAA-16-22 MAA-22-22 MAA-28-22 RCC-104RL-MS24F RCC-106RL-MS24F RCC-108RL-MS24F MSA-16-24 MSA-22-24 MSA-28-24 RCC-304RL-MS24F RCC-306RL-MS24F RCC-308RL-MS24F MAA-16-24 MAA-22-24 MAA-28-24 VF-04 VF-06 VF-08 FCV16 FCV22 FCV28 VF-04 VF-06 VF-08 FCV16 FCV22 FCV28 VF-04 VF-06 VF-08 FCV16 FCV22 FCV28 VF-04 VF-06 VF-08 FCV16 FCV22 FCV28 14.0 19.0 24.4 15.8 20.8 26.4 14.0 19.0 24.4 15.8 20.8 26.4 14.0 19.0 24.4 15.8 20.8 26.4 14.0 19.0 24.4 15.8 20.8 26.4 14. SERVO MOTOR 2) For connection of encoder 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor Conduit 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit 1) Plug (DDK) Type Maker Size Model Model ID Nippon flex 1/2 RCC-104RL-MS20F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-106RL-MS20F VF-06 19.0 Daiwa Dengyo 16 MSA-16-20 FCV16 15.8 22 MSA-22-20 FCV22 20.8 Nippon flex 1/2 RCC-304RL-MS20F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-306RL-MS20F VF-06 19.0 16 MAA-16-20 FCV16 15.8 22 MAA-22-20 FCV22 20.8 Straight HC-SFE52(B) to 202(B) MS3102A2029P MS3106A2029S(D190) Conduit Angle Daiwa Dengyo 3) For connection of brake 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit 1) Plug (DDK) Type Straight HC-SFE203B MS3102A 10SL-4P Conduit MS3106A10-SL4S(D190) Angle 14 - 15 Conduit Maker Size Model Model ID Nippon flex 1/4 RCC-102RL-MS10F VF-02 8.3 Daiwa Dengyo 10 MSA-10-10 FCV10 10 Nippon flex 1/4 RCC-302RL-MS10F VF-02 8.3 Daiwa Dengyo 10 MAA-10-10 FCV10 10 14. SERVO MOTOR (2) Waterproof (IP65), EN Standard, UL/C-UL Standard-compliant (a) When using cabtyre cables 1) For connection of power supply 1) Plug 2) Cable clamp Cable Connector Supplied for Servo Motor Servo Motor HC-SFE52(B) to 152(B) HC-SFE202(B) 2) Cable clamp 1) Plug Cable 2) Cable clamp (DDK) Cable OD Model 1) Plug (DDK) CE05-2A2223PD-B CE05-2A2410PD-B Type Model Straight Angle Straight Angle CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS CE05-8A22-23SD-B-BAS CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS CE05-8A24-10SD-B-BAS 9.5 to 13 12.5 to 16 13 to 15.5 15 to 19.1 CE3057-12A-2(D265) CE3057-12A-1(D265) CE3057-16A-2(D265) CE3057-16A-1(D265) 2) For connection of encoder 3) Cable clamp 1) Plug 2) Back shell Cable Cable 1) Plug 2) Back shell 3) Cable clamp Servo Motor HC-SFE52(B) to 202(B) Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug (DDK) MS3102A2029P MS3106A2029S(D190) 2) Back shell Type Straight Angle Model CE02-20BS-S CE-20BA-S 3) Cable clamp (DDK) Cable OD Model 6.8 to 10 CE3057-12A-3(D265) 3) For connection of brake 1) Plug 2) Connector for cable Cable Cable 1) Plug 2) Connector for cable Servo Motor Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug (DDK) 2) Connector for Cable Type Straight HC-SFE202B MS3102A10SL-4P MS3106A10SL4S(D190) Angle 14 - 16 Maker Nippon flex Daiwa Dengyo Nippon flex Daiwa Dengyo Cable OD Model 4 to 8 ACS-08RL-MS10F 8 to 12 ACS-12RL-MS10F 5 to 8.3 YSO-10-5 to 8 4 to 8 ACA-08RL-MS10F 8 to 12 ACA-12RL-MS10F 5 to 8.3 YLO-10-5 to 8 14. SERVO MOTOR (b) When using flexible conduits 1) For connection of power supply 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug 1) Plug (DDK) 2) Connector for conduit Type Maker Nippon flex Straight HC-SFE52(B) to 152(B) CE05-2A2223PD-B Daiwa Dengyo CE05-6A2223SD-B Nippon flex Angle Daiwa Dengyo Nippon flex Straight HC-SFE202(B) CE052A2410PD-B Daiwa Dengyo CE05-6A2410SD-B Nippon flex Angle Daiwa Dengyo 14 - 17 Conduit Size Model Model ID 1/2 RCC-104RL-MS22F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-106RL-MS22F VF-06 19.0 1 RCC-108RL-MS22F VF-08 24.4 16 MSA-16-22 FCV16 15.8 22 MSA-22-22 FCV22 20.8 28 MSA-28-22 FCV28 26.4 1/2 RCC-304RL-MS22F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-306RL-MS22F VF-06 19.0 1 RCC-308RL-MS22F VF-08 24.4 16 MAA-16-22 FCV16 15.8 22 MAA-22-22 FCV22 20.8 28 MAA-28-22 FCV28 26.4 1/2 RCC-104RL-MS24F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-106RL-MS24F VF-06 19.0 1 RCC-108RL-MS24F VF-08 24.4 16 MSA-16-24 FCV16 15.8 22 MSA-22-24 FCV22 20.8 28 MSA-28-24 FCV28 26.4 1/2 RCC-304RL-MS24F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-306RL-MS24F VF-06 19.0 1 RCC-308RL-MS24F VF-08 24.4 16 MAA-16-24 FCV16 15.8 22 MAA-22-24 FCV22 20.8 28 MAA-28-24 FCV28 26.4 14. SERVO MOTOR 2) For connection of encoder 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit 1) Plug (DDK) Type Straight HC-SFE52(B) to 202(B) MS3102A2029P Conduit MS3106A2029S(D190) Angle Maker Size Conduit Model Model ID Nippon flex 1/2 RCC-104RL-MS20F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-106RL-MS20F VF-06 19.0 Daiwa Dengyo 16 MSA-16-20 FCV16 15.8 22 MSA-22-20 FCV22 20.8 Nippon flex 1/2 RCC-304RL-MS20F VF-04 14.0 3/4 RCC-306RL-MS20F VF-06 19.0 Daiwa Dengyo 16 MAA-16-20 FCV16 15.8 22 MAA-22-20 FCV22 20.8 3) For connection of brake 1) Plug 2) Connector for conduit Servo Motor 2) Connector for conduit Conduit Connector Supplied for Servo Motor 1) Plug 1) Plug (DDK) 2) Connector for conduit Type Straight HC-SFE202B MS3102A10S L-4P Conduit MS3106A10SL4S(D190) Angle 14 - 18 Conduit Maker Size Model Model ID Nippon flex 1/4 RCC-102RL-MS10F VF-02 8.3 Daiwa Dengyo 10 MSA-10-10 FCV10 10 Nippon flex 1/4 RCC-302RL-MS10F VF-02 8.3 Daiwa Dengyo 10 MAA-10-10 FCV10 10 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.6 Specifications 14.6.1 Standard specifications HA-KFE Series (Low inertia, small capacity) 23 43 Servo Motor Item Applicable servo amplifier/drive unit 13 MR-E- A 10 Rated output [kW] (Note 1,11) Continuous duty Rated torque 20 0.2 0.4 0.75 (Note 14) (Note 14) 2.4 [N m] 0.32 0.64 1.3 [oz in] (Note 14) (Note 14) (Note 14) 45.3 90.7 184 Power supply capacity [A] [A] Structure (Note 7) Environmental conditions (Note 3) Weight 70 0.1 (Note 1) Rated speed Maximum speed Permissible instantaneous speed Rated current Maximum current Speed/position detector Accessories Insulation class 40 (Note 14) [r/min] [r/min] [r/min] [N m] Maximum torque [oz in] Power rate at continuous rated torque [kW/s] J [ 10 4kg m2] (Note 3) Inertia moment [oz in2] WK2 (Note 2) Recommended ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor shaft inertia moment Servo amplifier' built(Note4,10) in regenerative brake Regenerative brake resistor duty MR-RB032(30W) [times/min] MR-RB12(100W) [kg] [lb] 73 340 3000 4500 5175 0.95 135 1.9 269 3.8 538 7.2 1020 12.1 9.65 24.2 37.7 0.084 0.459 0.42 2.296 0.67 3.663 1.51 8.26 220 190 10 times or less (Note 5) (Note 9) (Note 5) (Note 5) 660 280 (Note 5) (Note 5) 2200 940 Refer to "Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss of servo amplifiers" in Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual. 0.83 1.1 2.3 5.8 2.5 3.4 6.9 18.6 Encoder (resolution : 10000 pulse/rev) Encoder, V ring Class B Totally-enclosed, self-cooled (protection type: IP44 (Note 3,6,8)) Refer to section 14.4.1 0.53 0.99 1.45 3.0 1.168 2.18 3.20 6.61 14 - 19 14. SERVO MOTOR HC-SFE Series (Middle inertia, middle capacity) 102 152 Servo Motor Item 52 202 Applicable servo MR-E- A 70 100 200 200 amplifier/drive unit Rated output [kW] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 (Note 1,11) Continuous [N m] 2.39 4.78 7.16 9.55 Rated duty torque [oz in] 339 677 1015 1353 (Note 1) Rated speed [r/min] 2000 Maximum speed [r/min] 3000 2500 Permissible instantaneous speed [r/min] 345 2850 [N m] 7.16 14.4 21.6 28.5 Maximum torque [oz in] 1015 2041 3061 4039 Power rate at continuous rated torque 8.7 16.7 25.6 21.5 [kW/s] 4 2 (Note 3) J [ 10 kg m ] 6.6 13.7 20.0 4.5 Inertia moment [oz in2] 36.1 74.9 109 232 WK2 (Note 2) Recommended ratio of load inertia 15 times or less moment to servo motor shaft inertia moment (Note4) Servo amplifier' built56 54 136 64 in regenerative brake Regenerati resistor ve brake duty MR-RB032(30W) 165 80 MR-E [times/min] series MR-RB12(100W) 560 270 MR-RB32(300W) 810 MR-RB30(300W) 408 192 MR-RB50(500W) 680 320 Power supply capacity Refer to "Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss of servo amplifiers" in Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual. Rated current [A] 3.2 6 9 11 Maximum current [A] 9.6 18 27 33 Encoder Speed/position detector (resolution: 10000 pulse/rev) Accessories Encoder Oil seal Insulation class Class F Totally-enclosed, self-cooled Structure (protection type: IP65(Note 8)) (Note 7) Environmental conditions Refer to section 2.1 [kg] 5.0 7.0 9.0 12.0 (Note 3) Weight [lb] 11.0 15.4 19.8 26.5 Note: 1. When the power supply voltage drops, we cannot guarantee the output and rated speed. 2. If the load inertia moment ratio exceeds the indicated value, please consult us. 3. When the servo motor is equipped with electromagnetic brake, refer to section 14.8.When the servo motor is equipped with reduction gear, please consult us. 4. The regenerative brake duty indicated is the permissible duty when the servo motor running without load at the rated speed is decelerated to a stop. When a load is connected, the value in the table is multiplied by 1/(m 1), where m load inertia moment/motor inertia moment. At the speed higher than the rated, the permissible number of times is in inverse proportion to the square of (running speed/rated speed). When the running speed varies frequently or when the regenerative mode continues as in vertical feed, calculate regenerative heat generated during operation. Provisions must be made to keep this generated heat below the permissible value. 5. If the effective torque is within the rated torque range, there are no restrictions on the regenerative duty. Note that the recommended load inertia moment ratio is 15 times or less. 6. Except for the shaft-through portion and connector end. 7. When the equipment is to be used in places where it is subjected to oil and/or water, such as on machine field sites, optional features apply to the equipment. Please contact. 8. When the servo motor is provided with the reduction gear, the protection type of the reduction gear section is IP44. 9. At the load inertia moment ratio of 5 times or less, there are no restrictions on the regenerative duty if the effective torque is within the rated torque range. 10. The regenerative brake duty of the 400W or less servo amplifier may vary under the influence of the power supply voltage because of the large ratio of the energy for charging the electrolytic capacitor in the servo amplifier. 14 - 20 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.6.2 Torque characteristics POINT For machines which produce unbalance torque, e.g. vertical lift applications, it is recommended to use the servo motor so that the unbalance torque will be within 70% of the rated torque. (1) HC-KFE series [HC-KFE13] [HC-KFE43] [HC-KFE23] 1.0 [HC-KFE73] 8.0 4.0 2.0 Short-duration operation region 0.25 1.0 0 2.0 0 1000 2000 3000 40004500 Speed [r/min] 4.0 Continuous operation region Continuous operation region Continuous operation region 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Short-duration operation region 2.0 1.0 0.5 Continuous operation region 6.0 Short-duration operation region Torque [N m] 0.5 3.0 Short-duration operation region Torque [N m] 1.5 Torque [N m] Torque [N m] 0.75 (2) HC-SFE series [HC-SFE102] [HC-SFE202] [HC-SFE152] 24 30 Short-duration 6 operation region Short-duration 10 operation region Short-duration 16 operation region 20 3 5 0 1000 2000 Speed [r/min] 3000 8 Continuous operation region Continuous operation region 0 1000 2000 Torque [N m] 15 Torque [N m] 9 Torque [N m] Torque [N m] [HC-SFE52] 10 Continuous operation region Continuous operation region 0 3000 Speed [r/min] 1000 2000 Speed [r/min] 14 - 21 3000 Short-duration operation region 0 1000 2000 2500 Speed [r/min] 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.6.3 Servo motors with reduction gears CAUTION The servo motor with reduction gear must be installed in the specified direction. Otherwise , it can leak oil, leading to a fire or fault. For the servo motor with reduction gear, transport it in the same status as in the installation method. Tipping it over can cause oil leakage. Servo motors are available with reduction gears designed for: general industrial machines and precision applications. Servo motors with electromagnetic brakes are also available. (1) Manufacturing range of servo motor with reduction gear Servo motors with reduction gears that may be manufactured are indicated by symbols (G1(H), G2) in the following table. G1 (H) and G2 are symbols appended to the servo motor models. For General Industrial Machines Reduction Gear Series Reduction ratio Servo Motor (Note) HC-KFE13 to 73 G1 1/5 HC-SFE52 to 202 1/6 1/11 G1 (H) G1 (H) (Note) 1/12 1/17 G1 (Note) 1/20 For Precision Applications 1/29 1/35 1/43 1/59 G1 (H) G1 (H) G1 (H) G1 (H) G1 G1 (H) 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 1/45 G2 Note : Reduction ratios for general industrial machines are nominal values. For actual reduction ratios, refer to (2) and (3) in this section. (2) HC-KFE series Reduction Gear Series Mounting method Mounting direction Lubrication method Packed grease Output shaft rotating direction With electromagnetic brake Backlash Permissible load inertia moment ratio (when converting into the servo motor shaft) Permissible speed (at servo motor shaft) For Precision Applications For General Industrial Machines HC-KFE G2 HC-KFE G1 Flange mounting In any directions Grease lubrication (Already packed) Grease lubrication (Already packed) 200W 400W 100W 750W 1/12 1/20 1/5 LDR101BV American Oil Center Research New Molynoc Mobilplex 46 Mobil Grease No.2 Nisseki Mobil Oil SP Mobil Oil Mitsubishi Same as the servo motor output shaft direction. Available 60 minutes or less at reduction gear output shaft 3 minutes or less at reduction gear output shaft 10 times or less 4500 r/min The actual reduction ratios of the servo motors with reduction gears designed for general industrial machines are as listed below: Servo Motor Nominal Reduction Ratio HC-KFE13(B)G1 HC-KFE23(B)G1 HC-KFE43(B)G1 HC-KFE73(B)G1 1/5 9/44 19/96 1/5 1/12 49/576 25/288 525/6048 1/20 25/484 253/5000 625/12544 14 - 22 14. SERVO MOTOR (3) HC-SFE series For General Industrial Machines HC-SFE G1(H) For Precision Applications HC-SFE G2 Mounting method As in (a) in this section Flange mounting Mounting direction As in (a) in this section In any directions As in (a)(b) in this section Grease lubrication (Already packed) As in (b) in this section LDR101BJ of American Oil Center Research make Opposite direction to the servo motor shaft Same direction as the servo motor shaft Reduction Gear Series Lubrication method (Note2) Recommended products Output shaft rotating direction With electromagnetic brake Available 40 minutes to 2*at reduction gear output 3 minutes or less at reduction gear output shaft (Note1) shaft Backlash Permissible load inertia moment ratio (when converting into the servo motor shaft) Permissible speed (at servo motor shaft) 4 times or less 5 times or less 2000[r/min] 0.5 to 1.5kW:3000[r/min] 2kW:2500[r/min] Note1. The above values are typical values and not guaranteed values. 2. For grease lubrication, the reduction gear is already grease-packed. (a) Lubrication of reduction gears for general industrial machines Oil lubrication cannot be used in applications where the servo motor will move. Specify grease lubrication. For grease lubrication, the reduction gear is already grease-packed. For oil lubrication, pack the reduction gear with oil on the customer side. Mounting Direction Reduction gear model Reduction gear frame No. 4105 4115 4135 4165 Shaft in Any Direction Shaft Horizontal CNHM (leg type) CNVM (flange type) Grease Grease Grease Grease Shaft Downward Shaft Upward CHHM (leg type) CHVM (flange type) CVHM (leg type) CVVM (flange type) CWHM (leg type) CWVM (flange type) (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil (Note) Oil Grease Grease Grease Grease Note: Grease-lubricated type is also available. The reduction gear frame numbers are as follows: Servo Motor HC-SFE52(B)G1 (H) HC-SFE102(B)G1 (H) HC-SFE152(B)G1 (H) HC-SFE202(B)G1 (H) 1/6 1/11 1/17 Reduction Ratio 1/29 1/35 1/43 4115 4135 4105 4115 4115 4115 4135 4165 4165 4165 14 - 23 1/59 14. SERVO MOTOR (b) Recommended lubricants 1) Grease Albania Grease/Shell OIL 2) Lubricating oil Ambient NISSEKI Temperature COSMO OIL MITSUBISHI OIL 10 to 5 0 to 35 30 to 50 IDEMITSU KOSAN CO., LTD GENERAL OIL COSMO GEAR SE 68 BONNOC DAPHNE CE SP 68S 68 DAPHNE SUPER DIAMOND GEAR OIL GEAR LUBE 68 SP 68 COSMO BONNOC DAPHNE CE GENERAL GEAR SP 100S,150S SP SE 100, 150 DAPHNE SUPER GEAROL 100, 150 DIAMOND GEAR OIL 100, 150 GEAR LUBE 100, 150 SP 100, 150 COSMO BONNOC DAPHNE CE GENERAL GEAR SP 220S to 460S SP SE 200 to 460 GEAROL 200,320,460 DIAMOND 200 to 260 GEAR LUBE SP 220 to 460 Shell OIL ESSO OIL Mobil OIL Japan Energy SPARTANEP 68 Mobilgear 626 (ISO VG68) JOMO. Reductus 68 Omala SPARTANEP Oils 150 100, 150 Mobilgear 629 (ISO VG150) JOMO. Reductus 100, 150 Mobilgear 630 to 634 (ISO VG 220 to 460) JOMO. Reductus 200 to 460 Omala Oils 68 Omala Oils 200 to 460 SPARTANEP 220 to 460 Lubricating oil fill amount ( ) Reduction gear frame No. 4135 4165 Fill amount [ ] Horizontal type Vertical type 0.7 1.4 1.1 1.0 (c) Lubricating product changing intervals 1) Grease: 20000 hours or 4 to 5 years 2) Lubricant Changing intervals First time Second time and later Operation hours per day Less than 10 hours 10 to 24 hours 500 hours Half year 14 - 24 2500 hours 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.6.4 Servo motors with special shafts The standard shaft of the servo motor is straight without a keyway. Shafts with keyway and D cut are also available. Except for the servo motor with reduction gear. These shafts are not appropriate for applications where the servo motor is started and stopped frequently. Use a friction coupling or the like with such keys since we cannot guarantee such trouble as broken shafts due to loose keys. Shaft Shape Servo Motor Keyway HC-SFE52 to 202 D cut Straight (Note 3) (Note 2) HC-KFE13 (Note 3) HC-KFE23 to 73 (Note 1) (Note 3) Note: 1. With a key. 2. Without a key. 3. This is a standard. For shape, refer to Section 14.9. (1) Keyway (a) With key R Q QK QL A A A A QL W U Q QK H R Y S [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Section A-A HC-MF23K to 73K HC-UF23K to 73K Variable Dimensions Servo Motor Model HC-KFE23K 43K HC-KFE73K S R Q W QK QL U H Y 14h6 (14) 19h6 (19) 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57) 27 (1.06) 37 (1.46) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 3 (0.12) 5 (0.20) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) M4 Depth 15 (0.59) M5 Depth 20 (0.79) (b) Without key [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) R Servo motor Q QK QL U M8 threads Depth 20(0.79) HC-SFE52K to 152K HC-SFE202K W S A A r Variable Dimensions W QK QL S R Q U r 24h6 (0.94) 55 (2.17) 50 (1.97) 8 0 0.036 (0.31) 36 (1.42) 5 (0.20) 4 0 0.2 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 35 (1.38) 79 (3.11) - 10 0 0.036 (0.39) 55 (2.17) 5 (0.20) 5 0 0.2 (0.20) 5 (0.20) Section A-A 14.6.5 D cut R QK 1(0.039) [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in]) Servo Motor Model HC-KFE053D 13D S 14 - 25 Variable Dimensions R QK S 25(0.98) 20.5(0.81) 8h(0.32) 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.7 Characteristics 14.7.1 Electromagnetic brake characteristics CAUTION Configure the electromagnetic brake operation circuit so that it is activated not only by the servo amplifier signals but also by an external emergency stop signal. Refer to Section 3.9 for details. The electromagnetic brake is designed to hold a load. Do not use it for braking. (1) Characteristics Though the brake lining may rattle during operation, it poses no functional problem. A leakage magnetic flux will occur at the shaft end of the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. (Note 5) Servo Motor HC-SFE Series 52B to 152B Item (Note 1) (Note 4) HC-KFE Series 202B Type Rated voltage Rated current at 20 (68 ) Excitation coil resistance at 20 (68 ) Capacity 13B 23B 43B 73B 0.33 0.42 Spring-loaded safety brake 0 [A] [ ] [W] [N m] Static friction torque [oz in] (Note 2) Release delay time [S] AC off (Fig. a) Braking delay time (Note 2) [s] DC off (Fig.s b, c) [J] Per Permissible braking braking [oz in] work [J] Per hour [oz in] Brake looseness at servo motor shaft (Note 5) [degrees] Number of braking cycles [times] Brake life (Note 3) [J] Work per braking [oz in] 0.8 1.4 24V 10% DC 0.26 29 16.8 9.1 73 57 19 8.3 1176 0.04 0.12 0.03 400 56683.3 4000 566833 34 43.1 6103 0.1 0.12 0.03 4500 637687.1 45000 6376871 6.3 0.32 45 0.03 0.08 0.01 5.6 793.6 56 7936 7.9 43.1 6108 0.1 0.12 0.03 22.0 3117.6 220 31176 9 2.4 340 0.03 0.12 0.03 64.0 9069.3 640 90693 0.2 to 0.6 0.2 to 0.6 0.19 to 2.5 0.12 to 1.2 0.1 to 0.9 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 200 28342 1000 141708 4 567 15 2124.18 32 4535 Note:1. There is no manual release mechanism. When it is necessary to hand-turn the servo motor shaft for machine centering, etc., use a separate 24VDC power supply to release the brake electrically. 2. The value for initial ON gap at 20 (68 ). 3. The brake gap will increase as the brake lining wears, but the gap is not adjustable. The brake life indicated is the number of braking cycles after which adjustment will be required. 4. 24VDC of the power output for interface (VDD) cannot be used. Always use a separate power supply. 5. The above values are typical initial values and not guaranteed values. 14 - 26 14. SERVO MOTOR (2) Electromagnetic brake power supply Prepare the following power supply for use with the electromagnetic brake only. Electromagnetic brake B1 Switch VAR 24VDC : Surge absorber VAR B2 The surge absorber must be installed across B1-B2. For the selection of the surge absorber, refer to section 13.2.5. The electromagnetic brake terminals (B1, B2) have no polarity. (3) Coasting distance At an emergency stop, the servo motor will decelerate to a stop in the pattern shown in the following diagram. Here, the maximum coasting distance (during fast feed), Lmax, will be the area shown with the diagonal line in the figure and can be calculated approximately with Equation 6.1. The effect of the load torque is greater near the stopping area. When the load torque is large, the servo motor will stop faster than the value obtained in the equation. Emergency stop Brake current t1 t2 t3 Machine speed V0 L max = Vo t3 t1 t2 ................................................................................................... (6.1) 60 2 Where, L max : Maximum coasting distance [mm] Vo: Machine's fast feed speed [mm/min] Delay time of control section [s] t1: t2: Braking delay time of brake (Note) [s] t3: Braking time [s] (JL JL) No t3 9.55 10 4 (TL 0.8TB) JL : Load inertia moment converted into equivalent [kg cm2] value on servo motor shaft (Note) JM : Servo motor inertia moment [kg cm2] No : Servomotor speed during fast feed [r/min] TL : Load torque converted into equivalent [N m] value on servo motor shaft TB : Brake static friction torque (Note) [N m] Note: t2 and TB are the values noted in this section Characteristics. JL is the machine's inertia moment at the servo motor shaft. 14 - 27 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.7.2 Vibration rank The vibration rank of the servo motor is V-10 at the rated speed. Measure vibration in the following position with the servo motor installed as shown below. Servo motor Top Measuring position Bottom Servo Motor Vibration Measuring Conditions 14.7.3 Machine Accuracies The following table indicates the machine accuracies of the servo motor around the output shaft and mounting. (except the optional products) Accuracy [mm] Flange Size Measuring Position Less than 100 Runout of flange surface to output shaft a) 0.05 0.06 0.08 Runout of fitting OD of flange surface b) 0.04 0.04 0.06 Runout of output shaft end c) 0.02 0.02 0.03 Reference diagram c) b) a) 14 - 28 100 130 176 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.8 Outline dimension drawing 14.8.1 HC-KFE series (1) Standard (without electromagnetic brake, without reduction gear) Model Output [W] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-KFE13 100 0.084 0.53 (Note)[Unit: mm] 96.5 42 40.5 25 Motor plate (Opposite side) 40 5 2.5 2- 4.5 45 21.5 8h6 Motor plate Top 30h7 Bottom Bottom Top Top 46 Bottom 35.7 Top Bottom 28.7 Bottom Top 6.8 Caution plate TUV plate 25.2 44.5 9.9 Power supply connector pin connection list Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m 20 Protective tube Pin No. Application Encoder cable 0.3m Phase U Phase V Phase W 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Earth 4 With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Arrow A Arrow A BC24190* Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. Model Output [W] HC-KFE23 200 HC- KFE 43 400 Variable Dimensions KL Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] 99.5 49.1 0.42 0.99 124.5 72.1 0.67 1.45 L (Note)[Unit: mm] L 41 62 Motor plate (Opposite side) 2.7 60 30 7 3 4- 5.8 45 14h6 TUV plate Motor plate Bottom Top 50h7 Bottom Bottom Top Top 70 Top 42.8 38.4 Bottom Caution plate 25.2 10.6 9.9 KL Power supply connector pin connection list Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m Protective tube 20 Encoder cable 0.3m With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Pin No. Application 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) 4 Phase U Phase V Phase W Earth BC24191* Arrow A Arrow A Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. 14 - 29 14. SERVO MOTOR Model Output [W] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-KFE73 750 1.51 3 (Note)[Unit: mm] 82 142 39 4- 6.6 8 3 Motor plate (Opposite side) 2.7 80 40 45 TUV plate 19h6 Motor plate Top Top Bottom 58.1 48.7 Top 90 Bottom Bottom 70h7 Bottom Top Caution plate Power supply connector pin connection list 86.7 11 25.2 9.9 Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m Pin No. Application 20 Protective tube 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 0.3m With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Phase U Phase V Phase W 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) Earth 4 Arrow A BC24192* Arrow A Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. (2) With electromagnetic brake Model Output [W] Braking Force [N m] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-KFE13B 100 0.32 0.087 0.89 (Note)[Unit: mm] 124.5 25 42 Motor plate (Opposite side) 40.5 40 5 2.5 2- 4.5 45 21.5 Motor plate 30h7 Bottom Bottom Top 28.7 Top Bottom 46 8h6 Top Bottom 35.7 Bottom Top Top 6.8 Caution plate 44.5 9.9 TUV plate 25.2 65.5 Power supply connector pin connection list Pin No. Application Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m Phase U Phase V Phase W Power supply connector (Molex) 4 Earth 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) 5 6 B1 B2 Insulock 2 - 0.3 2 0.3m Encoder cable 0.3m With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Protective tube 1 2 3 Brake lead 20 Arrow A Arrow A Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. 14 - 30 BC24193* 14. SERVO MOTOR Output [W] Model Variable Dimensions L Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Braking Force [N m] KL Weight [kg] HC-KFE23B 200 131.5 49.1 1.3 0.47 1.6 HC- KFE43B 400 156.5 72.1 1.3 0.72 2.1 (Note)[Unit: mm] L 41 62 60 30 45 3 7 Motor plate (Opposite side) 2.7 4- 5.8 14h6 TUV plate Motor plate Bottom Bottom 38.4 70 42.8 Top Top Bottom Top 50h7 Bottom 10.6 Top KL Caution plate 9.9 68 25.2 Pin No. Application Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m Brake lead 2 - 0.3 2 0.3m 20 Insulock Protective tube Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 0.3m With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Power supply connector pin connection list 1 2 3 Phase U Phase V Phase W 4 Earth 5 6 B1 B2 BC24194* Arrow A Arrow A Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. Model Output [W] Braking Force [N m] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-KFE73B 750 2.4 1.635 4.0 (Note)[Unit: mm] 82 177.5 39 40 8 Motor plate (Opposite side) 2.7 60 4- 5.6 3 45 19h6 TUV plate Top Bottom Top 90 58.1 Top Bottom Bottom 48.7 Bottom 70h7 Motor plate Top Caution plate 25.2 86.7 11 Power supply lead 4-AWG19 0.3m Brake lead 2 - 0.3 2 0.3m Encoder cable 0.3m With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) 20 72 19.5 Insulock Protective tube Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Arrow A Arrow A Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. 14 - 31 Power supply connector pin connection list Pin No. Application 1 2 3 Phase U Phase V Phase W 4 Earth 5 6 B1 B2 BC24195* 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.8.2 HC-SFE series (1) Standard (without electromagnetic brake, without reduction gear) Output [kW] Model Variable dimensions L Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] KL Weight [kg] HC-SFE52 0.5 150.5 51.5 6.7 5.5 HC-SFE102 1.0 175.5 76.5 13.8 7.5 HC-SFE152 1.5 200.5 101.5 20.1 9.5 (Note)[Unit: mm] L 55 12 70 3 4- 9 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. 130 50 Motor plate (Opposite side) 45° 14 5 24h6 Caution plate Top Bottom Top Bottom 16 5 Top 93 Oil seal S30457B 111 Bottom Top 110h7 TUV plate Bottom Motor flange direction U 21 V KL Power supply connector CE05-2A22-23P Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P 41 W Earth Power supply connector layout CE05-2A22-23P BC25010* Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. Model Output [kW] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-SFE202 2.0 42.6 12.5 (Note)[Unit: mm] 175.5 70 79 18 Motor plate (Opposite side) 176 3 75 23 0 Bottom Top Top Bottom 114.3 Bottom 0 0.025 35 0.010 0 Caution plate Top Bottom Top 93 Oil seal 20 0 142 S40608B Motor flange direction TUV plate U 21 Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P 45 V 68.5 Power supply connector CE05-2A24-10P W Earth 46 4- 13.5 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. Power supply connector layout CE05-2A24-10P BC25012* Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. 14 - 32 14. SERVO MOTOR (2) With electromagnetic brake Braking Force [N m] Variable dimensions Output [kW] Model L KL Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-SFE52B 0.5 183.5 51.5 8.3 8.7 7.5 HC-SFE102B 1.0 208.5 76.5 8.3 15.8 9.5 HC-SFE152B 1.5 233.5 101.5 8.3 22.1 11.5 (Note)[Unit: mm] 4- 9 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. L 12 3 Motor plate Caution plate 130 55 70 45° 50 Bottom Top Top Bottom 24h6 Bottom 110h7 14 5 (Opposite side) Top 16 Bottom 5 Top 111 93 Oil seal S30457B Motor flange direction TUV plate Brake U V Encoder connector 21 MS3102A20-29P KL W Earth Power supply connector CE05-2A22-23P 41 Power supply connector layout CE05-2A22-23P BC25011* Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. Model Output [kW] Braking Force [N m] Inertia Moment J[ 10 4 kg m2] Weight [kg] HC-SFE202B 2.0 43.1 52.6 18.5 (Note)[Unit: mm] 223.5 Caution plate 176 79 Motor plate (Opposite side) 70 18 3 75 Bottom Top Bottom Top 114.3 Top Oil seal S40608B 20 0 117 142 93 0 0 0.025 Bottom Top 35 Bottom 0.010 0 23 TUV plate Motor flange direction 21 45 Motor flange direction 68.5 99.5 U V Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P Brake connector MS3102A10SL-4P 46 Power supply connector CE05-2A24-10P Earth W Brake 4- 13.5 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. Brake connector layout Power supply connector layout MS3102A10SL-4P CE05-2A24-10P BC25013* Note: The dimensions without tolerances are reference dimensions. 14 - 33 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.9 Outline dimension drawing (in inches) POINT The values in yards/pounds are reference values. 14.9.1 HC-KFE series (1) Standard (without electromagnetic brake, without reduction gear) Model Output [W] Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-KFE13 100 0.459 1.17 [Unit: in] 3.70 1.59 Motor plate 0.197 (Opposite side) 1.575 0.098 2- 0.177 0.846 Motor plate 45 0.315 1.65 0.984 1.181 Bottom Bottom Top Top Top 1.8 Bottom Top 0.268 Caution plate 0.992 TUV plate 1 1.406 Top Bottom 1.13 Bottom 1.75 0.39 Power supply connector pin connection list Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in 0.737 Protective tube Pin No. Application 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Arrow A Variable Dimensions [in] L KL Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] 200 3.92 1.93 2.296 2.183 400 4.90 2.84 3.663 3.197 Output [W] HC-KFE23 HC-KFE43 Earth 4 Arrow A Model Phase U Phase V Phase W 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) BC24190* [Unit: in] L 1.181 0.276 0.118 1.614 3.23 2.362 0.106 Motor plate (Opposite side) 4- 0.228 45 0.551 TUV plate Motor plate Bottom Top Top 2.7 1.512 Bottom Top Caution plate 0.992 58 1.685 Top 1.969 Bottom Bottom 0.417 0.390 KL Power supply connector pin connection list Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in Protective tube 0.737 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Pin No. Application 4 Phase U Phase V Phase W Earth BC24191* Arrow A Arrow A 14 - 34 14. SERVO MOTOR Model Output [W] Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-KFE73 750 8.256 6.614 [Unit: in] 3.228 5.591 1.535 Motor plate (Opposite side) 0.106 3.150 1.575 0.315 0.118 4- 0.260 45 0.784 TUV plate Bottom Bottom Bottom Top Top Bottom 2.287 1.917 Top 3. 5 43 2.756 Motor plate Top Caution plate Power supply connector pin connection list 3.413 0.433 0.992 0.390 Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in Pin No. Application 0.787 Protective tube 1 2 3 Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-04R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Phase U Phase V Phase W Earth 4 Arrow A BC24192* Arrow A (2) With electromagnetic brake Model Output [W] Braking Force [oz in] Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-KFE13B 100 45.316 0.476 1.962 [Unit: in] 4.902 0.984 1.654 1.575 Motor plate 0.197 0.098 (Opposite side) 1.594 2- 0.177 45 0.846 Motor plate 1.181 Bottom Bottom Top Top Bottom Top 0.268 Caution plate 1.752 0.390 TUV plate 0.992 2.579 1.406 Top 1.8 11 Bottom 0.315 Top 1.130 Bottom Power supply connector pin connection list Pin No. Application Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in Phase U Phase V Phase W Power supply connector (Molex) 4 Earth 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) 5 6 B1 B2 Insulock 2 - 0.3 2 11.8 in Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Protective tube 1 2 3 Brake lead 0.787 Arrow A Arrow A 14 - 35 BC24193* 14. SERVO MOTOR Model Output [W] HC-KFE23B HC-KFE43B Variable Dimensions [in] Inertia Moment WK2 [oz in2] Weight [lb] 184.096 2.57 3.527 184.096 3.937 4.63 L KL Braking Force [oz in] 200 5.177 1.933 400 6.161 2.839 [Unit: in] 1.614 2.441 2.362 1.181 L 0.276 0.118 Motor plate (Opposite side) 0.106 45 4- 0.228 0.551 TUV plate Bottom Bottom Top Top 2. 7 56 1.685 Top Bottom Top 1.512 Bottom 1.969 Motor plate 0.417 KL Caution plate 0.390 2.677 0.992 Pin No. Application Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in Brake lead 2 - 0.3 2 11.8 in 0.787 Insulock Protective tube Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) Power supply connector pin connection list 1 2 3 Phase U Phase V Phase W 4 Earth 5 6 B1 B2 BC24194* Arrow A Arrow A Model Output [W] Braking Force [oz in] Inertia Moment WK2 [oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-KFE73B 750 339.869 8.939 8.818 [Unit: in] 3.228 1.575 6.988 1.535 0.315 Motor plate (Opposite side) 0.106 0.118 3.150 4- 0.260 45 0.748 TUV plate Top Bottom Top 3. 5 43 2.287 Top Bottom Bottom 1.917 Bottom 2.756 Motor plate Top Caution plate 0.992 3.413 0.433 Power supply lead 4-AWG19 11.8 in Brake lead 2 2 - 0.3 11.8 in Encoder cable 11.8 in With connector 1-172169-9 (AMP) 0.787 0.390 2.835 0.768 Insulock Protective tube Power supply connector (Molex) 5557-06R-210 (Receptacle) 5556PBTL (Female terminal) Arrow A Arrow A 14 - 36 Power supply connector pin connection list Pin No. Application 1 2 3 Phase U Phase V Phase W 4 Earth 5 6 B1 B2 BC24195* 14. SERVO MOTOR 14.9.2 HC-SFE series (1) Standard (without electromagnetic brake, without reduction gear) Model Output [kW] Variable Dimensions [in] L KL Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] 12.125 HC-SFE52 0.5 5.925 2.028 36.632 HC-SFE102 1.0 6.909 3.012 75.451 16.535 HC-SFE152 1.5 7.894 3.996 109.896 20.944 [Unit: in] L 2.165 0.47 0.12 2.756 45° 5. 70 9 0.945 Caution plate Top Top Bottom Top Bottom 6.4 96 Top 3.21 Oil seal S30457B 4.37 Bottom 4.331 TUV plate Bottom 4- 0.354 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. 5.118 1.97 Motor plate (Opposite side) Motor flange direction U 0.77 V KL Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P Power supply connector CE05-2A22-23P 1.61 W Earth Power supply connector layout CE05-2A22-23P Model Output [kW] Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-SFE202 2.0 232.913 27.558 BC25010* [Unit: in] 6.909 2.756 3.11 0.71 Motor plate (Opposite side) 6.93 0.12 2.95 7. 8 1.378 Caution plate Bottom Top Bottom Oil seal Top 9. 0 S40608B 6 5.59 Top 4.5 Bottom Top 3.21 Bottom 7 Motor flange direction TUV plate U 0.77 Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P 45 V 2.736 Power supply connector CE05-2A24-10P W Earth 1.81 4- 0.531 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. Power supply connector layout CE05-2A24-10P BC25012* 14 - 37 14. SERVO MOTOR (2) With electromagnetic brake Braking Force [oz in] Variable dimensions [in] Output [kW] Model L KL Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-SFE52B 0.5 7.224 2.028 1175.382 47.567 16.535 HC-SFE102B 1.0 8.209 3.012 1175.382 86.386 20.944 HC-SFE152B 1.5 9.193 3.996 1175.382 120.831 25.353 [Unit: in] 4- 0.354 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. L 2.165 5.118 0.47 0.12 2.756 45° Motor plate Caution plate 50 Bottom Top Top 0.945 Bottom Bottom Top Bottom 4.331 5. 70 9 (Opposite side) 6.4 96 Top 4.30 3.21 93 Oil seal S30457B Motor flange direction TUV plate Brake U V Encoder connector 0.77 MS3102A20-29P KL W Earth Power supply connector CE05-2A22-23P 1.61 Power supply connector layout CE05-2A22-23P BC25011* Model Output [kW] Braking Force [oz in] Inertia Moment WK2[oz in2] Weight [lb] HC-SFE202B 2.0 6103.49 287.588 40.785 [Unit: in] 8.799 Caution plate 6.93 174.165 Motor plate (Opposite side) 2.756 0.71 0.12 2.95 Bottom Top 7 4.5 Bottom Top Oil seal S40608B 9.0 6 5.59 Top 4.606 Bottom Top 3.21 Bottom 1.378 7.8 TUV plate Motor flange direction 0.77 45 Motor flange direction 2.697 3.917 U V Encoder connector MS3102A20-29P Brake connector MS3102A10SL-4P 1.81 Power supply connector CE05-2A24-10P Earth W Power supply connector layout CE05-2A24-10P Brake 4- 0.531 mounting hole Use hexagon socket head cap screw. Brake connector layout MS3102A10SL-4P BC25013* 14 - 38 AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15. MR-E- 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT POINT In this chapter, difference of the operation of MR-E- AG from that of MR-E- A is described. For description not given in this Chapter, refer to Chapters 1 through 14. 15.1. Functions and configuration 15.1.1 Introduction The analog input MR-E- AG Servo Amplifier is based on the MR-Eof speed control and torque control. A Servo Amplifier with capability (1) Speed control mode An external analog speed command (0 to 10VDC) or parameter-driven internal speed command (max. 7 speeds) is used to control the speed and direction of a servo motor smoothly. There are also the acceleration/deceleration time constant setting in response to speed command, the servo lock function at a stop time, and automatic offset adjustment function in response to external analog speed command. (2) Torque control mode An external analog torque command (0 to 8VDC) or parameter-driven internal torque command is used to control the torque output by the servo motor. To protect misoperation under no load, the speed limit function (external or internal setting) is also available for application to tension control, etc. 15 - 1 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.1.2 Function block diagram The function block diagram of this servo is shown below. Regenerative brake option (Note 3) Servo amplifier P (Note3) (Note 2) NFB Power supply 3-phase 200 to 230VAC Single-phase 230VAC MC Servo motor D C (Note 3) (Note 1) DS RA L1 L2 Current detector Regenerative TR CHARGE lamp L3 U U V V W W SM Dynamic brake Fan (MR-E-200AG only) E1 Electromagnetic brake E2 Control power supply Base amplifier OverCurrent current protection detection Voltage detection CN2 (Note 3) Regenerative brake Detector Virtual encoder Model speed control Virtual motor Model speed Model torque Current control Actual speed control A/D RS-232C D/A I/F CN1 (Note 3) CN3 (Note 3) Analog monitor (2 channels) Analog (2 channels) D I/O control Servo On Start Failure, etc. Controller RS-232C Note: 1. The built-in regenerative brake resistor is not provided for the MR-E-10AG/20AG. 2. Single-phase 230VAC power supply can be used for MR-E-70AG or servo amplifiers with smaller capacities. Connect the power cables to L 1 and L 2 while leaving L3 open. 3. The control circuit connectors (CN1, CN2 and CN3) are safely isolated from main circuit terminals (L1 , L2, L3, U, V, W, P, C and D). 15 - 2 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications Servo Amplifier MR-E- 10AG 20AG 40AG 70AG 100AG 200AG Power supply Item Voltage/frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz or 1-phase 230VAC, 50/60Hz 3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz Permissible voltage fluctuation 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 230VAC: 207 to 253VAC 3-phase 170 to 253VAC Permissible frequency fluctuation Within 5% Power supply capacity Refer to Section12.2 System Sine-wave PWM control, current control system Dynamic brake Built-in Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay), encoder error protection, regenerative brake error protection, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure protection, overspeed protection Speed control mode Protective functions Speed control range Analog speed command 1: 2000, internal speed command 1: 5000 Analog speed command input 0 to 10VDC / Rated speed 0.01% or less (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% or less (power fluctuation 10%) 0.2% max.(ambient temperature 25 10 ) for external speed setting only Speed fluctuation ratio Torque limit Set by parameter setting or external analog input (0 to 10VDC/maximum torque) Torque Analog torque command input control Speed limit mode 0 to 8VDC / Maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12k ) Set by parameter setting or external analog input (0 to 10VDC/Rated speed) Structure Environment Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Force-cooling, open (IP00) Self-cooled, open (IP00) Operation Storage [ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing) [ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing) [ ] 20 to 65 (non-freezing) [ ] 4 to 149 (non-freezing) Operation 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Storage Ambient Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt Altitude Max. 1000m (3280ft) above sea level 5.9 [m/s2] or less Vibration Weight 19.4 [ft/s2] or less [kg] 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.8 1.8 2.0 [lb] 1.8 1.8 2.6 4.0 4.0 4.4 Note. The MR-E-200A is scheduled for release. 15 - 3 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.1.4 Model code definition MR - E - MR-E-40AG or less AG Series MR-E-70AG, 100AG MR-E-200AG Analog input Rated output Symbol Rated output [W] Symbol Rated output [W] 100 750 10 70 20 200 100 1000 40 400 200 2000 Rating plate Rating plate Rating plate 15.1.5 Parts identification (1) MR-E-100AG or less Name/Application Display The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number. Refer to Chapter6 Operation section Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and parameter setting operations. MODE UP DOWN SET Used to set data. MODE SET Used to change the display or data in each mode. CN3 MITSUBISHI MR- Used to change the mode. CN1 Communication connector (CN3) Used to connect a command device (RS-232C) and output analog monitor data. CHARGE WV U CNP1 L3L2L1 D C P CN2 CNP2 Chapter6 I/O signal connector (CN1) Used to connect digital I/O signals. Encoder connector (CN2) Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder. Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Chapter14 Section3.3 Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Charge lamp Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables. Motor power supply connector (CNP2) Used to connect the servo motor. Section3.7 Section11.1 Power supply/regenerative connector (CNP1) Used to connect the input power supply and regenerative brake option. Section3.7 Section11.1 Section13.1.1 Protective earth (PE) terminal ( Ground terminal. Section3.10 Section11.1 15 - 4 ) 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) MR-E-200AG Name/Application Display The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo status and alarm number. Refer to Section15.5 Operation section Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and parameter setting operations. MODE UP DOWN SET Used to set data. Section15.5 Used to change the display or data in each mode. Used to change the mode. Communication connector (CN3) Used to connect a command device (RS232C) and output analog monitor data. Cooling fan Installation notch (4 places) Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Chapter14 I/O signal connector (CN1) Used to connect digital I/O signals. Section15.2 Name plate Section1.5 Encoder connector (CN2) Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder. Section3.3 Section13.1.2 Power supply/regenerative connector (CNP1) Used to connect the input power supply and regenerative brake option. Section3.7 Section11.1 Section13.1.1 Charge lamp Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables. Protective earth (PE) terminal ( Ground terminal. ) Motor power supply connector (CNP2) Used to connect the servo motor. 15 - 5 Section3.10 Section11.1 Section3.7 Section11.1 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.1.6 Servo system with auxiliary equipment WARNING To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. (1) MR-E-100AG or less (Note 2) 3-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply or 1-phase 230VAC power supply Refer to Options and auxiliary equipment Options and auxiliary equipment Refer to No-fuse breaker Section 13.2.2 Regenerative option Section 13.1.1 Magnetic contactor Section 13.2.2 Cables Section 13.2.1 Servo configuration software Section 13.1.4 Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3 No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier MODE Personal computer Servo configuration software MRZJW3-SETUP1 SET To CN3 CN3 Magnetic contactor (MC) MITSUBISHI MR-E- To CN1 Command device CN1 Power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL) To CN2 L3L2L1 D C P CNP2 CNP1 Protective earth (PE) terminal (Note 1) Encoder cable CHARGE WV U CN2 (Note 1) Power supply lead L3 L2 L1 Regenerative option P C Servo motor Note: 1. The HC-SFE series have cannon connectors. 2. A 1-phase 230VAC power supply may be used with the servo amplifier of MR-E-70AG or less. Connect the power supply to L1 and L2 terminals and leave L3 open. 15 - 6 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) MR-E-200AG 3-phase 200V to 230VAC power supply Options and auxiliary equipment Refer to Refer to Section 13.2.2 Regenerative option Magnetic contactor Section 13.2.2 Cables Section 13.2.1 Servo configuration software Section 13.1.4 Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3 No-fuse breaker Section 13.1.1 Servo configuration software MRZJW3-SETUP1 No-fuse breaker (NFB) or fuse Servo amplifier Magnetic contactor (MC) MODE SET EZMoto in MITSUBISHI D C P L3 L2 L1 Power factor improving reactor (FR-BAL) Personal computer To CN3 CN3 To CN1 CN1 Command device CNP1 To CN2 CN2 L2 L3 W V U CHARGE L1 Options and auxiliary equipment To CNP2 CNP2 P C Regenerative option 15 - 7 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.2. Signals and wiring 15.2.1 Standard connection example (1) Speed control mode Servo amplifier (Note 8) CN1 1 VIN 9 ALM (Note 2, 4) RA1 Trouble (Note 6) External power supply Speed reached 24VDC Zero speed 10m (32ft) or less (Note 8) CN1 EMG 8 Servo-on SON 4 Forward rotation start ST1 3 Reverse rotation start ST2 5 LSP 6 LSN 7 SG 13 (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop (Note 5) Forward rotation stroke end Reverse rotation stroke end Use external power supply ( 15VDC). (Note 8) CN1 Upper limit setting Analog speed command 10V/rated speed VC 26 LG 14 TLA 2 Upper limit setting Analog torque limit 10V/max. torque SD Plate 2m (6.5ft) or less (Note 9) Servo configuration software Personal computer 12 ZSP RA2 10 SA RA5 11 RD RA4 13 SG Ready 19 LZ Encoder Z-phase pulse 20 LZR (differential line driver) 15 LA Encoder A-phase pulse 16 LAR (differential line driver) 17 LB Encoder B-phase pulse 18 LBR 14 LG Control common 21 OP Encoder Z-phase pulse Plate SD (open collector) (differential line driver) (Note 8) CN3 4 MO1 3 LG 6 MO2 A 10k A 10k (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 Plate SD 2m (6.5ft) or less (Note 1) 15 - 8 (Note 10) (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/ reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 10. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 15 - 9 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) Torque control mode Servo amplifier (Note 8) CN1 1 VIN 9 ALM RA1 12 ZSP RA2 11 RD RA3 13 SG (Note 2, 4) Trouble (Note 6) Zero speed 10m (32ft) or less (Note 8) CN1 (Note 3, 5) Emergency stop Servo-on Forward rotation selection EMG 8 19 LZ SON 4 20 LZR RS1 5 15 LA RS2 3 16 LAR SG 13 17 LB 18 LBR Reverse rotation selection Use external power supply ( 15VDC). 14 LG 21 OP Plate SD (Note 10) External power supply 24VDC Ready Encoder Z-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder A-phase pulse (differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (differential line driver) Control common Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector) (Note 8) CN1 Upper limit setting Analog torque command 8V/max. torque TC 2 LG 14 VLA 26 SD Plate Upper limit setting Analog speed limit 0 to 10V/rated speed 2m (6.5ft) or less (Note 8) CN3 4 MO1 3 LG 6 MO2 A 10k A 10k (Note 9) Servo configuration software Personal computer (Note 7) Communication cable (Note 8) CN3 Plate (Note 7) Monitor output Max. 1mA Reading in both directions SD 2m (6.5ft) or less (Note 1) Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box. 2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits. 3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed. 4. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA, supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2) 5. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) with SG. (Normally closed contacts) 6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. 7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the branch cable (MR-E3CBL15-P). (Refer to Section 13.1.3) 8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier. 9. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 154E. 10. Connect the external 24VDC power supply if the output signals are not used. 15 - 10 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.2.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier The following is the internal connection diagram where the signal assignment has been made in the initial status in each control mode. Servo amplifier (Note) (Note) S T CN1 CN1 S VIN VIN 1 10 SA ST2 RS1 5 SON SON 4 ST1 RS2 3 EMG EMG 8 LSP 6 LSN 7 T Approx. 4.7k External power supply 24VDC 11 RD RD 9 ALM ALM 12 ZSP ZSP Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k Approx. 4.7k SG SG 13 CN1 SD SD Case 15 LA 16 LAR (Note) 17 LB 18 LBR 19 LZ 20 LZR 21 OP 14 LG CN3 S T VC VLA 26 TLA TC 2 LG LG 14 4 MO1 6 MO2 2 TXD 1 RXD 3 LG Case SD PE Note: S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode 15 - 11 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.2.3 Connectors and signal arrangements POINT The pin configurations of the connectors are as viewed from the cable connector wiring section. Refer to the next page for CN1 signal assignment. (1) Signal arrangement 5 3 1 LG RXD SET MODE CN3 MITSUBISHI MR-E CN1 6 4 2 MO2 MO1 TXD Refer to Section 3.3.2 1 3 P5 MR 6 8 10 MDR LG 7 9 5 CNP2 CNP1 MD The connector frames are connected with the PE (earth) terminal inside the servo amplifier. CN1(Speed control mode) 1 2 TLA 4 SON 6 LSP 8 EMG 10 SA 12 ZSP VIN 3 ST1 5 ST2 7 LSN 9 ALM LA 17 LB 19 LZ 21 OP LG 16 LAR 18 LBR 1 2 VIN TC 4 3 RS2 SON 6 5 RS1 20 LZR 22 23 11 RD CN1(Torque control mode) 14 15 7 SG VC 17 LB 19 LZ EMG OP 9 ALM ZSP 15 - 12 RD LG 16 LAR 18 LBR 20 LZR 22 23 11 12 26 LA 21 24 13 14 15 8 10 25 CHARGE 4 MRR WV U 2 LG L3L2L1 D C P CN2 24 25 13 26 SG VLA 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) CN1 signal assignment The signal assignment of connector changes with the control mode as indicated below; For the pins which are given parameter No.s in the related parameter column, their signals can be changed using those parameters. (Note2) Connector (Note1) Pin No. I/O 1 CN1 I/O Signals in control modes S S/T T VIN VIN VIN TLA TLA/TC TC Related parameter 2 I 3 I ST1 ST1/RS2 RS2 No.43 to 48 4 I SON SON SON No.43 to 48 LOP RS1 No.43 to 48 5 I ST2 6 I LSP LSP/ 7 I LSN LSN/ 8 I EMG No.43 48 No.43 48 EMG EMG ALM ALM No.49 9 O ALM 10 O SA 11 O RD RD RD No.49 12 O ZSP ZSP ZSP No.1, 49 SG SG SG LG 13 14 SA/ No.49 LG LG 15 O LA LA LA 16 O LAR LAR LAR 17 O LB LB LB 18 O LBR LBR LBR 19 O LZ LZ LZ 20 O LZR LZR LZR 21 O OP OP OP I VC VC/VLA VLA 22 23 24 25 26 Note: 1. I : Input signal, O: Output signal 2. S : Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode, S/T: Speed/torque control switching mode 15 - 13 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.2.4 Signal explanations For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O column in the table), refer to Section 3.6.2. In the control mode field of the table S: speed control mode, T: Torque control mode : Denotes that the signal may be used in the initial setting status. : Denotes that the signal may be used by setting the corresponding parameter among parameters 43 to 49. The pin No.s in the connector pin No. column are those in the initial status. (1) Input signals POINT The acceptance delay time of each input signal is less than 10ms. Signal Forward rotation stroke end ConnecSymbol tor pin No. LSP CN1 6 Functions/Applications To start operation, short LSP-SG and/or LSN-SG. Open them to bring the motor to a sudden stop and make it servo-locked. Set " 1" in parameter No. 22 to make a slow stop. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.) (Note) Input signals LSP Reverse rotation stroke end LSN CN1 7 LSN 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 I/O division DI-1 Operation CCW CW direction direction Note. 0: LSP/LSN-SG off (open) 1: SP/LSN-SG on (short) Set parameter No. 41 as indicated below to switch on the signals (keep terminals connected) automatically in the servo amplifier: Parameter No.41 Automatic ON 1 LSP 1 LSN Outside torque limit selection TL Turn TL off to make Internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28) valid, or turn it on to make Analog torque limit (TLA) valid. For details, refer to (1)(C), Section 15.2.5. DI-1 Internal torque limit selection TL1 When using this signal, make it usable by making the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. (Refer to (5), Section 3.4.1.) DI-1 15 - 14 Control mode S T 15. MR-E- Signal AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Forward rotation start ST1 CN1 -3 Reverse rotation start ST2 CN1 -5 Forward rotation selection RS1 CN1 -5 Reverse rotation selection RS2 CN1 -3 Speed selection 1 SP1 Speed selection 2 SP2 Speed selection 3 SP3 Functions/Applications Used to start the servo motor in any of the following directions: (Note) Input signals Servo motor starting direction ST2 ST1 0 0 Stop (servo lock) 0 1 CCW 1 0 CW 1 1 Stop (servo lock) Note. 0: ST1/ST2-SG off (open) 1: ST1/ST2-SG on (short) If both ST1 and ST2 are switched on or off during operation, the servo motor will be decelerated to a stop according to the parameter No. 12 setting and servo-locked. Used to select any of the following servo motor torque generation directions: (Note) Input signals Torque generation direction RS2 RS1 0 0 Torque is not generated. Forward rotation in driving mode / 0 1 reverse rotation in regenerative mode Reverse rotation in driving mode / 1 0 forward rotation in regenerative mode 1 1 Torque is not generated. Note. 0: off 1: on Used to select the command speed for operation. When using SP1 to SP3, make it usable by making the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. SP1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Analog speed command (VC) Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9) Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10) Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72) Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73) Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74) Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75) (Note) Input signals SP1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DI-1 DI-1 Speed command Note 0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open) 1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short) Used to select the limit speed for operation. When using SP1 to SP3, make it usable by making the setting of parameter No. 43 to 48. SP3 SP2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 DI-1 DI-1 (Note) Input signals SP3 SP2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 I/O division Speed liimit Analog speed limit (VLA) Internal speed limit 1 (parameter No. 8) Internal speed limit 2 (parameter No. 9) Internal speed limit 3 (parameter No. 10) Internal speed limit 4 (parameter No. 72) Internal speed limit 5 (parameter No. 73) Internal speed limit 6 (parameter No. 74) Internal speed limit 7 (parameter No. 75) Note 0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open) 1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short) 15 - 15 DI-1 Control mode S T 15. MR-E- Signal AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Servo-on SON Reset RES DI-1 PC DI-1 Proportion control CN1-4 Functions/Applications Same as MR-E- A. (Refer to (1) in Section 3.3.2) I/O division DI-1 Emergency stop EMG CN1-8 DI-1 Gain changing Analog torque limit CDP TLA Analog torque command TC Analog speed command VC DI-1 To use this signal in the speed control mode, set any of parameters Analog input No. 43 to 48 to make TL available. When the analog torque limit (TLA) is valid, torque is limited in the full servo motor output torque range. Apply 0 to 10VDC across TLA-LG. Connect the positive terminal of the power supply to TLA. Maximum torque is generated at 10V. (Refer to (1)(a) in Section 15.2.5.) Resolution:10bit Analog Used to control torque in the full servo motor output torque range. Apply 0 to 8VDC across TC-LG. Maximum torque is generated at input 8V. (Refer to (2)(a) in Section 15.2.5.) The torque at 8V input can be changed using parameter No. 26. CN1-26 Apply 0 to 10VDC across VC-LG. Speed set in parameter No. 25 is Analog provided at 10V. (Refer to (1)(a) in Section 15.2.5.) input Resolution:14bit or equivalent Analog speed limit VLA CN1-2 Apply 0 to 10VDC across VLA-LG. Speed set in parameter No. 25 Analog is provided at 10V (Refer to (2)(c) in Section 15.2.5.). input 15 - 16 Control mode S T 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) Output signals Signal ConnecSymbol tor pin No. Speed reached SA Limiting speed VLC Limiting torque TLC Trouble Ready Zero speed Electromagnetic brake interlock Warning Alarm code ALM RD ZSP MBR Encoder Z-phase pulse (Open collector) Encoder A-phase pulse (Differential line driver) Encoder B-phase pulse (Differential line driver) Encoder Z-phase pulse (Differential line driver) Analog monitor 1 Analog monitor 2 CN1-9 CN1-11 CN1-12 [CN1-12] WNG ACD0 ACD1 ACD2 OP CN1-21 LA LAR CN1-15 CN1-16 LB LBR CN1-17 CN1-18 LZ LZR CN1-19 CN1-20 MO1 CN3-4 MO2 CN3-6 Functions/Applications SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed has nearly reached the preset speed. When the preset speed is 50r/min or less, SA-SG are kept connected. VLC turns on when speed reaches the value limited using any of the internal speed limits 1 to 7 (parameter No. 8 to 10, 72 to 75) or the analog speed limit (VLA) in the torque control mode. VLC turns off when servo on (SON) turns off. TLC turns on when the torque generated reaches the value set to the internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28) or analog torque limit (TLA). TLC turns off when servo on (SON) turns off. Same as MR-E- A. (Refer to (2) in Section 3.3.2) I/O division Control mode S T DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-1 DO-2 Analog output Analog output (3) Power Signal Digital I/F power supply input Open collector power input Digital I/F common Control common Shield ConnecSymbol tor pin No. VIN CN1-1 OPC CN1-2 SG CN1-13 LG SD CN1-14 Plate Functions/Applications Same as MR-E- A. (Refer to (4) in Section 3.3.2) 15 - 17 I/O division Control mode S T 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.2.5 Detailed description of the signals (1) Speed control mode (a) Speed setting 1) Speed command and speed The servo motor is run at the speeds set in the parameters or at the speed set in the applied voltage of the analog speed command (VC). A relationship between the analog speed command (VC) applied voltage and the servo motor speed is shown below: The maximum speed is achieved at 10V. The speed at 10V can be changed using parameter No. 25. Rated speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] 10 Forward rotation (CCW) CCW direction 0 10 VC applied voltage [V] CW direction Rated speed Reverse rotation (CW) The following table indicates the rotation direction according to forward rotation start (ST1) and reverse rotation start (ST2) combination: (Note) External input signals Rotation direction Analog speed command (VC) Internal speed commands ST2 ST1 0 0 Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) 0 1 CCW CCW 0 CW Stop (No servo lock) CW 1 CCW CW 1 1 Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) Stop (Servo lock) Polarity 0V Polarity Note.0: off 1: on The forward rotation start signal (ST1) and reverse rotation start signal (ST2) can be assigned to any pins of the connector CN1 using parameters No.43 to 48. Generally, make connection as shown below: Servo amplifier 2k 2k Japan resistor RRS10 or equivalent 15 - 18 ST1 ST2 SG P15R VC LG SD 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 2) Speed selection 1 (SP1), speed selection 2 (SP2), speed selection 3 (SP3) and speed command value By making speed selection 1 (SP1), speed selection 2 (SP2) and speed selection 3 (SP3) usable by setting of parameter No. 43 to 47, you can choose the speed command values of internal speed commands 1 to 7. (Note) External input signals Speed command value SP3 SP2 SP1 0 0 0 Analog speed command (VC) 0 0 1 Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8) 0 1 0 Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9) 0 1 1 Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10) 1 0 0 Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72) 1 0 1 Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73) 1 1 0 Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74) 1 1 1 Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75) Note.0 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open) 1 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short) The speed may be changed during rotation. In this case, the values set in parameters No. 11 and 12 are used for acceleration/deceleration. When the speed has been specified under any internal speed command, it does not vary due to the ambient temperature. (b) Speed reached (SA) SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed nearly reaches the speed set to the internal speed command. Internal speed command 1 Set speed selection Start (ST1,ST2) ON OFF Servo motor speed Speed reached (SA) ON OFF 15 - 19 Internal speed command 2 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (c) Torque limit 1) Torque limit and torque By setting parameter No. 28 (internal torque limit 1), torque is always limited to the maximum value during operation. A relationship between the limit value and servo motor torque is shown below. torque Max. torque 0 0 100 Torque limit value [%] Torque limit value [%] A relationship between the applied voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA) and the torque limit value of the servo motor is shown below. Torque limit values will vary about 5% relative to the voltage depending on products. At the voltage of less than 0.05V, torque may vary as it may not be limited sufficiently. Therefore, use this function at the voltage of 0.05V or more. Servo amplifier 100 TL SG 5% 0 0 0.05 2k 10 TLA application voltage [V] 2k P15R TLA Japan resistor RRS10 or equivalent LG SD TLA application voltage vs. torque limit value 2) Torque limit value selection Use parameters No. 43 through 48 to enable external torque limit (TL) and internal torque limit. Torque limit values can be selected as shown in the following table. However, if the parameter No. 28 value is less than the limit value selected by TL/TL1, the parameter No. 28 value is made valid. (Note) External input signals TL1 TL 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Torque limit value made valid Internal torque limit value 1 (parameter No. 28) TLA Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28 TLA Parameter No. 28: TLA Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28 Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 76 TLA Parameter No. 76: Parameter No. 76 TLA Parameter No. 76: TLA Note.0: off 1: on 15 - 20 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) Torque control mode (a) Torque control 1) Torque command and torque A relationship between the applied voltage of the analog torque command (TC) and the torque by the servo motor is shown below. The maximum torque is generated at 8V. Note that the torque at 8V input can be changed with parameter No. 26. CCW direction Max. torque Forward rotation (CCW) Generated torque 8 0.05 0.05 8 TC applied voltage [V] CW direction Max. torque (Note) Reverse rotation (CW) Generated torque limit values will vary about 5% relative to the voltage depending on products. Also the torque may vary if the voltage is low ( 0.05 to 0.05V) and the actual speed is close to the limit value. In such a case, increase the speed limit value. The following table indicates the torque generation directions determined by the forward rotation selection (RS1) and reverse rotation selection (RS2) when the analog torque command (TC) is used. (Note) External input signals Rotation direction Torque control command (TC) RS2 RS1 0 0 Torque is not generated. 1 CCW (reverse rotation in driving mode/forward rotation in regenerative mode) 1 0 CW (forward rotation in driving mode/reverse rotation in regenerative mode) 1 1 Torque is not generated. 0 Polarity 0V CW (forward rotation in driving mode/reverse rotation in regenerative Torque is not mode) generated. CCW (reverse rotation in Note. 0: off 1: on Generally, make connection as shown below: Servo amplifier 8 to 8V RS1 RS2 SG TC LG SD 15 - 21 Polarity Torque is not generated. driving mode/forward rotation in regenerative mode) Torque is not generated. 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 2) Analog torque command offset Using parameter No. 30, the offset voltage of voltage as shown below. 999 to 999mV can be added to the TC applied Generated torque Max. torque Parameter No.30 offset range 999 to 999mV 0 8( 8) TC applied voltage [V] (b) Torque limit By setting parameter No. 28 (internal torque limit 1), torque is always limited to the maximum value during operation. A relationship between limit value and servo motor torque is as in (1)(c) in this section. Note that the analog torque limit (TLA) is unavailable. (c) Speed limit 1) Speed limit value and speed The speed is limited to the values set in parameters No. 8 to 10, 72 to 75 (internal speed limits 1 to 7) or the value set in the applied voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA). A relationship between the analog speed limit (VLA) applied voltage and the servo motor speed is shown below. When the servo motor speed reaches the speed limit value, torque control may become unstable. Make the set value more than 100r/m greater than the desired speed limit value. Rated speed Speed [r/min] Forward rotation (CCW) CCW direction 10 CW direction 0 10 VLA applied voltage [V] Rated speed Reverse rotation (CW) The following table indicates the limit direction according to forward rotation selection (RS1) and reverse rotation selection (RS2) combination: (Note) External input signals RS1 1 0 Note.0: off 1: on Speed limit direction Analog speed limit (VLA) Polarity Polarity CCW CW CW CCW RS2 0 1 Generally, make connection as shown below: Servo amplifier 2k 2k Japan resistor RRS10 or equivalent 15 - 22 SP1 SP2 SG P15R VC LG SD Internal speed commands CCW CW 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 2) Speed selection 1(SP1)/speed selection 2(SP2)/speed selection 3(SP3) and speed limit values Choose any of the speed settings made by the internal speed limits 1 to 7 using speed selection 1(SP1), speed selection 2(SP2) and speed selection 3(SP3) or the speed setting made by the analog speed limit command (VLA), as indicated below. (Note) External input signals Speed limit value SP3 SP2 SP1 0 0 0 Analog speed limit (VLA) 0 0 1 Internal speed limit 1 (parameter No. 8) 0 1 0 Internal speed limit 2 (parameter No. 9) 0 1 1 Internal speed limit 3 (parameter No. 10) 1 0 0 Internal speed limit 4 (parameter No. 72) 1 0 1 Internal speed limit 5 (parameter No. 73) 1 1 0 Internal speed limit 6 (parameter No. 74) 1 1 1 Internal speed limit 7 (parameter No. 75) Note.0: off 1: on When the internal speed limits 1 to 7 are used to command the speed, the speed does not vary with the ambient temperature. 3) Limiting speed (VLC) VLC turns on when the servo motor speed reaches the speed limited using any of the internal speed limits 1 to 7 or the analog speed limit (VLA). 15 - 23 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (3) Speed/torque control change mode Set "0003" in parameter No. 0 to switch to the speed/torque control change mode. (a) Control change (LOP) Use control change (LOP) to switch between the speed control mode and the torque control mode from an external contact. Relationships between LOP and control modes are indicated below: (Note) LOP Servo control mode 0 Speed control mode 1 Torque control mode Note.0: off 1: on The control mode may be changed at any time. A change timing chart is shown below: Torque Speed Speed control mode control mode control mode Control change (LOP) ON OFF Servo motor speed (Note) Analog torque command (TC) 10V Load torque Forward rotation in driving mode 0 Note: When the start (ST1 ST2) is switched off as soon as the mode is changed to speed control, the servo motor comes to a stop according to the deceleration time constant. (b) Speed setting in speed control mode Same as (1)(a). (c) Torque limit in speed control mode Same as (1)(c). (d) Speed limit in torque control mode Same as (2)(c). (e) Torque control in torque control mode Same as (2)(a). (f) Torque limit in torque control mode Same as (2)(b). 15 - 24 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.3 Startup WARNING Do not operate the switches with wet hands. You may get an electric shock. CAUTION Before starting operation, check the parameters. Some machines may perform unexpected operation. During power-on for some after power-off, do not touch or close a parts (cable etc.) to the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, the servo motor, etc. Their temperatures may be high and you may get burnt or a parts may damaged. Perform pre-operation checks while referring to Section 4.1. Connect the servo motor with a machine after confirming that the servo motor operates properly alone. Use parameter No. 0 to choose the control mode used. After setting, this parameter is made valid by switching power off, then on. 15.3.1 Speed control mode (1) Power on 1) Switch off the servo-on (SON). 2) When power is switched on, the display shows "r (servo motor speed)", and in two second later, shows data. (2) Test operation Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to Section 6.8.2.) (3) Parameter setting Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method. Parameter No. Name 0 Control mode, regenerative brake option selection 1 Function selection 1 2 Auto tuning 8 9 10 11 12 Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant Setting Description 0 2 Speed control mode Regenerative brake option is not used. 12 Input filter 3.555ms (initial value) Electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) is used. 1 5 13 1000 1500 2000 1000 500 0 Middle response (initial value) is selected. Auto tuning mode 1 is selected. Set 1000r/min. Set 1500r/min. Set 2000r/min. Set 1000ms. Set 500ms. Not used Turn the power off to validate changes in parameters No. 0 and 1. Then switch power on again to make the set parameter values valid. 15 - 25 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (4) Servo-on Switch the servo-on in the following procedure: 1) Switch on power supply. 2) Switch on the servo-on (SON). When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is locked. (5) Start Using speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2), choose the servo motor speed. Turn on forward rotation start (ST1) to run the motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction or reverse rotation start (ST2) to run it in the reverse rotation (CW) direction. At first, set a low speed and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input signal. On the status display, check the speed, load factor, etc. of the servo motor. When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the host controller or the like. This servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function under model adaptive control. Performing operation automatically adjusts gains. The optimum tuning results are provided by setting the response level appropriate for the machine in parameter No. 2. (Refer to chapter 7) (6) Stop In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo motor: Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. Note that simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of stroke end (LSP, LSN) OFF and forward rotation start (ST1) or reverse rotation start (ST2) has the same stop pattern as described below. (a) Servo-on (SON) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. (b) Alarm occurrence When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. (c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs. (d) Stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF The servo motor is brought to a sudden stop and servo-locked. The motor may be run in the opposite direction. (e) Simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of forward rotation start (ST1) and reverse rotation start (ST2) The servo motor is decelerated to a stop. POINT A sudden stop indicates deceleration to a stop at the deceleration time constant of zero. 15 - 26 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.3.2 Torque control mode (1) Power on 1) Switch off the servo-on (SON). 2) When power is switched on, the display shows "U (torque command voltage)", and in two second later, shows data. (2) Test operation Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to Section 6.8.2.) (3) Parameter setting Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method. Parameter No. Name 0 Control mode, regenerative brake option selection 1 Function selection 1 8 9 10 11 12 Internal speed limit 1 Internal speed limit 2 Internal speed limit 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant Torque command time constant Internal torque limit 1 13 14 28 Setting 0 4 02 1000 1500 2000 1000 500 0 2000 50 Description Torque control mode Regenerative brake option is not used. Input filter 3.555ms (initial value) Electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) is not used. Set 1000r/min. Set 1500r/min. Set 2000r/min. Set 1000ms. Set 500ms. Not used Set 2000ms Controlled to 50% output Turn the power off after setting parameters No. 0 and 1. Then switch power on again to make the set parameter values valid. (4) Servo-on Switch the servo-on in the following procedure: 1) Switch on power supply. 2) Switch on the servo-on (SON). When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is locked. (5) Start Using speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2), choose the servo motor speed. Turn on forward rotation select (DI4) to run the motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction or reverse rotation select (DI3) to run it in the reverse rotation (CW) direction, generating torque. At first, set a low speed and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input signal. On the status display, check the speed, load factor, etc. of the servo motor. When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the host controller or the like. 15 - 27 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (6) Stop In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo motor: Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. (a) Servo-on (SON) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts. (b) Alarm occurrence When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. (c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs. (d) Simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of forward rotation selection (RS1) and reverse rotation selection (RS2) The servo motor coasts. POINT A sudden stop indicates deceleration to a stop at the deceleration time constant of zero. 15 - 28 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.4 Parameters POINT Before changing the settings of parameters No. 20 through 84, cancel write protection while referring to Section 5.1.1. For any parameter whose symbol is preceded by *, set the parameter value and switch power off once, then switch it on again to make that parameter setting valid. The symbols in the control mode column of the table indicate the following modes: S : Speed control mode T : Torque control mode 15.4.1 Item list Control mode Initial value Control mode ,regenerative brake option selection S T (Note 1) *OP1 Function selection 1 S T 0002 ATU Auto tuning S 0105 No. Symbol 0 *STY 1 2 3 Name For manufacturer setting 1 4 1 5 6 100 PG1 Basic parameters 7 8 Unit Position loop gain 1 S 35 Internal speed command 1 S 100 Internal speed limit 1 T 100 r/min Internal speed command 2 S 500 r/min Internal speed limit 2 T 500 r/min Internal speed command 3 S 1000 r/min Internal speed limit 3 T 1000 r/min For manufacture setting SC1 rad/s 3 r/min 9 SC2 10 SC3 11 STA Acceleration time constant S T 0 ms 12 STB Deceleration time constant S T 0 ms 13 STC S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant S T 0 ms 14 TQC Torque command time constant 15 *SNO Station number setting 16 *BPS 17 MOD 18 19 T 0 ms S T 0 station Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear S T 0000 Analog monitor output S T 0100 *DMD Status display selection S T 0000 *BLK S T 0000 Parameter block 15 - 29 Customer setting 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 20 *OP2 21 22 *OP4 Expansion parameters 1 ZSP VCM 26 TLC 27 *ENR 28 TL1 VCO Initial value Unit 0000 0000 Function selection 4 S T 0000 S T 50 0 Zero speed Analog speed command maximum speed r/min S (Note3)0 (r/min) Analog speed limit maximum speed T (Note3)0 (r/min) Analog torque command maximum output T 100 % Encoder output pulses S T 4000 pulse /rev Internal torque limit 1 S T 100 % S (Note2) mV Analog speed limit offset T (Note2) mV Analog torque command offset T 0 mV Analog speed command offset 30 TLO S 0 mV 31 MO1 Analog monitor 1 offset S T 0 mV 32 MO2 Analog monitor 2 offset S T 0 mV 33 MBR Electromagnetic brake sequence output S T 100 ms 70 0.1 times 34 GD2 Analog torque limit offset Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment S T 35 PG2 Position loop gain 2 S 35 rad/s 36 VG1 Speed loop gain 1 S 177 rad/s 37 VG2 Speed loop gain 2 S 817 rad/s 38 VIC Speed integral compensation S 48 ms 39 VDC Speed differential compensation P S 980 40 For manufacturer setting 0 41 *DIA Input signal automatic ON selection S T 0000 42 *DI1 Input signal selection 1 S T 0002 43 *DI2 Input signal selection 2 (CN1-4) S T 0111 44 *DI3 Input signal selection 3 (CN1-3) S T 0882 45 *DI4 Input signal selection 4 (CN1-5) S T 0995 46 *DI5 Input signal selection 5 (CN1-6) S T 0000 47 *DI6 Input signal selection 6 (CN1-7) S T 0000 S 0403 48 49 *LSPN LSP LSN input terminals selection *DO1 50 51 Output signal selection 1 S T For manufacturer setting *OP6 52 Expansion parameters 2 S T For manufacturer setting 25 29 Function selection 2 For manufacturer setting 23 24 Control mode Name Function selection 6 S T For manufacturer setting *OP8 Function selection 8 S T 54 *OP9 Function selection 9 S T 56 For manufacturer setting SIC 57 0000 0000 53 55 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Serial communication time-out selection S T 0 S T 0000 For manufacturer setting 10 58 NH1 59 NH2 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 S T 0000 60 LPF Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control S T 0000 61 GD2B S 70 62 s Machine resonance suppression filter 1 Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 2 For manufacturer setting 0.1 times 100 % 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio S 100 % 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio S 100 % 15 - 30 Customer setting 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 65 *CDP 66 CDS 67 CDT 68 Control mode Initial value Gain changing selection S 0000 Gain changing condition S 10 (Note 2) Gain changing time constant S 1 ms Name For manufacturer setting 0 69 1 70 1 Expansion parameters 2 71 1 72 SC4 73 SC5 74 SC6 75 SC7 76 TL2 77 Unit Internal speed command 4 S Internal speed limit 4 T Internal speed command 5 S Internal speed limit 5 T Internal speed command 6 S Internal speed limit 6 T Internal speed command 7 S Internal speed limit 7 T Internal torque limit 2 S T For manufacturer setting 200 r/min 300 r/min 500 r/min 800 r/min 100 % 100 78 10000 79 10 80 10 81 100 82 100 83 100 84 0000 Note 1. Depends on the capacity of the servo amplifier. 2. Depends on the parameter No. 65 setting. 3. The setting of "0" provides the rated servo motor speed. 15 - 31 Customer setting 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.4.2 Details list Class No. Symbol 0 *STY Name and function Control mode, regenerative brake option selection Used to select the control mode and regenerative brake option. Initial value 100W : 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and Basic parameters Select the control mode. 0:Speed 1:Speed and torque 2:Torque Motor series selection 0:HC-KFE 1:HC-SFE Selection of regenerative brake option 0:Not used (The built-in regenerative brake resistor used.) 2:MR-RB032 3:MR-RB12 4:MR-RB32 5:MR-RB30 6:MR-RB50 Motor capacity selection 0:100W 1:200W 2:400W 3:500W 4:750W 5:1kW 6:1.5kW 7:2kW 200W : 1000 function column. 400W : 2000 700W : 4000 1kW : 5010 2kW : 6010 POINT Wrong setting may cause the regenerative brake option to burn. If the regenerative brake option selected is not for use with the servo amplifier, parameter error (AL.37) occurs. 1 *OP1 Function selection 1 Used to select the input signal filter, the function of pin CN1-12. 0002 Refer to Name and 0 0 function Input signal filter If external input signal causes chattering due to noise, etc., input filter is used to suppress it. 0:None 1:1.777[ms] 2:3.555[ms] 3:5.333[ms] CN1-12 function selection 0:Zero Speed detection signal 1:Electromagnetic brake interlock signal 15 - 32 column. S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 2 ATU Name and function Auto tuning Used to selection the response level, etc. for execution of auto tuning. Refer to Chapter 7. 0 Initial value 0105 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S Name and function 0 column. Auto tuning response level setting Set value Response level Low response Machine resonance frequency guideline Basic parameters 1 15Hz 2 20Hz 25Hz 3 4 30Hz 35Hz 5 6 45Hz 7 55Hz Middle 8 70Hz response 85Hz 9 A 105Hz B 130Hz C 160Hz 200Hz D High E 240Hz response F 300Hz If the machine hunts or generates large gear sound, decrease the set value. To improve performance, e.g. shorten the settling time, increase the set value. Gain adjustment mode selection (For more information, refer to Section 7.1.1.) Set Description Gain adjustment mode value Interpolation mode Fixes position control gain 1 0 (parameter No. 6). Auto tuning mode 1 Ordinary auto tuning. 1 Auto tuning mode 2 2 Fixes the load inertia moment ratio set in parameter No. 34. Response level setting can be changed. 3 Manual mode 1 Simple manual adjustment. Manual mode 2 4 Manual adjustment of all gains. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by anymeans. 3 4 1 1 100 5 6 7 PG1 Position loop gain 1 Used to set the gain of position loop. Increase the gain to improve trackability in response to the position command. When auto turning mode 1,2 is selected, the result of auto turning is automatically used. To use this parameter, set " 1 " to parameter No. 20 to validate servo lock at stop. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by anymeans. 15 - 33 35 3 S 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 8 SC1 Initial value 100 Name and function Internal speed command 1 Used to set speed 1 of internal speed commands. Setting Control range mode 0 to r/min S Unit instantaneous permissible speed Internal speed limit 1 Used to set speed 1 of internal speed limits. 9 SC2 Internal speed command 2 Used to set speed 2 of internal speed commands. 500 Internal speed limit 2 Used to set speed 2 of internal speed limits. 10 SC3 Internal speed command 3 Used to set speed 3 of internal speed commands. 1000 Internal speed limit 3 Used to set speed 3 of internal speed limits. 11 STA Acceleration time constant Used to set the acceleration time required to reach the rated speed from 0r/min in response to the analog speed command and internal speed commands 1 to 7. If the preset speed command is lower than the rated speed, Speed acceleration/deceleration time Rated will be shorter. speed 0 r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed T S T S T ms 0 to 20000 S T ms 0 to 1000 S T 12 STB 13 STC Time Parameter Parameter No.11 setting No.12 setting For example for the servo motor of 3000r/min rated speed, set 3000 (3s) to increase speed from 0r/min to 1000r/min in 1 second. Deceleration time constant Used to set the deceleration time required to reach 0r/min from the rated speed in response to the analog speed command and internal speed commands 1 to 7. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant Used to smooth start/stop of the servo motor. Set the time of the arc part for S-pattern acceleration/deceleration. Speed command Speed Servo motor Basic parameters Zero speed 0r/min STC Time STA STC STC STB STC STA: Acceleration time constant (parameter No.11) STB: Deceleration time constant (parameter No.12) STC: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No.13) Long setting of STA (acceleration time constant) or STB (deceleration time constant) may produce an error in the time of the arc part for the setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant. The upper limit value of the actual arc part time is limited by 2000000 2000000 for acceleration or by for deceleration. STA STB (Example) At the setting of STA 20000, STB 5000 and STC 200, the actual arc part times are as follows: Limited to 100[ms] since 2000000 During acceleration: 100[ms] 100[ms] 200[ms]. 20000 200[ms] as set since During deceleration: 200[ms] 2000000 5000 400[ms] 200[ms]. 15 - 34 0 0 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 14 TQC Name and function Torque command time constant Used to set the constant of a low pass filter in response to the torque command. Torque command Torque Initial value 0 Unit ms Setting Control range mode 0 T to 20000 After filtered TQC TQC Time Basic parameters TQC: Torque command time constant 15 *SNO Station number setting Used to specify the station number for serial communication. Always set one station to one axis of servo amplifier. If one station number is set to two or more stations, normal communication cannot be made. 0 16 *BPS Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear Used to select the serial communication baudrate, select various communication conditions, and clear the alarm history. 0000 station 0 to 31 S T Refer to S T Name and function 0 column. Serial baudrate selection 0: 9600 [bps] 1: 19200[bps] 2: 38400[bps] 3: 57600[bps] Alarm history clear 0: Invalid 1: Valid When alarm history clear is made valid, the alarm history is cleared at next power-on. After the alarm history is cleared, the setting is automatically made invalid (reset to 0). Serial communication response delay time 0: Invalid 1: Valid, reply sent after delay time of 800 s or more 15 - 35 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 17 MOD Initial value Name and function Analog monitor output Used to selection the signal provided to the analog monitor (MO1) analog monitor (MO2) output. (Refer to Section 5.2.2) 0 Unit 0100 Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 column. Setting Analog monitor 2 (MO2) Analog monitor 1 (MO1) 0 Servo motor speed ( 8V/max. speed) 1 Torque ( 8V/max. torque) 2 Servo motor speed ( 8V/max. speed) 3 Torque ( 8V/max. torque) 4 Current command ( 8V/max. current command) 5 Cannot be used. 6 7 8 9 A Basic parameters B 18 *DMD Status display selection Used to select the status display shown at power-on. 0000 Refer to S T Name and 0 0 function column. Selection of status display at power-on 0: Cumulative feedback pulses 1: Servo motor speed 2: Cannot be used 3: Cannot be used 4: Cannot be used 7: Regenerative load ratio 8: Effective load ratio 9: Peak load ratio A: Instantaneous torque B: Within one-revolution position low C: Within one-revolution position high D: Load inertia moment ratio E: Bus voltage Status display at power-on in corresponding control mode 0: Depends on the control mode. Control Mode Status display at power-on Speed Servo motor speed Speed/torque Servo motor speed/analog torque command voltage Torque Analog torque command voltage 1: Depends on the first digit setting of this parameter. 15 - 36 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 19 *BLK Name and function Parameter block Used to select the reference and write ranges of the parameters. Operation can be performed for the parameters marked . Basic parameters Set value 0000 (Initial value) 000A 000B 000C 000E 100B 100C 100E Operation Basic parameters No. 0 to No. 19 Expansion Expansion parameters 1 parameters 2 No. 20 No. 50 to No. 49 to No. 84 Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write Reference Write No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only No. 19 only 15 - 37 Initial value 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 20 *OP2 Name and function Function selection 2 Used to select restart after instantaneous power failure, servo lock at a stop in speed control mode, and slight vibration suppression control. Initial value 0000 Expansion parameters 1 Restart after instantaneous power failure If the input power supply voltage had reduced in the speed control mode to stop the servo motor due to the undervoltage alarm (AL.10) but the supply voltage has returned to normal, the servo motor can be restarted by merely switching on the start signal without resetting the alarm. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. S Stop-time servo lock selection The shaft can be servo-locked to remain still at a stop in the internal speed control mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Slight vibration suppression control Made valid when auto tuning selection is set to "0400" in parameter No. 2. Used to suppress vibration at a stop. 0: Invalid 1: Valid S S T Encoder cable communication system selection 0: Two-wire type 1: Four-wire type Incorrect setting will result in an encoder alarm 1 (AL. 16) or encoder alarm 2 (AL. 20). 21 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by anymeans. 0000 15 - 38 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 22 *OP4 Initial value Name and function Function selection 4 Used to select stop processing at forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) off, choose TLC/VLC output and choose VC/VLA voltage averaging. Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. 0 How to make a stop when forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is valid. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.) 0: Sudden stop 1: Slow stop S TLC/VLC output selection Select the connector pin at which Torque Limit (TLC) or Speed Limit (VLC) is output. Set value Connector pin No. 0 Not output 1 CN1-11 2 CN1-9 3 CN1-10 4 CN1-12 S T Expansion parameters 1 VC/VLA voltage averaging Used to set the filtering time when the analog speed command (VC) voltage or analog speed limit (VLA) is imported. Set 0 to vary the speed to voltage fluctuation in real time. Increase the set value to vary the speed slower to voltage fluctuation. Set value 23 24 ZSP 25 VCM 26 TLC Filtering time [ms] 0 0 1 0.444 2 0.888 3 1.777 4 3.555 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by anymeans. Zero speed Used to set the output range of the zero speed (ZSP). 0 50 Analog speed command maximum speed Used to set the speed at the maximum input voltage (10V) of the analog speed command (VC). Set "0" to select the rated speed of the servo motor connected. 0 Analog speed limit maximum speed Used to set the speed at the maximum input voltage (10V) of the analog speed limit (VLA). Set "0" to select the rated speed of the servo motor connected. 0 Analog torque command maximum output Used to set the output torque at the analog torque command voltage (TC 8V) of 8V on the assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%]. For example, set 50 to output (maximum torque 50/100) at the TC of 8V. 100 15 - 39 r/min r/min 0 to 10000 S T 0 S 1 to 50000 0 r/min 1 to 50000 % 0 to 1000 T T 15. MR-E- Class No. Symbol 27 Expansion parameters 1 AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT *ENR Name and function Encoder output pulses Used to set the encoder pulses (A-phase or B-phase) output by the servo amplifier. Set the value 4 times greater than the A-phase or B-phase pulses. You can use parameter No. 54 to choose the output pulse designation or output division ratio setting. The number of A/B-phase pulses actually output is 1/4 times greater than the preset number of pulses. The maximum output frequency is 1.3Mpps (after multiplication by 4). Use this parameter within this range. For output pulse designation Set " 0 " (initial value) in parameter No. 54. Set the number of pulses per servo motor revolution. Output pulse set value [pulses/rev] At the setting of 5600, for example, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: 5600 A B-phase output pulses 1400[pulse] 4 For output division ratio setting Set "1 "in parameter No. 54. The number of pulses per servo motor revolution is divided by the set value. Resolution per servo motor revolution Output pulse [pulses/rev] Set value At the setting of 8, for example, the actually output A/B-phase pulses are as indicated below: A B-phase output pulses 28 TL1 29 VCO 10000 8 1 4 Initial value 4000 Setting Control range mode pulse/ 1 S T rev to 65535 Unit 313[pulse] 100 Internal torque limit 1 Set this parameter to limit servo motor torque on the assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%]. When 0 is set, torque is not produced. (Note) Torque limit TL 0 Internal torque limit 1 (Parameter No. 28) 1 Analog torque limit internal torque limit 1 : Analog torque limit Analog torque limit internal torque limit 1 : Internal torque limit 1 Note.0 :off 1 :on When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the maximum output voltage ( 8V). (Refer to Section 15.2.5, (1)(c)) Analog speed command offset Depends Used to set the offset voltage of the analog speed command (VC). on servo For example, if CCW rotation is provided by switching on forward amplifier rotation start (ST1) with 0V applied to VC, set a negative value. When automatic VC offset is used, the automatically offset value is set to this parameter. (Refer to Section 15.5.3.) The initial value is the value provided by the automatic VC offset function before shipment at the VC-LG voltage of 0V. Analog speed limit offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA). For example, if CCW rotation is provided by switching on forward rotation selection (RS1) with 0V applied to VLA, set a negative value. When automatic VC offset is used, the automatically offset value is set to this parameter. (Refer to Section 15.5.3.) The initial value is the value provided by the automatic VC offset function before shipment at the VLA-LG voltage of 0V. 15 - 40 % 0 to 100 S T mV 999 to 999 S T 15. MR-E- Class No. Symbol 30 Expansion parameters 1 AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT TLO 31 MO1 32 MO2 33 MBR 34 GD2 35 PG2 36 VG1 37 VG2 38 VIC 39 VDC 40 Name and function Analog torque command offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog torque command (TC). Analog torque limit offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA). Analog monitor 1 offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor 1 (MO1). Analog monitor 2 offset Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor 2 (MO2). Electromagnetic brake sequence output Used to set the delay time (Tb) between electronic brake interlock (MBR) and the base drive circuit is shut-off. Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment Used to set the ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment. When auto tuning mode 1 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. (Refer to section 7.1.1) In this case, it varies between 0 and 1000. Position loop gain 2 Used to set the gain of the position loop. Set this parameter to increase the position response to level load disturbance. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1,2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. To use this parameter, set " 1 " to parameter No. 20 to validate servo lock at stop. Speed loop gain 1 Normally this parameter setting need not be changed. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2, manual mode and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed loop gain 2 Set this parameter when vibration occurs on machines of low rigidity or large backlash. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed integral compensation Used to set the integral time constant of the speed loop. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate vibration and/or noise. When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used. Speed differential compensation Used to set the differential compensation. Made valid when the proportion control (PC) is switched on. For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 15 - 41 Initial value Unit 0 mV 0 0 mV mV Setting Control range mode 999 to 999 999 to 999 999 to 999 0 to 1000 0 to 3000 T S S T S T S T 100 ms 70 0.1 times 35 rad/s 1 to 1000 S 177 rad/s 20 to 8000 S 817 rad/s 20 to 20000 S 48 ms 1 to 1000 S 0 to 1000 S 980 0 S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 41 *DIA Name and function Input signal automatic ON selection Used to set automatic servo-on (SON) forward rotation stroke end (LSP) reverse rotation stroke end (LSN). Initial value 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 column. Servo-on (SON) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) S Expansion parameters 1 Forward rotation stroke end (LSP) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) Reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) input selection 0: Switched on/off by external input. 1: Switched on automatically in servo amplifier. (No need of external wiring) 42 *DI1 Input signal selection 1 Used to assign the control mode changing signal input pins and to set the clear (CR). 0002 Refer to Name and function 0 0 0 column. Control change (LOP) input pin assignment Used to set the control mode change signal input connector pins. Note that this parameter is made valid when parameter No. 0 is set to select the position/internal speed change mode. Set value Connector pin No. 0 CN1-4 1 CN1-3 2 CN1-5 3 CN1-6 4 CN1-7 If forward rotation stroke end (LSP) or reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to any pin with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. 15 - 42 S/T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 43 *DI2 Name and function Input signal selection 2 (CN1-4) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 4. Note that the setting digit and assigned signal differ according to the control mode. 0 Speed Input signals of control mode CN1-pin 4 Torque selected. control mode Signals that may be assigned in each control mode are indicated below by their symbols. Setting of any other signal will be invalid. (Note) Control mode S T 1 SON SON 2 RES RES 3 PC PC 4 TL TL 0 Expansion parameters 1 0111 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to Name and function column. 1 Set value Initial value 5 CR CR 6 SP1 SP1 7 SP2 SP2 8 ST1 RS2 9 ST2 RS1 A SP3 SP3 D TL1 TL1 E CDP CDP B C F Note: P: Position control mode S: Internal speed control mode This parameter is unavailable when parameter No.42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 4. If rotation stroke end (LSP) or reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to pin 4 of CN1 with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. 15 - 43 S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 44 *DI3 Name and function Input signal selection 3 (CN1-3) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 3. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0 Expansion parameters 1 *DI4 S T and function Input signals of CN1-pin 3 selected. 0995 Refer to S T Name and function Input signals of CN1-pin 5 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 5. If forward stroke end (LSP) or reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to pin 5 of CN1 with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. Input signal selection 5 (CN1-6) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 6. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0 Refer to column. Torque control mode *DI5 Setting Control range mode Name 5 Speed control mode 46 Unit column. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 3. If forward rotation stroke end (LSP) or reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to pin 3 of CN1 with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. Input signal selection 4 (CN1-5) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 5. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0 0882 2 Speed control mode Torque control mode 45 Initial value 0000 Refer to Name and function column. 0 Speed control mode Torque control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 6 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change (LOP) to CN1-pin 6. If reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to pin 6 of CN1 with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. 15 - 44 S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 47 *DI6 Name and function Input signal selection 6 (CN1-7) Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1-pin 7. The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43). 0 Expansion parameters 1 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function column. Torque control mode Input signals of CN1-pin 7 selected. This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1-pin 7. If forward rotation stroke end (LSP) is assigned to pin 7 of Cn1 with parameter No. 48, this parameter cannot be used. *LSPN LSP/LSN input terminal selection Select the pins where the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) and reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) will be assigned. If the signals have already been assigned using parameter No. 42 to 47, this parameter setting has preference. However, if forward rotation stroke end (LSP) is assigned to pin 6 of CN1 (default setting), the setting of parameter No. 46 takes priority. Similarly, if reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) is assigned to pin 7 of CN1 (default setting), the setting of parameter No .47 takes priority. 0 0000 0 Speed control mode 48 Initial value 0 Select the pin where the forward rotation stroke end (LSP) will be assigned. Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 Connector pin No. CN1-5 CN1-4 CN1-6 CN1-7 CN1-3 Select the pin where the reverse rotation stroke end (LSN) will be assigned. The settings are the same as those of the first digit. 15 - 45 0403 Refer to Name and function column. S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 49 *DO1 Initial value Name and function Output signal selection 1 Used to select the connector pins to output the alarm code and warning (WNG). Setting range Control mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 0 column. Setting of alarm code output Connector pins Set value CN1-10 CN1-11 CN1-12 0 SA RD ZP Alarm code is output at alarm occurrence. 1 (Note) Alarm code Alarm CN1 CN1 CN1 display pin 10 pin 11 pin 12 0 Expansion parameters 1 0000 Unit 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 Name 88888 Watchdog AL.12 Memory error 1 AL.13 Clock error AL.15 Memory error 2 AL.17 Board error 2 AL.19 Memory error 3 AL.37 Parameter error AL.8A Serial communication time-out error AL.8E Serial communication error AL.30 Regenerative error AL.33 Overvoltage AL.10 Undervoltage AL.45 Main circuit device overheat AL.46 Servo motor overheat AL.50 Overload 1 AL.51 Overload 2 AL.24 Main circuit AL.32 Overcurrent AL.31 Overspeed AL.16 Encoder error 1 AL.1A Motor combination error AL.20 Encoder error 2 Note: 0:off 1:on Setting of warning (WNG) output Select the connector pin to output warning. The old signal before selection will be unavailable. Set value 0 1 2 3 4 Connector pin No. Not output. CN1-11 CN1-9 CN1-10 CN1-12 15 - 46 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 50 51 *OP6 Initial value Name and function For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0000 Function selection 6 Used to select the operation to be performed when the reset (RES) switches on. 0000 0 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 0 column. Operation to be performed when the reset (RES) switches on 0: Base circuit not switched off 1: Base circuit switched off 52 53 *OP8 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0000 Function selection 8 Used to select the protocol of serial communication. 0000 0 Refer to S T Name and 0 function Expansion parameters 2 column. Protocol checksum selection 0: Yes (checksum added) 1: No (checksum not added) Protocol checksum selection 0: With station numbers 1: No station numbers 54 *OP9 Function selection 9 Use to select the command pulse rotation direction, encoder output pulse direction and encoder pulse output setting. 0000 Refer to S T Name and function 0 0 column. Encoder pulse output phase changing Changes the phases of A/B-phase encoder pulses output . Servo motor rotation direction Set value 0 1 CCW CW A phase A phase B phase B phase A phase A phase B phase B phase Encoder output pulse setting selection (refer to parameter No. 27) 0: Output pulse designation 1: Division ratio setting 55 56 57 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. SIC 0000 Serial communication time-out selection Used to set the communication protocol time-out period in [s]. When you set "0", time-out check is not made. 0 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 10 15 - 47 0 s 1 to 60 S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 58 NH1 Initial value Name and function Machine resonance suppression filter 1 Used to selection the machine resonance suppression filter. (Refer to Section 8.2.) 0000 Unit Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 column. Notch frequency selection Set "00" when you have set adaptive vibration suppression control to be "valid" or "held" (parameter No. 60: 1 or 2 ). Expansion parameters 2 Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency value value value value 00 Invalid 08 562.5 10 281.3 18 187.5 01 4500 09 500 11 264.7 19 180 02 2250 0A 450 12 250 1A 173.1 03 1500 0B 409.1 13 236.8 1B 166.7 04 1125 0C 375 14 225 1C 160.1 05 900 0D 346.2 15 214.3 1D 155.2 06 750 0E 321.4 16 204.5 1E 150 07 642.9 0F 300 17 195.7 1F 145.2 Notch depth selection 59 NH2 Setting value Depth Gain 0 Deep 40dB 1 to 14dB 2 3 Shallow 8dB 4dB Machine resonance suppression filter 2 Used to set the machine resonance suppression filter. 0000 Refer to Name and 0 function column. Notch frequency Same setting as in parameter No. 58 However, you need not set "00" if you have set adaptive vibration suppression control to be "valid" or "held". Notch depth Same setting as in parameter No. 58 15 - 48 S T 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 60 LPF Name and function Low-pass filter/adaptive vibration suppression control Used to selection the low-pass filter and adaptive vibration suppression control. (Refer to Chapter 8.) Initial value Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to S T Name and function 0 column. Low-pass filter selection 0: Valid (Automatic adjustment) 1: Invalid VG2 setting 10 When you choose "valid", 2 (1 GD2 setting 0.1) [Hz] bandwidth filter is set automatically. Expansion parameters 2 Adaptive vibration suppression control selection Choosing "valid" or "held" in adaptive vibration suppression control selection makes the machine resonance control filter 1 (parameter No. 58) invalid. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Machine resonance frequency is always detected and the filter is generated in response to resonance to suppress machine vibration. 2: Held The characteristics of the filter generated so far are held, and detection of machine resonance is stopped. Adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity selection Used to set the sensitivity of machine resonance detection. 0: Normal 1: Large sensitivity 61 GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment when gain changing is valid. 62 70 For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 100 0.1 times 0 to 3000 S 63 VG2B Speed control gain 2 changing ratio Used to set the ratio of changing the speed control gain 2 when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid. 100 % 10 to 200 P S 64 VICB Speed integral compensation changing ratio Used to set the ratio of changing the speed integral compensation when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid. 100 % 50 to 1000 P S 15 - 49 15. MR-E- Class AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT No. Symbol 65 *CDP Name and function Gain changing selection Used to select the gain changing condition. (Refer to Section 8.5.) Initial value Unit 0000 Setting Control range mode Refer to S Name and 0 0 0 function column. Expansion parameters 2 Gain changing selection Gains are changed in accordance with the settings of parameters No. 61 to 64 under any of the following conditions: 0: Invalid 1: Gain changing (CDP) is ON 2: For manufacturer setting 3: For manufacturer setting 4: Servo motor speed is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting 66 CDS Gain changing condition Used to set the value of gain changing condition (command frequency, droop pulses, servo motor speed) selected in parameter No. 65.The set value unit changes with the changing condition item. (Refer to Section 8.5.) 10 kpps pulse r/min 10 to 9999 S 67 CDT Gain changing time constant Used to set the time constant at which the gains will change in response to the conditions set in parameters No. 65 and 66. (Refer to Section 8.5.) 1 ms 0 to 100 S For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 0 68 69 1 70 1 71 72 1 SC4 Internal speed command 4 Used to set speed 4 of internal speed commands. 200 Internal speed limit 4 Used to set speed 4 of internal speed limits. 73 SC5 Internal speed command 5 Used to set speed 5 of internal speed commands. SC6 Internal speed command 6 Used to set speed 6 of internal speed commands. SC7 Internal speed command 7 Used to set speed 7 of internal speed commands. Internal speed limit 7 Used to set speed 7 of internal speed limits. 15 - 50 T r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed S 500 r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed S Internal speed limit 6 Used to set speed 6 of internal speed limits. 75 S 300 Internal speed limit 5 Used to set speed 5 of internal speed limits. 74 r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed 800 r/min 0 to instantaneous permissible speed T S T 15. MR-E- Class Initial value Unit Internal torque limit 2 Set this parameter to limit servo motor torque on the assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%]. When 0 is set, torque is not produced. When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the maximum output voltage ( 8V). 100 % For manufacturer setting Don’t change this value by any means. 00 No. Symbol 76 Expansion parameters 2 AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 77 78 TL2 Name and function 79 Setting Control range mode 0 to 100 S T 10000 10 80 10 81 100 82 100 83 100 84 0000 15.5 Display and operation POINT For the alarm mode, parameter mode output signal (DO) forcible output and test operation mode, refer to Chapter 6. 15.5.1 Display flowchart Use the display (5-digit, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the servo amplifier for status display, parameter setting, etc. Set the parameters before operation, diagnose an alarm, confirm external sequences, and/or confirm the operation status. Press the "MODE" "UP" or "DOWN" button once to move to the next screen. To refer to or set the expansion parameters, make them valid with parameter No. 19 (parameter write disable). 15 - 51 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT button MODE Status display Cumulative feedback pulses [pulse] Diagnosis Alarm Basic parameters Expansion parameters 1 Expansion parameters 2 Sequence Current alarm Parameter No. 0 Parameter No. 20 Parameter No. 50 External I/O signal display Last alarm Parameter No. 1 Parameter No. 21 Parameter No. 51 Output signal forced output Second alarm in past Test operation Jog feed Third alarm in past (Note) Motor speed [r/min] Command pulse frequency [kpps] UP DOWN Fourth alarm in past Parameter No. 18 Parameter No. 48 Parameter No. 83 Parameter No. 19 Parameter No. 49 Parameter No. 84 Speed command voltage Speed limit voltage[mV] Test operation Motor-less operation Fifth alarm in past Torque limit voltage Torque command voltage [mV] Test operation mode Machine analyzer operation Sixth alarm in past Regenerative load ratio [%] Software version L Parameter error No. Effective load ratio [%] Software version H Peak load ratio [%] Automatic VC offset Instantaneous torque [%] Motor series ID Within one-revolution position low [pulse] Motor type ID Within one-revolution position, high [100 pulses] Encoder ID Load inertia moment ratio [times] Bus voltage [V] Note: The initial status display at power-on depends on the control mode. Speed control mode: Servo Motor speed(r), Torque control mode: Torque command voltage(U) Also, parameter No. 18 can be used to change the initial indication of the status display at power-on. 15 - 52 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.5.2 Status display (1) Status display list The following table lists the servo statuses that may be shown: Name Symbol Unit Description Cumulative feedback pulses C pulse Servo motor speed r r/min Feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder are counted and displayed. The value in excess of 99999 is counted, bus since the servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of the actual value. Press the "SET" button to reset the display value to zero. Reverse rotation is indicated by the lit decimal points in the upper four digits. The servo motor speed is displayed. The value rounded off is displayed in 0.1r/min. Analog speed command voltage Analog speed limit voltage Analog torque command voltage Analog torque limit voltage F V U V (1) Torque control mode Analog speed limit (VLA) voltage is displayed. (2) Speed control mode Analog speed command (VC) voltage is displayed. (1) Position control mode, speed control mode Analog torque limit (TLA) voltage is displayed. (2) Torque control mode Analog torque command (TLA) voltage is displayed. Display range 99999 to 99999 5400 to 5400 10.00 to 10.00 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 0 to 100 0 to 300 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 99999 Regenerative load ratio L % The ratio of regenerative power to permissible regenerative power is displayed in %. Effective load ratio J % Peak load ratio b % Instantaneous torque T % Within one-revolution position low Cy1 pulse The continuous effective load torque is displayed. The effective value in the past is seconds is displayed relative to the rated torque of 100%. The maximum torque generated during acceleration/deceleration, etc. The highest value in the past 15 seconds is displayed relative to the rated torque of 100%. Torque that occurred instantaneously is displayed. The value of the torque that occurred is displayed in real time relative to the rate torque of 100%. Position within one revolution is displayed in encoder pulses. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of pulses. The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation. Within one-revolution position high Cy2 100 pulse The within one-revolution position is displayed in 100 pulse increments of the encoder. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of pulses. The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation. 0 to 1310 Load inertia moment ratio dC 0.1 Times The estimated ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor shaft inertia moment is displayed. 0.0 to 300.0 Bus voltage Pn V The voltage (across P-N) of the main circuit converter is displayed. 15 - 53 0 to 450 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) Changing the status display screen The status display item of the servo amplifier display shown at power-on can be changed by changing the parameter No. 18 settings. The item displayed in the initial status changes with the control mode as follows: Control mode Status display at power-on Speed Servo motor speed Speed/torque Servo motor speed/analog torque command voltage Torque Analog torque command voltage 15 - 54 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.5.3 Diagnostic mode Name Display Description Not ready. Indicates that the servo amplifier is being initialized or an alarm has occurred. Sequence Ready. Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion of initialization and the servo amplifier is ready to operate. External I/O signal display Indicates the ON-OFF states of the external I/O signals. The upper segments correspond to the input signals and the lower segments to the output signals. Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The I/O signals can be changed using parameters No. 43 to 49. Output signal (DO) forced output The digital output signal can be forced on/off. For more information, refer to section 6.7. Refer to section 15.5.4. Jog feed Jog operation can be performed when there is no command from the external command device. For details, refer to section 6.8.2. Screen for manufacturer setting. When this screen is being displayed, do not press any other buttons than "UP" and "DOWN". Test operation mode Motorless operation Machine analyzer operation Without connection of the servo motor, the servo amplifier provides output signals and displays the status as if the servo motor is running actually in response to the external input signal. For details, refer to section 6.8.4. Merely connecting the servo amplifier allows the resonance point of the mechanical system to be measured. The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP154E or later) is required for machine analyzer operation. Gain search cannot be used. Software version low Indicates the version of the software. Software version high Indicates the system number of the software. Automatic VC offset If offset voltages in the analog circuits inside and outside the servo amplifier cause the servo motor to rotate slowly at the analog speed command (VC) or analog speed limit (VLA) of 0V, this function automatically makes zero-adjustment of offset voltages. When using this function, make it valid in the following procedure. Making it valid causes the parameter No. 29 value to be the automatically adjusted offset voltage. 1) Press "SET" once. 2) Set the number in the first digit to 1 with "UP"/"DOWN". 3) Press "SET". You cannot use this function if the input voltage of VC or VLA is 0.4V or more. 15 - 55 15. MR-E- Name AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT Display Description Motor series Press the "SET" button to show the motor series ID of the servo motor currently connected. Motor type Press the "SET" button to show the motor type ID of the servo motor currently connected. Encoder Press the "SET" button to show the encoder ID of the servo motor currently connected. 15 - 56 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.5.4 External I/O signal display The ON/OFF states of the digital I/O signals connected to the servo amplifier can be confirmed. (1) Operation Call the display screen shown after power-on. Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen. Press UP once. External I/O signal display screen (2) Display definition CN1 8 CN1 CN1 7 6 CN1 CN1 5 3 CN1 4 Input signals Always lit Output signals CN1 21 CN1 9 CN1 CN1 10 12 CN1 11 Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF The 7-segment LED shown above indicates ON/OFF. Each segment at top indicates the input signal and each segment at bottom indicates the output signal. The signals corresponding to the pins in the respective control modes are indicated below: CN1 Pin No. Input/Output (Note 1) I/O 3 (Note 2) Signal abbreviation Related parameter No. S T I ST1 RS2 43 to 47 4 I SON SON 43 to 47 5 I ST2 RS1 43 to 47 6 I LSP 7 I LSN 8 I EMG EMG ALM 43 to 48 43 to 48 9 O ALM 10 O SA 11 O RD RD 49 12 O ZSP ZSP 49 21 O OP OP Note: 1. I: Input signal, O: Output signal 2. S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode. 3. The signal of CN1A-18 is always output. 15 - 57 49 49 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (3) Default signal indications (a) Speed control mode EMG (CN 1-8) Emergency stop LSN (CN 1-7) Reverse rotation stroke end LSP (CN 1-6) Forward rotation stroke end ST2 (CN 1-5) Reverse rotation start ST1 (CN 1-3) Forward rotation start SON (CN 1-4) Servo-on Input signals Output signals Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF RD (CN 1-11) Ready SA (CN 1-10) Limiting speed ZSP (CN 1-12) Zero speed ALM (CN 1-9) Trouble OP (CN 1-21) Encoder Z-phase pulse (b) Torque control mode EMG (CN 1-8) Emergency stop (CN 1-7) (CN 1-6) RS1 (CN 1-5) Forward rotation selection RS2 (CN 1-3) Reverse rotation selection SON (CN 1-4) Servo-on Input signals Lit: ON Extinguished: OFF Output signals RD (CN 1-11) Ready (CN 1-10) ZSP (CN 1-12) Zero speed ALM (CN 1-9) Trouble OP (CN 1-21) Encoder Z-phase pulse 15 - 58 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.6. Troubleshooting 15.6.1 Trouble at start-up The following faults may occur at start-up. If any of such faults occurs, take the corresponding action. (1) Speed control mode No. 1 Start-up sequence Power on (Note) 2 Switch on servo-on (SON). 3 Switch on forward rotation start (ST1) or reverse rotation start (ST2). 4 Gain adjustment Fault LED is not lit. LED flickers. Investigation Not improved if connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3 are disconnected. Improved when connectors CN1 is disconnected. Improved when connector CN2 is disconnected. Possible cause Reference 1. Power supply voltage fault 2. Servo amplifier is faulty. Power supply of CN1 cabling is shorted. 1. Power supply of encoder cabling is shorted. 2. Encoder is faulty. Improved when connector Power supply of CN3 cabling is CN3 is disconnected. shorted. Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Servo motor shaft is 1. Check the display to see if 1. Servo-on (SON) is not input. Section 6.6 (Wiring mistake) the servo amplifier is not servo-locked 2. 24VDC power is not ready to operate. (is free). supplied to COM. 2. Check the external I/O signal indication to see if the servo-on (SON) is ON. Servo motor does Analog speed command is 0V. Section 6.2 Call the status display and not rotate. check the input voltage of the analog speed command (VC). LSP, LSN, ST1 or ST2 is off. Section 6.6 Call the external I/O signal display and check the ON/OFF status of the input signal. (1), Section Set value is 0. Check the internal speed 5.1.2 commands 1 to 7 (parameters No. 8 to 10 72 to 75). Check the internal torque Torque limit level is too low as limit 1 (parameter No. 28). compared to the load torque. Torque limit level is too low as When the analog torque limit (TLA) is usable, check compared to the load torque. the input voltage on the status display. Chapter 7 Make gain adjustment in the Gain adjustment fault Rotation ripples (speed fluctuations) following procedure: 1. Increase the auto tuning are large at low response level. speed. 2. Repeat acceleration and deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Gain adjustment fault Chapter 7 If the servo motor may be Large load inertia moment causes the run with safety, repeat servo motor shaft to acceleration and oscillate side to side. deceleration several times to complete auto tuning. Note: Switch power on again after making sure that the change lamp has turned off completely. 15 - 59 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT (2) Torque control mode No. 1 2 3 Start-up sequence Power on (Note) Fault LED is not lit. LED flickers. Investigation Possible cause Not improved if connectors CN1, CN2 and CN3 are disconnected. 1. Power supply voltage fault 2. Servo amplifier is faulty. Improved when connectors CN1 is disconnected. Power supply of CN1 cabling is shorted. Improved when connector CN2 is disconnected. 1. Power supply of encoder cabling is shorted. 2. Encoder is faulty. Improved when connector CN3 is disconnected. Power supply of CN3 cabling is shorted. Reference Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Switch on servo-on (SON). Alarm occurs. Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause. Section 10.2 Servo motor shaft is free. Call the external I/O signal display and check the ON/OFF status of the input signal. 1. Servo-on (SON) is not input. (Wiring mistake) 2. 24VDC power is not supplied to COM. Section 6.6 Switch on forward rotation start (RS1) or reverse rotation start (RS2). Servo motor does not rotate. Call the status display and check the analog torque command (TC). Analog torque command is 0V. Section 6.2 Call the external I/O signal display and check the ON/OFF status of the input signal. RS1 or RS2 is off. Section 6.6 Check the internal speed limits 1 to 7 (parameters No. 8 to 10 72 to 75). Set value is 0. Check the analog torque command maximum output (parameter No. 26) value. Torque command level is too low as compared to the load torque. Check the internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28). Set value is 0. Note: Switch power on again after making sure that the change lamp has turned off completely. 15 - 60 (1), Section 5.1.2 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT 15.6.2 Alarms and warning list POINT Configure up a circuit which will detect the trouble (ALM) signal and turn off the servo-on (SON) signal at occurrence of an alarm. When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed. If any alarm or warning has occurred, refer to Section 10.2.2 or 10.2.3 and take the appropriate action. Set " 1" in parameter No. 49 to output the alarm code in ON/OFF status across the corresponding pin and SG. Warnings (AL.E0 to AL.E9) have no alarm codes. Any alarm code is output at occurrence of the corresponding alarm. In the normal status, the signals available before alarm code setting (CN1-12: ZSP, CN1-11: RD, CN1-10: SA) are output. The alarms marked in the alarm deactivation column can be deactivated by the corresponding operations. (Note 2) Alarm code Display CN1-10 pin CN1-11 pin Name CN1-12 pin Alarm deactivation Press Alarm "SET" on Power reset current OFF ON (RES) alarm signal screen. Warnings Alarms AL.10 0 1 0 Undervoltage AL.12 0 0 0 Memory error 1 AL.13 0 0 0 Clock error AL.15 0 0 0 Memory error 2 AL.16 1 0 1 Encoder error 1 AL.17 0 0 0 Board error AL.19 0 0 0 Memory error 3 AL.1A 1 0 1 Motor combination error AL.20 1 1 0 Encoder error 2 AL.24 0 0 1 Main circuit error (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.30 0 1 0 Regenerative error AL.31 0 1 1 Overspeed AL.32 0 0 1 Overcurrent AL.33 0 1 0 Overvoltage AL.37 0 0 0 Parameter error AL.45 1 1 0 Main circuit device overheat AL.46 1 1 0 Servo motor overheat (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.50 1 1 0 Overload 1 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1) AL.51 1 1 0 Overload 2 AL.8A 0 0 0 Serial communication time-out error AL.8E 0 0 0 Serial communication error 88888 0 0 0 Watchdog AL.E0 Excessive regenerative warning Removing the cause of occurrence AL.E1 Overload warning deactivates the alarm AL.E6 Servo emergency stop warning automatically. AL.E9 Undervoltage warning Note: 1. Deactivate the alarm about 30 minutes of cooling time after removing the cause of occurrence. 2. 0: off 1: on 15 - 61 15. MR-E- AG SERVO AMPLIFIER COMPATIBLE WITH ANALOG INPUT MEMO 15 - 62 REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover. Print data *Manual number Revision Sep.,2002 SH(NA)030031-A First edition Mar.,2003 SH(NA)030031-B "Note 2" in (1) Environmental Condition is deleted from Safety Precautions 4. The "concerning sale" item is deleted. The "Compliance with EU Directives (2)" paragraph is added. The "Compliance with UL and C-UL Standards (4)" note is deleted. Section 1.2: Parts of figures are changed. "Note 3" is changed. Section 1.3: Mass of 2kW is added. Section 1.5 (2): Note is deleted. Section 1.6: Note 2 is deleted. Section 1.7 (2): Figure is changed. Section 1.8 (2): Figure is changed. Section 3.1.2: Part of figure is changed. Section 3.7.1: Figure is changed. Section 3.7.2: Paragraph and table are changed. Section 3.8.1: Point is added. Section 3.8.2: Note is deleted. Part of figure is changed. Section 3.8.3 (2): Note is deleted. Section 4.1 (1) (e): Paragraph is changed. Section 5.1.2 (2): Initial setting of parameter No. 0 is examined and note is deleted. Paragraph for third digit of parameter No. 20 is added. TLC/VLC output selection of parameter No. 22 is added. Paragraph is added to parameter No. 42. Body of description is added to parameters No. 43 to 48. Description of setting of first digit of parameter No. 49 is changed. Section 10.2.1: Name of AL.E9 is changed. Section 10.2.2: AL. 12, 13 and 14 are changed. AL. 37 3. is added. Section 11.1: Dimensional drawing is changed. Section 11.2 (4): Dimensional drawing is added. Section 12.1: "Note 2" is deleted. Section 12.2: "Note 3" is deleted. Section 12.3: Note is deleted. Section 13.1.1: "Note 2" is deleted. Section 13.1.1 (2) (b): Note is deleted. Section 13.1.2: Paragraphs 20, 21, 22 and 23 are added. Section 13.2.1: Cable size of 2kW is changed. Note is changed. Part of description is deleted. Table of recommended crimp terminal is deleted. Section 13.2.2: Note is deleted. Amperage of 70A to 200A fuses of MR-E is changed. Section 13.2.3: Note is deleted. Section 13.2.7: Note is deleted. Section 13.2.8: Note is deleted. Print data *Manual number Mar.,2003 SH(NA)030031-B Revision Chapter 14: Point is deleted. Section 14.2: Rating plate is changed. Section 14.7.3: Added. Chapter 15: Added. MODEL MODEL CODE HEAD OFFICE:MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 SH (NA) 030031-B (0303) MEE Printed in Japan This Instruction Manual uses recycled paper. Specifications subject to change without notice.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2003:03:07 13:56:20 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows Modify Date : 2003:03:24 23:09:16+09:00 Page Count : 310 Page Mode : UseOutlinesEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools